8003 Operation Manual
P/N:
Revision:
Print Date:
20791
C
June 2001
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Operation Manual
8003
ISO 9001 ..................................................................................................................................... Certified Process
Registrar: BSI, Certification No. FM 34226 ❖ Registered 04 June 1996 ❖ Amended 01 March 2000
Giga-tronics Incorporated ❖ 4650 Norris Canyon Road ❖ San Ramon, California 94583
925.328.4650 or 800.726.4442 ❖ 925.328.4700 (Fax) ❖ 800.444.2878 (Customer Service) ❖ 925.328.4702 (CS Fax)
www.gigatronics.com
All technical data and specifications in this manual are subject to change without prior notice and do not represent a commitment on
the part of Giga-tronics Incorporated.
© 2001 Giga-tronics Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Printed in the USA.
WARRANTY
Giga-tronics Series 8003 instrument is warranted
against defective materials and workmanship for
one year from date of shipment. Giga-tronics will at
its option repair or replace products that are proven
defective during the warranty period. This warranty
DOES NOT cover damage resulting from improper
use, nor workmanship other than Giga-tronics
service. There is no implied warranty of fitness for
a particular purpose, nor is Giga-tronics liable for
any consequential damages. Specification and
price change privileges are reserved by Gigatronics.
Exclusion of Other Warranties
The Warranty described above is Buyer’s sole and exclusive remedy and no other Warranty, whether written or oral,
is expressed or implied. Giga-tronics specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for
a particular purpose. No statement, representing, agreement, or understanding, oral or written, made by an agent,
distributor, representative, or employee of Giga-tronics, which is not contained in the foregoing Warranty will be
binding upon Giga-tronics, unless made in writing and executed by an authorized Giga-tronics employee. Under no
circumstances shall Giga-tronics be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages,
expenses, losses, or delays (including loss of profit) based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Using Password Protection with the 8003
The Giga-tronics 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer is shipped from the factory with the password protection feature OFF.
Password protection can be user activated to prevent unauthorized changes in the Cal Factor and Calibrator data stored
in the EEPROMs in the 8003 and sensors used with the instrument. It is strongly recommended that this password
protection be implemented immediately to prevent any problems that could arise due to accidental or unintentional
changes to the calibration data stored in the EEPROMs. Use the following procedure to activate the password protection
for the sensors and/or bridge:
1.
☛
Since the password is stored directly in the EEPROM physically contained in the housing of each sensor, attach the
sensor(s) to be protected to the A, B and/or C connections on the front panel of the 8003.
NOTE: Sensors can be moved from one instrument to another, and will still retain their password
protection.
2.
3.
4.
5.
After the 8003 has been turned on, press the CONFIG key on the front panel.
The display will present the primary CONFIG menu. Press the SERVICE softkey at the bottom of the menu.
Press the SENSOR EEPROM softkey of the next menu presented.
A menu will then be displayed showing a choice of sensors A, B or C. Each sensor must be individually password
protected. Either the same or different passwords can be used for each individual sensor.
6. Assuming that sensors are attached to all 3 inputs, press the SENSOR A EEPROM softkey. (If sensors are not
connected to all 3 inputs, repeat the procedure that follows for just the sensors being used.)
7. Press the PASSWD softkey of the next menu presented, and then press the DEFINE PASSWD softkey of the menu
that follows.
8. After the DEFINE PASSWD softkey has been pressed. a prompt will be displayed asking for a password. Six
number keys (the selected password sequence) should then be pressed. These keys will not be shown on the
screen.
9. Once the six number keys have been pressed, the display will again present a prompt asking that the password just
defined be entered again for confirmation. When the password has been confirmed, the defined password will then
be accepted.
10. Then press RETURN and PROGRAM EEPROM to store the password in the sensor EEPROM. From this point on,
the password must be entered before any calibration data can be changed in the sensor EEPROM.
11. Start with Step 6 for the next sensor to be protected.
For further information on accessing the softkeys used to store a password in the sensor EEPROM, see pages 2-64 and
2-65 in the OPERATION chapter (Operation Manual).
1.
The following procedure should be used to activate password protection for the calibrator in the 8003.
2.
Press the CONFIG key on the front panel, and then press the SERVICE softkey at the bottom of the primary
CONFIG menu.
3.
Press the SET CAL softkey at the top of the next menu presented.
The next menu will contain a softkey label called DEFINE PASSWD. The DEFINE PASSWD softkey is used to define a
password that future users will have to enter in order to change the calibrator output. When this softkey is pressed, a
prompt is presented asking for a new password. Six number keys (the selected password sequence) should then be
pressed. The keys being pressed will not be shown on the screen. Once the six number keys have been pressed, the
display will again present a prompt asking that the password just defined be entered again to confirm the password.
When the password is confirmed, the defined password will be enabled.
☛
NOTE: Jumper W1 on the Calibrator Board must be moved to pins 2 and 3 from pins 1 and 2 to complete
the enabling of password protection.
(The CLEAR PASSWD softkey in the same menu as above is used to clear the password. Once this softkey is pressed,
the password will be cleared and future users will be able to adjust the calibrator output without having to know a
password until one is assigned again).
Further information on accessing the softkeys used in setting the calibrator output is given on page 2-61 in the
OPERATION chapter (Operation Manual).
Contents
About This Manual .......................................................................................................... ix
Conventions ..................................................................................................................... xi
Record of Manual Changes ............................................................................................ xiii
Special Configurations ..................................................................................................... xv
1
Introduction
1.1
Description....................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1
1.2
Installation ....................................................................................................1-2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.10
1.2.11
1.2.12
1.3
Features .......................................................................................1-1
Safety Precautions ........................................................................1-2
1.2.1.1
Power Input, Fuse & Voltage Selector ............................ 1-3
Line Voltage & Fuse Selection .......................................................1-3
1.2.2.1
Power Sensors............................................................... 1-3
1.2.2.2
Power Sensors Accessories ........................................... 1-3
Power Sensor Precautions ............................................................1-3
Power Requirements ....................................................................1-4
1.2.4.1
Standard Voltage Selector & Fuse Holder....................... 1-5
1.2.4.2
VDE Type Voltage Selector & Fuse Holder ...................... 1-5
Environmental Requirements ........................................................1-5
Items Furnished ............................................................................1-5
Items Required .............................................................................1-6
Tools & Test Equipment ...............................................................1-6
Cooling .........................................................................................1-6
Cleaning .......................................................................................1-6
Receiving Inspection .....................................................................1-6
Preparation for Reshipment ..........................................................1-6
Specifications................................................................................................1-7
1.3.1
1.3.2
Cursors & Markers .......................................................................1-8
Accuracy ......................................................................................1-9
1.3.2.1
Transmission Loss or Gain Measurements..................... 1-9
1.3.2.2
Reflection Measurements............................................. 1-10
1.3.2.3
Absolute Power Measurement Accuracy...................... 1-11
1.4
GPIB Interface .............................................................................................1-13
1.5
Rear Panel Inputs & Outputs.......................................................................1-14
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.6
Signal Sources ............................................................................................1-15
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.7
BNC Connectors .........................................................................1-14
GPIB Connectors ........................................................................1-14
System Integrated ......................................................................1-15
Operator Integrated ....................................................................1-15
Modulation .................................................................................1-15
General Specifications .................................................................................1-15
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
i
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2
Operation
2.1
Introduction...................................................................................................2-1
2.2
Front & Rear Panel Descriptions....................................................................2-1
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
Softkey Functional Description ....................................................................2-12
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.4
2.6.5
2.6.6
2.8.2
2.8.3
Calibrating for Power Measurement ...........................................2-67
2.8.1.1
Calibration Intervals..................................................... 2-68
Path Calibration Correction for Component Variations .................2-69
2.8.2.1
Set Up Sweep Parameters........................................... 2-69
2.8.2.2
Frequency Response Correction .................................. 2-70
Making a Device Measurement ...................................................2-73
Insertion & Return Loss Measurements.......................................................2-75
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.9.4
2.9.5
2.9.6
ii
PRESET Key ................................................................................2-57
CONFIG Key ................................................................................2-57
Front Panel Operation..................................................................................2-66
2.8.1
2.9
General Description ....................................................................2-51
ATE Operation ............................................................................2-51
8003 Source Compatibility ..........................................................2-51
Key Operation .............................................................................2-52
2.6.4.1
UPDATE SWEEPER ON/OFF Key .................................. 2-52
2.6.4.2
START Key .................................................................. 2-52
2.6.4.3
STOP Key .................................................................... 2-53
POWER Key ................................................................................2-54
SWEEP TIME Key .......................................................................2-56
SYSTEM Controls ........................................................................................2-57
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.8
MEAS Key ..................................................................................2-18
SCALE Key ..................................................................................2-22
DISPLAY Key ..............................................................................2-24
CAL Key ......................................................................................2-36
CURSOR Key ..............................................................................2-40
MEMORY Key .............................................................................2-47
SOURCE Controls ........................................................................................2-51
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.7
OFF Key ......................................................................................2-15
DEFINE Key ................................................................................2-15
FUNCTION Controls.....................................................................................2-18
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.6
Softkey Labels & Color Indications ..............................................2-12
Channel & Function Selection .....................................................2-12
Sensors & Sensor Calibration .....................................................2-12
Absolute Power & Swept Capabilities .........................................2-13
Graph & Readout Display Modes ................................................2-13
Path Calibration Memory ............................................................2-13
Trace Memory ............................................................................2-14
Power On ...................................................................................2-14
CHANNEL Controls......................................................................................2-15
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.5
GPIB Address Selection ................................................................2-7
Display Description .......................................................................2-8
Single-Sensor Insertion Loss Measurement ................................2-75
2.9.1.1
Using Channels ........................................................... 2-76
Two-Sensor Insertion Loss Measurements .................................2-77
Single-Sensor Return Loss Measurements ..................................2-79
Two-Sensor Return Loss Measurements ....................................2-81
Three-Sensor Configurations ......................................................2-82
Trace Memory ............................................................................2-82
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Preface
2.10
Scaling the Display......................................................................................2-84
2.10.1
2.10.2
2.11
Cursors & Markers ......................................................................................2-87
2.11.1
2.11.2
2.11.3
2.11.4
2.11.5
2.11.6
2.11.7
2.12
CW Power Measurements ..........................................................2-98
Mixed Mode Measurements .......................................................2-98
Cal Factor Corrections in the CW Mode ......................................2-99
Sensor Offsets ..........................................................................2-100
Other CW Functions .................................................................2-100
Accurate Range Measurements.................................................................2-102
2.13.1
2.13.2
2.14
Search Functions Using the Cursor .............................................2-87
Min & Max Search .....................................................................2-87
Searches on Frequency Selective Devices ...................................2-89
Bandwidth Searches ..................................................................2-91
Cursor Delta (∆) Functions ..........................................................2-92
Cursors on Multiple Channels .....................................................2-93
Markers ......................................................................................2-94
Power Measurements .................................................................................2-95
2.12.1
2.12.2
2.12.3
2.12.4
2.12.5
2.13
Hints on Simplified Scaling .........................................................2-86
Using the Cursor to Set the Reference Level ...............................2-86
Temperature Stability ...............................................................2-102
Measurement Modes ................................................................2-102
2.13.2.1
CW Mode................................................................... 2-102
2.13.2.2
Swept Mode with AC Detection................................. 2-103
2.13.2.3
Swept Mode with DC Detection................................. 2-103
8003 Power Sweep Measurements...........................................................2-104
3
Remote Operation
3.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................3-1
3.2
IEEE Bus Interface .........................................................................................3-1
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
Connect the System Controller .....................................................3-1
Set the GPIB Address ...................................................................3-1
3.2.2.1
Programming the 8003 .................................................. 3-2
Structured GPIB Language ............................................................................3-7
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
3.3.10
3.3.11
3.3.12
3.3.13
3.3.14
3.3.15
3.3.16
3.3.17
3.3.18
3.3.19
3.3.20
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Common Structure .......................................................................3-7
8003 GPIB Commands .................................................................3-7
Command Execution ..................................................................3-10
3.3.3.1
hs Definition................................................................. 3-10
3.3.3.2
ds Definition................................................................. 3-10
3.3.3.3
us Definition................................................................. 3-10
3.3.3.4
EOL Definition .............................................................. 3-10
3.3.3.5
Case Insensitivity ......................................................... 3-10
IEEE GPIB Interface Characteristics .............................................3-11
Channel Bias Voltage Definition Command Structure ..................3-12
Sensor Calibration Command Structure ......................................3-12
Channel Definition Command Structure ......................................3-13
Cursor Definition Command Structure ........................................3-14
Instrument Preset Command Structure .......................................3-18
Disable Private Bus Command Structure ....................................3-19
Enable Private Bus Command Structure .....................................3-19
External Status Register Query Command Structure ...................3-20
Fixed Frequency Source Mode Definition Command Structure ...3-21
Graph Display Definition Command Structure .............................3-23
Instrument Identifier Command Structure ...................................3-23
Input Command Structure ..........................................................3-24
Key Stroke Emulation Enable/Disable Command Structure ..........3-25
Memory Command Structure .....................................................3-29
Measurement Query Command Structure ..................................3-30
Plot Command Structure ............................................................3-33
iii
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.3.21
3.3.22
3.3.23
3.3.24
3.3.25
3.3.26
3.3.27
3.3.28
3.3.29
3.3.30
3.3.31
3.3.32
3.3.33
3.3.34
CW Power Measurement Command Structure ...........................3-36
Temperature & Low Level Offset Update Structure .....................3-49
Print Definition Command Structure ...........................................3-49
Readout Display Definition Command Structure .........................3-50
Sensor Definition Command Structure ........................................3-51
Sensor Short/Open Calibration Command Structure ...................3-53
Swept Measurement Command Structure ..................................3-54
Start/Stop Swept Frequency Source Mode Def. Cmd. Structure ..3-64
Span Swept Frequency Source Mode Def. Cmd. Structure .........3-67
Sensor Path Calibration Command Structure ..............................3-69
Sensor Zeroing Command Structure ...........................................3-70
STATUS MESSAGES ..................................................................3-70
3.3.32.1
488.2 Status Byte........................................................ 3-70
3.3.32.2
488.2 External Status.................................................. 3-71
GPIB/PRIVATE Interface ..............................................................3-71
Pass Through Feature .................................................................3-72
4
Performance Test & Calibration
4.1
General..........................................................................................................4-1
4.2
Calibrator Verification Procedure....................................................................4-3
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.3
Calibrator Output Power Reference Level ......................................4-3
4.2.1.1
Procedure...................................................................... 4-3
Calibrator Frequency Check ..........................................................4-5
Performance Verification Tests ......................................................................4-6
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9
4.3.10
4.3.11
Equipment Required .....................................................................4-6
Instrument Plus Power Sensor Linearity .......................................4-7
4.3.2.1
Test Description ............................................................ 4-7
4.3.2.2
Setup Parameters.......................................................... 4-8
4.3.2.3
Test Procedure .............................................................. 4-8
Serial Port Check ........................................................................4-10
GPIB/System Port Check .............................................................4-10
GPIB/Private Port Check ..............................................................4-11
Sweep in Connector Check .........................................................4-11
AC Mode Output Connector Check .............................................4-12
Bias Output Connector Check .....................................................4-12
DAC Output Connector Check .....................................................4-13
RGB Video Output Connector Check ...........................................4-13
SUMMARY .................................................................................4-13
A
Power Sensors
A.1
A.2
Introduction.................................................................................................. A-1
Power Sensor Selection................................................................................ A-1
A.2.1
A.2.2
iv
Power Sensor Selection Charts ..................................................... A-2
Directional Bridges........................................................................ A-4
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Preface
B
System Configuration
B.1
Introduction ................................................................................................. B-1
B.2
8003 Default Parameters.............................................................................. B-1
B.3
8003 System................................................................................................ B-3
B.3.1
B.3.2
B.3.3
B.4
B.4.4
PaintJet Color GPIB Cable Interconnections ..................................
ThinkJet GPIB Cable Interconnections...........................................
LaserJet Family RS-232 Cable Interconnections............................
B.4.3.1
RS-232 Electrical Description .....................................
LaserJet Printer Switch & Jumper Location and Settings..............
B-7
B-7
B-8
B-8
B-9
Plotter GPIB Installation Interconnections & Pen Colors.............................. B-10
B.5.1
B.5.2
B.5.3
B.5.4
B.5.5
B.6
B-3
B-3
B-4
B-4
B-5
Printer Installation ........................................................................................ B-6
B.4.1
B.4.2
B.4.3
B.5
Sensor Installation ........................................................................
Bridge Installation .........................................................................
Sweeper Installation .....................................................................
B.3.3.1
8003 to Sweeper BNC Connections ...........................
B.3.3.2
GPIB Interconnect Cable Connections ........................
HP 7550A ...................................................................................
B.5.1.1
HP 7550A Pen Color Format (8 Pens).......................
HP 7440A ...................................................................................
B.5.2.1
HP 7440A Pen Color Format (8 Pens).......................
HP 7475A ...................................................................................
B.5.3.1
HP 7475A Pen Color Format (6 Pens).......................
HP 7470A ..................................................................................
B.5.4.1
HP 7470A Pen Color Format (2 Pens).......................
HP 7090A ..................................................................................
B.5.5.1
HP 7090A Pen Color Format (6 Pens).......................
B-10
B-10
B-11
B-11
B-12
B-12
B-13
B-13
B-14
B-14
Connecting Analyzer to an Instrument Controller ....................................... B-15
Index
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer Index .................................................................. Index-1
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
v
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Illustrations
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
1-1:
1-2:
1-3:
1-4:
1-5:
2-1:
2-2:
2-3:
2-4:
2-5:
2-6:
2-7:
2-8:
2-9:
2-10:
2-11:
2-12:
2-13:
2-14:
2-15:
2-16:
2-17:
2-18:
2-19:
2-20:
2-21:
2-22:
2-23:
2-24:
2-25:
2-26:
2-27:
2-28:
2-29:
2-30:
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
2-31:
2-32:
2-33:
2-34:
2-35:
2-36:
2-37:
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
2-38:
2-39:
2-40:
2-41:
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
2-42:
2-43:
2-44:
2-45:
2-46:
2-47:
2-48:
Figure 2-49:
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
vi
2-50:
2-51:
2-52:
2-53:
2-54:
2-55:
Power Line Connection .........................................................................1-2
Operating Voltage Selection..................................................................1-4
Uncertainty Due to Instrument Linearity & Zero Set vs. Input Power ....1-9
Reflection Uncertainty Relative to Directivity .......................................1-10
Reflection Uncertainty Relative to Source Match.................................1-10
8003 Front & Rear Panel Components..................................................2-2
Display Screen Information Locations ...................................................2-8
Typical Channel Summary Indications ................................................2-10
8003 Front Panel Controls ..................................................................2-12
Channel Control Menus Access w/ DEFINE Key ..................................2-17
Function Menus Accessed with the MEAS & SCALE Keys..................2-18
Function Menus Accessed w/ DISPLAY Key........................................2-26
PLOT ALL Function Hardcopy Printout (Typical)..................................2-27
PLOT 4 Function Hardcopy Printout....................................................2-28
SC P1P2 Function Screen Hardcopy Printout ......................................2-29
Function Menus Accessed with the CAL Key......................................2-36
Function Menus Accessed with the CURSOR & MEMORY Keys .........2-42
Softkey Menu Change from Frequency Change Prompt ......................2-52
Stop Key Softkey Menu Prompt ..........................................................2-53
Power Softkey Menu Prompt ..............................................................2-54
System Control Menus Accessed with CONFIG Key (Part 1) ...............2-58
System Control Menus Accessed with the CONFIG Key (Part 2) .........2-59
Analyzer, Sweeper, Sensor & Bridge Interconnection .........................2-66
CAL Softkey Menu ..............................................................................2-67
Sensor CAL Menu...............................................................................2-67
Sensor Calibration Display Screen ......................................................2-68
New Frequency Parameters Display Screen........................................2-69
Autoscaled thru Path Before Path Calibration Display .........................2-70
THRU PATH Calibration Menu ............................................................2-71
Calibrated Path Display.......................................................................2-72
Successful SHORT/OPEN CAL Display w/ Open Attached ...................2-73
Device Measurement Plot (Typical Display).........................................2-74
Cursor Plot Typical Display .................................................................2-74
Swept Source & Power Sensor Only Block Diagram (w/ DUT) ............2-75
More Accurate Insertion Loss Ratioing Meas. (Back-to-Back Adpts. Improving Source Match) ..............................................................................2-76
Two Sensor Insertion Loss Setup w/ a Power Splitter.........................2-77
Two Sensor Insertion Loss using a Directional Coupler.......................2-77
Return Loss Setup Using a Bridge ......................................................2-79
Return Loss Test Setup Using a Directional Coupler ...........................2-80
Two Sensor Return Loss Setup Block Diagram ...................................2-81
Three Sensor Configuration Block Diagram.........................................2-82
“Golden Standard” Precision 20 dB Attenuator Measurement Using 20 dB
Attenuator Reference..........................................................................2-83
Device Gross Characteristics (Filter Skirt) Display ...............................2-84
Device Fine Characteristics (Filter Pass Band) Display.........................2-84
SCALE Display & Softkey Menu Typical Display .................................2-85
REF → CURSOR Function puts Local Maximum Reference Point at the Reference Point for Easy Scale Factor Expansion .....................................2-86
Typical Measurement (Cursors, Delta Cursors & Markers) ..................2-87
MAX Search Finds Minimum Return Loss of a Filter (Passband) .........2-88
MIN Search Finds Max. Insertion Loss Point (20 dB Fixed Attenuator)2-88
-3 dB Point (Low Pass Filter) at 3.175 GHz .........................................2-89
-30 dB Point (High Pass Filter) ............................................................2-90
Automatic Bandwidth Movement (Very Narrow Bandpass Filter) .......2-91
Cursor Delta Indicates Relative Level & Frequency (Next Worse Return Loss
Point) .................................................................................................2-92
Cursors (Each Channel) Tied to Same Frequency Help Finding the 1 dB Compression Point on an Amplifier............................................................2-93
Filter Passband (Tuned Until Amplitude is -0.5 dB at the Marker) .......2-94
Sensor Calibration Screen...................................................................2-95
Sensor ID Table ..................................................................................2-96
Sensor CAL Factor Table.....................................................................2-96
8003 Swept Power Measurements with CAL Factor Correction..........2-97
CW Readings (All 3 Sensor Inputs Plus Ratio).....................................2-98
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Preface
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
2-56:
2-57:
2-58:
2-59:
3-1:
3-2:
3-3:
3-4:
3-5:
4-1:
4-2:
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3 Different Methods (CAL Factor Correction Plus Sensor Offsets) .......2-99
Averaging Used to Reduce Noise ......................................................2-100
Reference Level & Corresponding Relative Reading...........................2-101
Menus & Typical Display (Power Sweep Measurements) .................2-104
Location of GPIB/System Connection (Rear Panel).................................3-1
GPIB Commands (Front) .......................................................................3-8
GPIB Commands (Back)........................................................................3-9
Plot Obtained Using More Complex HP Series 300 Prg. Example........3-28
Limit Line Display Example .................................................................3-63
Calibrator Output Test Setup ................................................................4-3
Power Linearity Test Setup...................................................................4-7
vii
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Tables
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
viii
3-1:
4-1:
A-1:
A-2:
A-3:
B-1:
Definition of ASCII Codes ................................................................... 3-26
Test Equipment Required..................................................................... 4-2
Power Sensor Selection Guide ............................................................ A-2
Power Sensor Cal Uncertainties .......................................................... A-3
Directional Bridge Selection Guide ...................................................... A-4
8003 Default Settings ......................................................................... B-1
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
About This Manual
This operation manual covers the Giga-tronics 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer:
Preface:
In addition to a comprehensive Table of Contents and general information about the manual, the
Preface also contains a record of changes made to the manual since its publication, and a description
of Special Configurations. If you have ordered a user-specific manual, please refer to page xv for a
description of the special configuration.
Chapters
1 – Introduction:
This chapter provides a brief introduction to the instrument and its performance parameters.
2 – Operation:
This chapter is a guide to the instrument’s front and rear panel keys, display and configuration
menus.
3 – Remote Operation:
This chapter provides how to operate the instrument from a remote location over the General
Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). All programming codes are presented in this chapter with
various applications to aid you in understanding the operation.
4 – Performance Test & Calibration:
This chapter provides the procedures to verify the performance of the 8003 Precision Scalar
Analyzer.
Appendices
A - Power Sensors:
This appendix provides selection data, specifications, and calibration procedures for power
sensors.
B - System Configuration:
This appendix contains the 8003 default function parameters, it also contains instructions for
common test equipment and the initial 8003 printer installation directions for its ability to
generate displayed data/plot hardcopies.
Index:
A word index of the various elements of the 8003 manual.
Changes that occur after publication of the manual, and Special Configuration data will be inserted as
loose pages in the manual binder. Please insert and/or replace the indicated pages as detailed in the
Technical Publication Change Instructions included with new and replacement pages.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
ix
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
x
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Conventions
The following conventions are used in this product manual. Additional conventions not included here
will be defined at the time of usage.
Warning
WARNING
The WARNING statement is encased in gray and centered in the
page. This calls attention to a situation, or an operating or
maintenance procedure, or practice, which if not strictly corrected
or observed, could result in injury or death of personnel. An
example is the proximity of high voltage.
Caution
CAUTION
The CAUTION statement is enclosed with single lines and centered
in the page. This calls attention to a situation, or an operating or
maintenance procedure, or practice, which if not strictly corrected
or observed, could result in temporary or permanent damage to the
equipment, or loss of effectiveness.
Notes
☛
NOTE: A NOTE Highlights or amplifies an essential operating or maintenance procedure,
practice, condition or statement.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
xi
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
xii
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Record of Manual Changes
This table is provided for your convenience to maintain a permanent record of manual change data.
Corrected replacement pages will be issued as Technical Publication Change Instructions, and will be
inserted at the front of the binder. Remove the corresponding old pages, insert the new pages, and
record the changes here.
Change
Instruction
Number
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Change
Instruction
Date
Date
Entered
Comments
xiii
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
xiv
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Special Configurations
When the accompanying product has been configured for user-specific application(s), supplemental
pages will be inserted at the front of the manual binder. Remove the indicated page(s) and replace it
(them) with the furnished Special Configuration supplemental page(s).
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
xv
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
xvi
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
1
Introduction
1.1
Description
The 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer measures scalar (magnitude only) properties of microwave
components. These properties include insertion characteristics (gain or attenuation) and reflection
characteristics (return loss or VSWR). The 8003 offers a 90 dB dynamic range with a linearity of
±0.04 dB in the CW Mode and ±0.06 dB in the Swept Mode.
A unique feature of the 8003 is its ability to make CW power meter-accurate power measurements.
Giga-tronics power sensors include EEPROMs programmed with Cal Factor data to give fully corrected
power readings during frequency sweeps. A front panel calibrator linearizes sensors and bridges to
±0.04 dB linearity, and provides an absolute power accuracy of ±0.7% at 1 mW. In essence, the 8003
can be used as an accurate 3-channel power meter.
1.1.1
Features
•
Large full color display for easy viewing of traces and quick identification of channels
•
Built-in sweeper control for automated setups and easier control of complex measurements
•
Expert system menus that use color to help the operator quickly learn instrument operation
•
Non-volatile memory to store functions such as path calibrations, user selected traces, and
instrument states
•
Full CW meter functionality including a large digital display mode, plus capabilities for including
offsets, max and min hold, averaging, and ratio or difference measurements
•
Full plot compatibility with most GPIB plotters and HP Laserjet series printers
•
Fast CW Mode option over the GPIB
•
Use with Triggerable Pulse (Peak Power) Sensors for swept peak measurements
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
1-1
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
1.2
Installation
The analyzer can be placed directly on a work bench or mounted in a 24-inch deep equipment rack by
using the optional Y6001 or Y6002 Rack Mount Kit. Instructions for installing the 8003 with Rack
Mount Kit are provided in the kit.
Allow at least 3-inches of clearance behind and on each side of the instrument for proper air circulation.
CAUTION
The following installation procedures must be completed before
turning the instrument on for the first time, and whenever it is relocated or installed into a different system.
Select the correct operating voltage and install the proper fuse in this housing. Refer to Section 1.2.2,
Line Voltage and Fuse Selection for instructions on how to select the voltage and replace the fuse.
Observe the following Safety Precautions when installing the 8003. See Section 1.5 for connecting to
the rear panel.
CAUTION
Do not connect main power to the unit until you have checked the
required operating voltage and fuse rating. The instrument can be
damaged if connected to a source voltage with the line voltage selector set incorrectly.
1.2.1
Safety Precautions
This 8003 has a 3-wire power cord with a 3-terminal polarized plug for connection to the power source
and safety-ground. The ground (or safety ground) is connected directly to the chassis.
WARNING
If a 3-to-2 wire adapter is used, connect the ground lead from the
adapter to earth ground. Failure to do this can cause the instrument to float above earth ground, posing a shock hazard.
EARTH GROUND
LINE
NEUTRAL
LINE
NEUTRAL
EARTH GROUND
Figure 1-1: Power Line Connection
1-2
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Introduction
The 8003 is designed for international use with source voltages of 100, 120, 220, or 240 Vac, ±10% at
48 to 440 Hz. The 8003 uses an internationally approved connector that includes voltage selection, fuse,
and filter for RFI protection.
1.2.1.1
Power Input, Fuse & Voltage Selector
The input voltage must be set to match the source at the location where the instrument is to be used.
The number visible through the window on the selector card is the nominal line voltage to which the
analyzer must be connected. See Section 1.2.4 for the power and fuse requirements, and procedures to
select the voltage and to change the fuse.
CAUTION
Do not connect the ac power cord until you have confirmed that the
input voltage has been properly selected and that the fuse for the ac
input is correct.
1.2.2
Line Voltage & Fuse Selection
The instrument is shipped in an operational condition and no special installation procedures are
required except to check and/or set the operating voltage and fuse selection as described in the
following.
1.2.2.1
Power Sensors
The 8003 Series of Power Sensors are designed specifically for use with the 8003. The same sensors are
used for both swept measurements and CW measurements. Both AC and DC detection modes can be
used with any of the power sensors with the exception of the 80340 Series. Each sensor includes an
EEPROM which has been programmed with Calibration Factor data for that specific sensor. General
specifications for each sensor and calibration factor uncertainties are detailed in Appendix A.
1.2.2.2
Power Sensors Accessories
Each 8003 instrument is shipped with an adapter to interface power sensors with APC3.5(m) and
Type K (m) connectors to the Type N (m) connector of the 8003’s front panel Calibrator output.
Adapters for sensors with APC7 connectors are optionally available.
1.2.3
Power Sensor Precautions
Power sensor safety precautions, selection, specifications, and calibration are detailed in Appendix A of
this manual.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
1-3
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
1.2.4
Power Requirements
100/120/220/240 Vac ±10%, 48-440 Hz, 200 VA, typical.
The instrument is supplied with a three-conductor NEMA type power cord. For 100/120 Vac operation,
the neutral conductor is white and the hot wire is black. For 200/240 Vac operation, both the white and
black wires are hot. The green wire of the power cord is for connection to earth ground. The instrument
will be properly grounded if the plug is connected to a properly installed three-prong receptacle. If a
three-prong to two-prong adapter is used, be sure that the pigtail lead of the adapter is earth-grounded.
WARNING
The safety ground is connected directly to the chassis. If a 3-to-2
wire adapter is to be used, be sure to connect the ground lead
from the adapter to earth ground. Failure to do this could cause
the instrument to float above ground, posing a shock hazard to
personnel.
The line voltages and fuse ratings are:
Line Voltage
Fuse Rating
100/120 Vac, ±10%, 50, 60 or 400 Hz
3.0 AMP
220/240 Vac, ±10%, 50, 60 or 400 Hz
1.5 AMP
CAUTION
Verify that the voltage setting and line fuse in the 8003 match the
ac power source at your facility before connecting the line power
cord.
The unit is set at the factory for operation at the normal supply voltage for the country in which it is
sold. The input frequency must be 50, 60, or 400 Hz ±5%. The combination of the module and
transformer design allows instrument operation of 100/120 Vac (using a 3 Amp Slo-Blo fuse) or
220/240 Vac (using a 1.5 Amp Slo-Blo fuse), with an average power consumption of 100 VA.
Conversion from one voltage to another can be made by changing the voltage selection PC board.
Operating voltage is shown
in the module window
Figure 1-2: Operating Voltage Selection
1-4
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Introduction
To select a different operating line voltage and fuse, refer to Figure 1-2 and proceed as follows:
☛
1.2.4.1
1.2.4.2
1.2.5
NOTE: The analyzer may be furnished with the voltage selector and fuse holder described
below, or the VDE-type fuse holder described in Section 1.2.4.2. Refer to the appropriate
instructions for your analyzer.
Standard Voltage Selector & Fuse Holder
1.
Open the cover door, rotate the fuse-pull to the left, and remove the fuse.
2.
Select the operating voltage by orienting the PC board so that the correct voltage label is on the
top left side.
3.
Push the board firmly back into the module slot.
4.
Rotate the fuse-pull back into the normal position and reinsert the fuse into the holder. Use care to
select the correct fuse value.
VDE Type Voltage Selector & Fuse Holder
1.
Open the cover using a small screwdriver or similar tool and proceed as follows:
2.
Use the same tool to remove the voltage selector (a small barrel-shaped component marked with
voltage settings). Rotate the selector so that the desired voltage faces outward and place the selector
back in its slot. Close the housing cover; the appropriate voltage should be visible through the
window (see Figure 1-2).
3.
With the housing cover open, pull out the small drawer on the right side of the housing (it’s marked
with an arrow) and remove the old fuse. Replace with a new fuse, insert the drawer and close the
housing cover (see Figure 1-2).
Environmental Requirements
The 8003A instrument is type tested as follows:
•
•
•
1.2.6
Operating temperature range is 0°C to 50°C (calibrator operating temperature range is
5°C to 35°C
Non-operating (storage) temperature range is -40°C to +70°C
Relative humidity is limited to 95% non-condensing
Items Furnished
In addition to options and/or accessories specifically ordered, items furnished with the instrument are:
•
1 ea. - Power Cord
•
•
1 ea. - Model 8003 Network Analyzer & CW Power Meter
1 ea. - Operation Manual (P/N 20791)
•
3 Detachable sensor/bridge cables each (5 feet long)
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
1-5
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
1.2.7
Items Required
The 8003 requires an external power sensor; see Appendix A for Power Sensor Specifications.
1.2.8
Tools & Test Equipment
No special tools are required to operate the 8003.
1.2.9
Cooling
No cooling is required if the instrument is operated within its specified operating temperature range
(0 to 50°C).
1.2.10
Cleaning
The front panel can be cleaned using a cloth dampened with a mild detergent; wipe off the detergent
residue with a damp cloth and dry with a dry cloth. Solvents and abrasive cleaners should not be used.
1.2.11
Receiving Inspection
Use care in removing the instrument from the carton and check immediately for physical damage, such
as bent or broken connectors on the front and rear panels, dents or scratches on the panels, broken
extractor handles, etc. Check the shipping carton for evidence of physical damage and immediately
report any damage to the shipping carrier.
Each Giga-tronics instrument must pass rigorous inspections and tests prior to shipment. Upon receipt,
its performance should be verified to ensure that operation has not been impaired during shipment.
Follow the installation instructions in Section 1.2 and the operating instructions in Chapters 2 or 3.
1.2.12
Preparation for Reshipment
Follow these instructions if it is necessary to return the product to the factory.
To protect the instrument during reshipment, use the best packaging materials available. If possible use
the original shipping container. If this is not possible, a strong carton or a wooden box should be used
Wrap the instrument in heavy paper or plastic before placing it in the shipping container. Completely
fill the areas on all sides of the instrument with packaging material. Take extra precautions to protect
the front and rear panels.
Seal the package with strong tape or metal bands. Mark the outside of the package “FRAGILE —
DELICATE INSTRUMENT”. If corresponding with the factory or local Giga-tronics sales office
regarding reshipment, please reference the full model number and serial number. If the instrument is
being reshipped for repair, enclose all available pertinent data regarding the problem that has been
found.
☛
1-6
NOTE: If you are returning an instrument to Giga-tronics for service, first contact
Customer Service so that a return authorization number (RMA) can be assigned via e-mail
at [email protected] or at 800.444.2878 (The 800 number is only valid within the
US). You may also try our domestic line at 925.328.4650 or Fax at 925.328.4702.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Introduction
1.3
Specifications
The following are the specifications for the 8003.
System
Frequency Range:
10 MHz to 40 GHz in coax using Giga-tronics 803XXA Series power
sensors and 80500 Series bridges and an appropriate sweeper (see
the signal sources in Appendix A)
Power Range:
+30 to -70 dBm (see the Power Sensor specifications in Appendix A)
System Dynamic Range
CW Measurements:
Swept Measurements:
90 dB
AC Mode: 90 dB
DC Mode: 80 dB
Peak Measurements:
Inputs:
40 dB
Three identical inputs, A, B and C accept detected outputs from
Giga-tronics power sensors and bridges.
Display
CRT:
Display Resolution:
Channels:
Full color display. Each channel can be assigned a different color.
Graticule is selectable (default is green). Menus for the softkeys use
color.
608 x 430 points for each channel.
Four channels can be used to select and simultaneously display up to
three inputs from A, B and C in single channel or ratio mode.
Graph/Readout Mode
Graph mode displays swept frequency response on the CRT. The
Readout mode displays the power level at the cursor frequency or
CW power levels in digital format on the CRT.
Graph Mode
Log:
dBm:
Single channel power measurement.
dB:
Relative power measurement (ratio or relative to the trace
memory).
dBm:
Single channel power measurement.
dB:
Relative power measurement.
ReadoutMode
Log:
Linear:
nW, µW, mW, and Watts: Single channel measurement
%:
Dual channel measurement.
% Rel: Dual channel measurement relative to a device.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Display
Mode
Display Scale
Resolution
dBm/dB
0.1 to 20 dB/Div
(1, 2, 5 sequence)
Display Range
Vertical
Resolution
-99.99 to +99.99 dBm
0.01 dB
1-7
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Channel Offset:
Autoscale:
Automatically sets the scale factor, reference level, and reference
position to provide an optimum display of the active channel.
Averaging:
2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 successive traces (swept) or readings
(CW) can be averaged to reduce the effects of noise on
measurements.
Smoothing:
Provides a linear moving average of adjacent data points. The
smoothing aperture defines the trace width (number of data points) to
be averaged. The smoothing aperture can be set from 0.1% to 20%
of the trace width.
Adaptive Path Calibration
(Normalization):
Trace Memory:
Settings Store and Recall:
Limit Lines:
1.3.1
Traces are stored in non-volatile memory and normalized with the
highest resolution, independent of display scale/division or offset.
4096 points for each trace are stored over the full frequency range of
the sweeper or any user-selected frequency range. Normalization
data is automatically interpolated for ranges within the original
normalized range.
Ten traces can be stored in non-volatile memory and recalled.
Memory traces can be individually labeled. Stored traces can be
displayed, and trace differences from any measurement can also be
displayed.
Allows up to nine full front panel setups plus a power-down last
instrument state can be stored and recalled from non-volatile
memory.
Horizontal, sloped, and/or single point lines for each trace can be set
as go/no-go data limits. Limit lines are stored in non-volatile memory.
Complex limit lines can be entered through the front panel or via
GPIB interface.
Cursors & Markers
Cursor:
The cursor can be positioned with the tuning or via the numeric
keypad. The frequency and amplitude of test data at the cursor on all
active channels is digitally displayed.
Cursor Delta:
Displays the differences in dB and frequency between the reference
cursor and the main cursor.
Cursor Min/Max:
Cursor x dB:
Cursor x Bandwidth:
Cursor Flatness:
Ref to Cursor:
Markers:
1-8
-90 to +90 dB in .01 dB increments.
Moves the cursor to the minimum or maximum value of test data.
Moves the cursor to the point on the trace equal to the value of x in
dB or dBm.
Displays cursors to the right and left of the cursor at the frequencies
where the test data is equal to the value of x dB. The bandwidth
between the cursors is displayed.
Displays the difference in dB between the Max and Min values on the
active channel.
Changes the Ref Level to the level at the cursor.
Displays up to 10 markers generated by the 8003. The cursor can be
moved directly to any marker or sequentially through the markers.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Introduction
1.3.2
Accuracy
1.3.2.1
Transmission Loss or Gain Measurements
Transmission loss or gain measurements are made relative to a 0 dB reference point established during
calibration. Therefore, frequency response errors of the source, sensors, and signal splitting device are
removed. The remaining elements of uncertainty are instrument linearity and zero set uncertainty, see
Figure 1-3, and mismatch error.
Transmission Accuracy = Instrument Accuracy + Mismatch Uncertainty
The low VSWR 8031XA series of sensors and the high power 8032XA series sensors have built-in
attenuators. Therefore, the linearity at a particular power level must be modified to apply to the
unattenuated sensor. Thus, for the 8031XA series which have a 6 dB attenuator, the linearity
specifications will be for 6 dB more power than in the basic 8030XA Series of sensors. This is reflected
in the scaling at the bottom of Figure 1-3.
3
Maximum Error (dB)
2
1
0
CW Mode
-1
DC Mode AC Mode
-2
-3
Sensor
80301A
80310A
80320A
80330A
Bridge
80501
20
26
30
10
16
20
0
6
10
-10
-4
0
-20
-14
-10
20
-30
-24
-20
10
-40
-34
-30
0
-50
-44
-40
-10
-60
-54
-50
-20
70
-64
-60
-30
20 15
5
-5
-15
-25
-35
-45
-55
Power (dBm)
Figure 1-3: Uncertainty Due to Instrument Linearity & Zero Set vs. Input Power
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
1-9
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
1.3.2.2
Reflection Measurements
When measuring devices with high return loss (>10 dB), reflection accuracy is typically dominated by
the effective system directivity, instrument linearity errors, and noise uncertainty. With low return loss
devices (<10 dB), reflection accuracy is typically dominated by source match. Calibration with an open
and short effectively removes uncertainties due to frequency response of the source, sensors, and signal
splitting device.
Reflection Accuracy = Scalar Accuracy+ Reflection Bridge Accuracy
5
Directivity = 30 dB
4
Directivity = 35 dB
Maximum Error (dB)
3
Directivity = 40 dB
2
1
0
-1
-2
Directivity = 30 dB
-3
Directivity = 35 dB
-4
Directivity = 40 dB
-5
0
10
20
30
40
Figure 1-4: Reflection Uncertainty Relative to Directivity
VSWR = 2
2
Maximum Error (dB)
VSWR = 1.5
1
VSWR = 1.25
0
-1
VSWR = 1.25
-2
VSWR = 1.5
-3
VSWR = 2
-4
0
10
20
30
40
DUT Return Loss (dB)
Figure 1-5: Reflection Uncertainty Relative to Source Match
1-10
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Introduction
1.3.2.3
Absolute Power Measurement Accuracy
The absolute power measurement accuracy is determined by a number of factors including calibrator
accuracy, zero set error, noise, sensor calibration factor error, and the mismatch uncertainty between the
sensor and the device under test.
Calibrator
Provides a 50 MHz calibration signal at 51 precise levels from +20 dBm to -30 dBm to dynamically
linearize the sensors.
Frequency:
50 MHz, nominal
Settability:
The 0 dBm level in the power sweep is factory set to ±0.7% traceable
to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (formerly NBS).
Connector:
Type N(f) connector, 50 ohm. (Adapters available for calibrating
sensors with other connector types).
Accuracy:
VSWR:
±1.2% worst case for one year, over a temperature range of
15°C to 35°C.
<1.05 (Return Loss >33 dB)
Instrument plus Power Sensor Linearity
Standard Sensors
CW Mode:
±0.02 dB (±0.5%) over any 20 dB range from +16 to -70 dBm
±0.02 dB + (+0 dB, -0.05 dB/dB) from +16 to +20 dBm
±0.04 dB (±1.0%) from +16 to -70 dBm
Swept Mode:
±0.03 dB (±0.7%) over any 20 dB range from +16 to -70 dBm
±0.03 dB + (+0 dB, -0.05 dB/dB) from +16 to +20 dBm
±0.06 dB (±1.4%) from +16 to -70 dBm
Low VSWR Sensors:
-64 to +20 dBm:Same as for Standard Sensors
+20 to +26 dBm:Same as for Standard Sensors, plus an
additional ±0.13 dB (typically)
High Power Sensors:
-60 to +20 dBm:Same as for Standard Sensors
+20 to +30 dBm:Same as for Standard Sensors, plus an
additional ±0.13 dB (typically)
True RMS Sensors:
CW Mode:
Swept Mode:
±0.02 dB (±0.5%) over any 20 dB range from +20 dBm to -30 dBm
±0.04 dB (±1.0%) from +20 dBm to -30 dBm
±0.03 dB (±0.7%) over any 20 dB range from +20 dBm to -30 dBm
±0.06 dB (±1.4%) from +20 dBm to -30 dBm
Triggerable Pulse (Peak Power) Sensors
±0.13 dB (±3%) from 0 to -30 dBm
±0.13 (±0.01 dB/dB) from 0 to +20 dBm
Temperature Coefficient of Linearity
<0.3%/°C temperature change after calibration
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
1-11
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Zeroing Accuracy
(CW Mode, Averaging Factor = 32):
Zero Set:
Zero Drift:
±50 pW
Typically ±200 pW in 1 hour at constant temperature after a 24-hour
warmup.
(Swept Mode, Averaging Factor = 32):
Zero Set:
Zero Drift:
±50 pW (AC Detection)
±800 pW (DC Detection)
Typically 2 nW (DC Detection) in 1 hour at constant temperature after
a 24-hour warmup. Zero Drift not applicable in AC detection.
Noise Uncertainty
Typically <50 pW, at constant temperature, measured over a 1 minute interval, two standard
deviations.
Cal Factor Correction
Manual or automatic correction to power readings to compensate for frequency response variations of
the power sensors and bridges.
Manual:
Auto:
1-12
Cal Factor, Cal Frequency, Off
Sweeper
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Introduction
1.4
GPIB Interface
Interface
Operates according to IEEE 488.1 and IEC-625 interface standards. A private line GPIB is used to
connect the analyzer to firmware supported sweepers.
Programmable Functions
All front panel functions except power on/off are programmable.
Interrupts
SRQs are generated for the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power Up
Front Panel key pressed
Operation complete
Illegal command
Instrument self-test error
Limit test failed
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
1-13
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
1.5
Rear Panel Inputs & Outputs
1.5.1
BNC Connectors
Sweep In
0 to +10V, nominal (Maximum = 10.75 V).
Blanking Input
Blank the sweep oscillator bandswitching points on the display
Voltage Level:
Blanked:
>2 V typical
(TTL)
Unblanked:
<0.8 V typical
VPROPF Input
Interface to signal source VPROPF output of -10 to +10 Vdc.
Input 1
Used with some sweepers to provide synchronization.
AC Modulation Output
Provides the drive to the modulation input on the sweeper, or to an
external modulator, for use in the ac detection mode.
DAC Output
Not Currently Used.
Bias Output
Programmable output voltage used to display a family of curves.
Voltage Range:
Current Compliance:
1.5.2
±10 V
Source or sink 150 mA, maximum.
GPIB Connectors
System GPIB
Used to connect the 8003 to a GPIB controller.
Private GPIB
Used to connects the 8003 to a signal source and plotter.
RS-232 Port
Serial Communication Interface for driving an HP Laserjet printer.
1-14
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Introduction
1.6
Signal Sources
1.6.1
System Integrated
The 8003 can be system integrated (sweeper control using the 8003)
with the following sweepers:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1.6.2
Giga-tronics 12720A
Giga-tronics 7200 Series or 910 Series Synthesized Sweep
Generators
Giga-tronics 610 Series Sweep Oscillator
HP8350A/B with an RF plug-in (HP86200 series with the
HP11869A adapter)
HP8340A/B, HP8341A/B or HP8360 Synthesized Sweepers
Marconi 6300 Series Sweepers
Wiltron 6600B Sweep Generators
Wiltron 6700B Synthesized Sweep Generators
Operator Integrated
The 8003 is compatible with any signal source that meets the following requirements:
Horizontal Ramp:
Blanking Signal:
1.6.3
(Optional) Provides a TTL level during retrace and bandswitching.
Modulation
AC Detection Mode:
Frequency:
On/Off Ratio:
1.7
Provides a 0 to +10 V nominal ramp signal.
A square wave is provided by the analyzer to modulate the signal
source.
1 kHz, nominal
>30 dB
General Specifications
Temperature Range
Operating:
Storage:
0°C to 50°C (32° to 122°F)
-40°C to 70°C (-40° to 158°F)
Power Requirements
100/120/220/240 Vac ±10%, 48 to 440 Hz, 200 VA typical
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions:
Weight:
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
178 mm H x 451 mm W x 483 mm D (7.00 x 17.76 x 19.00 in)
16.6 kg (36.5 lbs)
1-15
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
1-16
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2
Operation
2.1
Introduction
This chapter describes how to operate the 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer from its front and rear panels.
Refer to Chapter 3 for instructions on how to operate the instrument from a remote host computer over
the General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) or an RS-232 serial connection. Refer to Chapter 1 for
instructions on how to install and interface the instrument before operating it for the first time. For
purposes of greater reader visibility, the display screens will be shown in white and black, the product
screens are naturally in a black background with color depictions as described in Section 2.3.1.
2.2
Front & Rear Panel Descriptions
This section describes the physical components of the 8003 Scalar Analyzer front and rear panels.
Descriptions of the controls and components are referenced to the blocked numbers illustrated in
Figure 2-1, and are described starting on page 2-3.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-1
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Figure 2-1: 8003 Front & Rear Panel Components
2-2
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
1
Display Screen
The Display Screen shows all of the channel characteristics, power readings, and trace information pertaining to any measurements that are taken. See Figure 2-2 and the display descriptions
in Section 2.2.2 for an explanation of the information presented on the screen.
2
Softkeys
The eight softkeys select the control and functional options presented by the various menus
(displayed on the screen) accessed through the Function, Channel, Source, and System keys
located on the front panel. See the Functional Description in Section 2.3 for a complete discussion of all of the menu options accessible through these keys.
3
INTENsity Control
The Intensity control is a screwdriver adjustment to adjust the brightness of the display.
4
CHANNEL Control Keypad
Up to four channels can be selected to display power readings from any one, two, or all three of
the sensors that are connected at the A, B, and C input receptacles.
The [DEFINE] key defines a few of the most basic characteristics of the measurement to be
taken on the entry channel, and the [OFF] key turns off the entry channel. See Section 2.4
for a complete description of the use of these keys. LEDs located next to each numbered Channel Control key illuminate to indicate active, selected channels.
Throughout this manual, a distinction will be made between the front panel hardkeys and the
adjacent CRT displays softkeys when their names are used in textual descriptions. The hardkeys are enclosed in brackets (as in [DEFINE] and [OFF] in the above paragraph), and the
softkeys are shown in italics (for example, SENSORS AC/DC).
5
Spin Knob
The Spin Knob can access and adjust certain parameters as selected through the softkeys. The
use of this knob will be defined in the various instructions given in this manual.
6
Numeric Entry Keypad
The Numeric Entry Keypad enters any desired or required numbers pertaining to the various
parameters involved in setting up and taking measurements.
7
ENT/OFF, BK SP, and Units Keys
The [ENT/OFF] key enters any alphanumeric titles that might be assigned to specific measurement procedures. The [BK SP] key provides the means to back space when any titles are
being entered. See Section for a description of the use of titles.
The [MHz/dBm] and [GHz/dB] keys select the units format in which it is desired to display any power readings.
8
9
CALIBRATOR
Attach the sensor to this connection to source the internal 50 MHz calibrator before taking
any measurements. Sensors are calibrated across the range of -30 to +20 dBm, and the data is
stored in the sensor EEPROM. See Section 2.8.1 for more information on calibration procedures.
SYSTEM Control Keypad
The [CONFIG] key of this keypad configures the 8003 and any other devices that might be
interconnected on the 8003 private bus (see Section 2.7).
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-3
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
The [PRESET] key selects the default parameters for any currently displayed test parameters.
See Appendix B for a list of default parameters.
10
SOURCE Control Keypad
The Source Control keys specify the various parameters that will be assigned to the power
source being used for the measurement routine.
The [START] key initiates source frequency changes by specifying the desired start, center, or
CW frequencies depending upon the mode of operation. The [STOP] key defines the upper
limit of the frequency range of interest.
The [POWER] key allows the specification of the power level that the source will output,
and the [SWEEP TIME] key sets the sweep time that is to be used for the measurement.
11
12
Sensor Input Connectors
These three receptacles, marked A, B and C, interconnect the sensor(s) that will be used for
the measurement routine. One to three sensors can be used for insertion and return loss measurements. See Section 2.9 for a discussion of the usage of single or multiple sensor configurations.
FUNCTION Control Keypad
Control of the measurement functions of the 8003 is initiated by the six keys in this keypad.
Each key, when pressed, will display a top level menu showing the measurement parameters
that can be processed by using the sub-menu label options activated by the softkeys. Descriptions for all six keys can be found in Section 2.5.
The [MEAS] key accesses specific functions related to making ratio or comparison measurements with other selected measurements.
The [SCALE] key alters the parameters related to graphic presentations of measured data.
These parameters include display scaling, reference level, and position.
The [DISPLAY] key controls the display and formatting of all measurements that are taken.
A long series of sub-menus are available to use for precise control of all aspects of the display of
measured data.
The [CAL] key activates the CAL menu which contains five different options used for path
calibration, sensor calibration, and for zeroing sensors and bridges.
The [CURSOR] key accesses the cursor and marker capability of the 8003. Cursors and
marker functions can be defined and turned on and off with this key.
The [MEMORY] key accesses the 8003 store and recall instrument setups. These setups are
stored in non-volatile memory so that they will not be disturbed at power-down.
13
2-4
Power On/Off Switch
This is a push-push switch to control the ac power to the 8003. The ON condition is indicated
by illumination of one or more of the Channel Indicator LEDs.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
Rear Panel Description
Refer to Figure 2-1 for the illustrations of the rear panel. The functions are described below.
I/O Connections
14
VPROPF In
The VPROPF input can be connected to a signal source with a voltage output (between -10 and
+10 Vdc) that is proportional to frequency. Then the measurement frequency is automatically
determined by the analyzer. This input is especially useful under swept measurement conditions.
Microwave power sensors have a measurable frequency response. That is, the detector produces slight
variations in I/O response with frequency. For this reason the frequency of operation should be entered
when performing measurements.
15
SWEEP In
This input receives the horizontal deflection voltage (between 0 and 10.75 Vdc) generated by the
sweeper to produce the proper positioning and trace information for the display. The circuitry is
designed so that if the voltage should exceed 10.75 V, the excess will be clipped and not cause any
damage.
16
BIAS Output
The bias output provides either biasing or operating voltage for some active external device. For
example, you might apply it to a pin diode on which you want to check the attenuation at various bias
levels, or it could be used to measure the input impedance on a modulator for which you are not sure.
The bias voltage is programmable from the front panel. It is generated by an internal amplified DAC in
the range of -10 to +10 Vdc with up to 150 mA current capacity. The circuitry is protected by selfresetting, current-limiting devices (poly fuses). This means that if a short circuit should occur, the
output would just stop supplying current until the short was cleared and cool down time allowed. No
damage would be done.
17
AC Mod Output
The AC Mod Output modulates a sweeper when the scalar is operating in the ac mode. The output is
the same as the bias output with the same current limiting protection.
18
BLANKING Input
The Blanking Input interfaces with the source to receive a TTL signal for blanking band-change
switching points on multi-band sweepers.
19
INPUT 1 TTL Levels
The Input 1 TTL Levels connection provides the necessary synchronization to an internal log circuit of
the 8003 when used with certain sweepers. For example, if a synthesized sweeper is being used, the TTL
signal would tell the 8003 that the sweeper is locked, leveled, and that the signal was useful.
20
RESET Switch
This switch resets the 8003 to an initial power-on condition.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-5
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
21
RS-232 Port
This is a standard serial port to drive printers or plotters to generate hardcopy of a screen or data
information dump.
22
GPIB/System
This connection interfaces the 8003 to a remote controller when the instrument is to be remotely
operated over the GPIB.
23
Lithium Battery
The 3.5 V lithium back-up battery powers the non-volatile memory when the instrument is turned off.
The battery should be changed every six months.
24
POWER Input Connection
This is the receptacle for the ac mains power cable. Be sure that the instrument is set for the correct
power as defined in Section 1.2.4.
25
Cooling Fan and Filter
The fan provides the air flow necessary to keep the instrument from overheating. Be sure that the filter
is kept clean. A dirty filter can cause a thermal shutdown of the instrument in the middle of a test
routine.
GPIB/PRIVATE
26
This is the interface connection for any external device (printer, plotter, etc.) that will be connected to
the 8003.
DAC Out
27
2-6
The DAC Out connection was designed to provide an analog output at 0 to +10 Vdc from a separate,
internal DAC. This function is not presently used.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.2.1
GPIB Address Selection
Before the instrument can be remotely controlled over the interface bus, it must be assigned a specific
address so that the controller can differentiate it from active bus components. This is accomplished with
the following keystrokes:
1.
Press [CONFIG] in the SYSTEM section of the front panel.
2.
The menu that next appears will have a softkey labeled [GPIB DEVICES]. Press this key.
3.
The display will then show the 8003 address and prompt to change the address. Enter any desired
address (0 through 30) that is not currently being used for another device on the bus. The default
address for the instrument is 4.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-7
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.2.2
Display Description
Channel Summary Area
CH1: SW C
0.1 dB/
Active Entry Area /
Main Title
CRSR
-PC
CRSR
REF
-0.19 dB
-0.00 dB
Channel Titles
CH2: C/A-PC
0.1 dB/
-0.14 dB
7.055 GHz
CRSR
REF
CURSOR
FREQ
-0.14 dB
0.00 dB
CURSOR
ON/OFF
CH1 - POOR SOURCE MATCH
CH2 - RATIO IMPROVES MATCH
1
CURSOR ∆
ON/OFF
Reference
Position
Indicators
SEARCH
Limit Line Segment Information
CURSOR ->
MRKR N
Message
Area
Softkey
Labels
DEFINE
MRKR N
2
REF ->
CURSOR
RETURN
STRT
2.000 GHz
Start, Center, CW
Frequency
CRSR
7.055 GHz
Cursor Frequency
STOP
CURSOR
7.500 GHz
Stop, Span
Front Panel
Function Key /
Remote Light
Figure 2-2: Display Screen Information Locations
Channel Titles
Displays the channels currently in use and any selected titles that have been assigned to them.
Softkey Labels
These labels show the measurement modification options available in the current functional mode. See
Section 2.5 for a detailed description of all softkeys on pages 2-40 through 2-46.
Front Panel Function Key/Remote Light
This area displays which function key is currently in use or, if the instrument is under GPIB control, it
will display REMOTE.
Stop, Span
Shows the upper limit of the selected frequency range.
Cursor Frequency
Shows the frequency selected for the cursor location on the display.
2-8
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
Start, Center, CW Frequency
Shows the frequency mode currently in use (STRT, CNTR, or CW), and the frequency selected to be
used with that mode.
Reference Position Indication
This area shows the selected frequency reference point for each channel being displayed
(channels 1 and 2 in Figure 2-2). The power level being used as reference is given in the REF section of
each channel summary area.
Message Area
This area of the display shows any special messages pertaining to the current measurement.
Active Entry Area/Main Titles
Shows the function currently being used, and the most important parameters of interest associated with
that function.
Channel Summary Area
The Channel Summary Area displays the parameters to be used with the designated channel for the
current measurement. The front panel function keys are used initially to call up the desired menus
which define these parameters. This means that each function key will define different parameters,
causing different information to be displayed in the Summary Area depending on the function key being
used.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-9
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Figure 2-3 shows some of the most commonly used parameters and their locations in the Summary Area.
The text following the figure gives a brief description of the parameters and, where applicable, refers you
to sections of the manual where complete definitions can be found.
Path Cal
Sensor
Power Value
Mode (CW, SWept, or PK)
Cursor
Channel
CH1 : SW C -PC
0.1
dB SHA
-T0
CRSR
REF
Unit
-0.19 dB
0.00 dB
Scale Per Division
Reference Level
Smoothing
Minus Trace 0
Hold
Averaging
MAX or
MIN Power
Relative (Reference)
CH3 : CW B
OFS 0.00 dB
Sensor Offset
Offset Value
REL
MAX
FREQ
Power Reading
-11.65 dB
10.00 GHz
at xxx Frequency
Frequency
Connection
CALF
Cal Factor
0.00 dB
Cal Value
(or 'no connection')
Figure 2-3: Typical Channel Summary Indications
The descriptions of the Channel Summary entries are as follows: (clockwise, top to bottom.)
Channel, Mode, and Sensor
These three items will always be present in the Summary Area. CH will be followed by 1, 2, 3, or 4 to
indicate the channel number. SW, PK and CW show whether the swept, Peak or CW mode is in use,
and A, B, or C indicates which sensor is assigned to the channel.
PATH CAL
This PC indication specifies that path calibration data is being subtracted from the swept measurement
reading. See Section 2.8.2 for a complete description of the use of path calibration.
Cursor, Power Value, and Unit
Indicates the power value being read at the cursor location on the displayed trace. The reading can be in
dB or mW units.
2-10
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
Reference Level
Indicates the value set for the Reference Position(s) of the trace displays for each displayed channel, as
shown in Figure 2-3.
Minus Trace 0
Shows that a trace stored in memory (location 0 through 9) is being subtracted from the measurement.
Smoothing, Hold and Averaging
Display of any or all of the S, H, and/or A indications means that the displayed Smoothing, Hold, and/
or Averaging function is active in the measurement. See Section 2.5 (page 2-24) for a description of
how to use these functions.
Scale Per Division
Shows the vertical scale factor that has been selected for the current display (see Section 2.10).
Relative (Reference)
The Relative function does for CW readings what Path Cal does for swept readings. REL on the display
shows that this mode is in use for the measurement. See Section 2.10 for use of the REL function).
MAX or MIN Power
Shows whether the [MAX] or [MIN] softkey has been selected to read either the maximum or minimum
power at the cursor location.
Power Reading, at XXX Frequency
Displays the selected maximum or minimum power reading at the cursor location, and the frequency at
which the reading is being taken.
Frequency Correction
Displays the specific frequency at which any Cal Factor corrections are being made. See Cal Factor
below.
Sensor Offset, Offset Value
Displays any offset that has been applied to the indicated sensor to compensate for attenuators or
amplifiers between the device under test and the sensor (see Section 2.12.3).
Cal Factor, Cal Value
Shows that a Cal Factor at the indicated value is in effect for the sensor (see Section 2.12 for Cal Factor
discussion).
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-11
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.3
Softkey Functional Description
This is a detailed description of the functions for setting up and preparing to take measurements with
the 8003. The 8003 is addressed and controlled by four groups of specific functional keys, eight softkeys
for accessing menu options, a data entry key group, and a spin knob located on the front panel.
The functional keys are arranged in groups according to the general functions they control
(see Figure 2-4 below). The Channel, Function, Source, and System key groups either allow the
immediate entry of data or call up the display of main menus from which specific, related measurement
parameters can be addressed. This is done by pressing one of the softkeys adjacent to the display screen
to display sub-menus, which will further assist you in setting up precise measurement parameters.
Figure 2-4: 8003 Front Panel Controls
2.3.1
Softkey Labels & Color Indications
The softkey menu labels are shown, where applicable, in three different colors. A green label indicates
what happens if the corresponding key is pressed. A light blue label is the current, active state of the
instrument. Dark blue labels indicate any options contained in the menu which are not available in the
current state of the instrument.
2.3.2
Channel & Function Selection
The 8003 four-channel capability allows different types of measurements to be taken, processed, and
displayed. You define the desired measurement to occur on a specified channel. Having multiple
channels then allows you to define multiple measurements to occur simultaneously without regard to
which sensors the channels are using. Two or more channels can share the same sensor. This is possible
because power is all the 8003 will actually measure from the sensors.
You can change a parameter for all channels without leaving the menu. Just a single keystroke is
required to change entry channels without bringing up a channel menu. For instance, suppose the scale
factor for one channel has been entered. To enter the scale factor for another channel, just press the
appropriate channel selection key. The scale factor menu will stay on the screen and the scale factor for
the newly selected channel can now be entered.
2.3.3
Sensors & Sensor Calibration
The 8003 automatic calibration system allows its sensors to function as essentially perfect linear power
sensors. Each power sensor stores its serial number as well as frequency correction information in an
EEPROM in the sensor head. Combined, these features allow the 8003 to take absolute power
measurements and function as a CW power meter as well as a scalar network analyzer.
2-12
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
The 8003 cannot take measurements with uncalibrated or disconnected sensors. A measurement that
uses an unavailable sensor will not be able to be specified. Softkey labels referring to a measurement on
an unavailable sensor will be in dim, dark blue. For example, if sensor C were uncalibrated or not
connected it would not be possible to zero sensor C, perform a path calibration involving sensor C, or
define any of the following measurements on the entry channel: C, A/C, B/C, C/A, C/B, A-C, B-C, CA, or C-B.
2.3.4
Absolute Power & Swept Capabilities
The absolute power measurement capability of the 8003 allows the instrument to make swept absolute
power measurements which can be graphically displayed and manipulated. This capability also allows
the 8003 to function as a CW power meter.
Any channel can be designated to take either swept or CW measurements. In this context, swept refers
to swept measurements meant to be plotted in graphic format. CW measurements will only be displayed
in character format in the channel summary area of the display screen.
Some of the swept measurements are not available in the CW mode and vice versa. As an example, no
cursor options are available in the CW mode. Therefore, if the entry channel is in the CW mode and
the cursor key is pressed, the softkey menu labels will change to the cursor key menu, but all the labels
will be dim, dark blue. If any of the softkeys are pressed, no action will occur. Another example is that
sensor difference measurements will not be available for swept measurements.
2.3.5
Graph & Readout Display Modes
There are times when a large numeric readout is more convenient than a graph. Because of this, the
8003 has two major display modes. One of these is the graphic display mode in which swept channel
measurements are graphically displayed. Summary information for swept measurements is displayed in
the channel summary information area. CW channel measurements cannot be displayed graphically but
can be displayed in the channel summary area.
The other display mode is data readout display. In the data readout mode, the results of CW channel
measurements are displayed in large characters in the middle of the display screen. There is no graphic
representation of data. Swept channel measurements have only their channel summary information
displayed in large characters.
2.3.6
Path Calibration Memory
Besides absolute, swept, and CW power measurements, the 8003 can make normalized measurements. A
normalized measurement is displayed relative to a path calibration made without the device under test.
In the 8003, each sensor has its own path calibration memory. There is also unrelated non-volatile
memory which can store measurement trace data from any channel for use on the same and/or any other
channel(s).
A path calibration will be performed when the instrument is commanded to perform a through path
calibration or a short/open path calibration. Path calibrations will be performed only for individual
sensors, one at a time. The path calibrations will be performed and stored by sensor, not by channel.
The 8003 allows the definition, by channel, of whether or not to use path calibrations. If it is specified
that path calibrations should be used on a channel, then the measurement of each sensor being used by
the channel is ratio’ed with its path calibration. If a sensor’s path calibration has been cleared, then the
use of the path calibration will have no effect on the sensor’s measurement.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-13
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
When path calibration is used, the 8003 does not apply Cal Factors to the readings. Cal Factors are only
useful for absolute power measurements. Any Cal Factor correction would be canceled when making
relative measurements.
To make the path calibration over wide frequency ranges useful, the 8003 memorizes a very large
number of data points (up to 4096) during a path calibration. With such a high resolution of data
points, the 8003 is able to maintain a very high level of accuracy within any sub-range of the frequency
range of the path calibration.
Any path calibration can be cleared at any time during instrument operation. When a path calibration
is cleared, it is initialized to 0 dBm so that it will have no effect if it were ratio’ed with any
measurements.
2.3.7
Trace Memory
The 8003 can store measurement data of up to ten traces in non-volatile memory. The traces are stored
and used by number. The traces can be stored by any channel and they, in turn, can be used by any
channel. The measurement can be specified on any desired channel to be the ratio of the current
measurement data and the trace n measurement data, where n is between 0 and 9 inclusive. Traces are
memorized as 512 points along the frequency axis.
A title can be specified for each stored trace. This allows you to specify in your own words what the
memorized trace data represents. When a measurement is being ratio’ed with a memorized trace, the
title of the trace memory replaces the channel title. Memorized traces can be displayed as a channel for
comparison to a current measurement.
A memorized trace can be deleted by clearing all of the memory of the 8003, by clearing specified
memorized traces, or by clearing all memorized traces. When a memorized trace is cleared, it will be
replaced with a 0 dBm trace, so that it would have no effect if it were inadvertently ratio’ed with a
measurement trace.
2.3.8
Power On
When the 8003 is powered on, the instrument will restore itself to the same configuration it was in at
power off. This will include restoring the menu which was being displayed at power off and the path
calibrations at the time power was turned off. The only aspects of the instrument operation which will
not be restored will be the measurement data at the time power is turned off.
2-14
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.4
CHANNEL Controls
The 8003 has four channels. The measurements to be made on each channel, including the sensor(s) to
make the measurement, can be independently specified. Any number of channels, 1 through 4, can be
on at the same time.
When a Channel number key is pressed, that channel becomes the entry channel. If a Channel key is
pressed and the channel is off (not taking measurements or displaying data), then the channel is turned
on and becomes the entry channel. When a channel becomes the entry channel, the previous entry
channel remains on but will no longer be the entry channel.
2.4.1
OFF Key
[OFF]
The CHANNEL [OFF] key turns off the entry channel. This suspends the taking of data and the
display of the channel but does not change any of the entry channel settings. When the channel is
turned back on, it will be the same as it was before.
When the entry channel is turned off, the most recent entry channel that has not been turned off will
become the entry channel. There must always be an active channel. If only one channel is on, it cannot
be turned off.
2.4.2
DEFINE Key
[DEFINE]
The CHANNEL [DEFINE] key defines some of the most basic characteristics of the measurement on
the entry channel. When [DEFINE] is pressed, the softkey menu structure shown in Figure 2-5 will be
entered. Each of the primary functions of the Define first level menu (labeled C1) will be discussed in
the following.
[SINGLE SENSOR]
Menu C1: Allows you to define the active channel to measure power from a single sensor only.
Pressing the [SINGLE SENSOR] softkey (when it is not in dim, dark blue) brings up sub-menu
C1-1.
[A], [B], or [C]
Menu C1-1: Refers to the three sensor inputs. Pressing [A], [B], or [C] that is not in dim, dark blue
causes the entry channel to begin taking measurements on the indicated sensor.
[RATIO]
Menu C1: Allows you to define the active channel to measure the power ratio of any two sensors.
Pressing [RATIO] brings up menu C1-2.
[A/], [B/], [C/]
Menu C1-2: Selects the numerator of the desired power ratio measurement. Selecting the numerator leads to menus C1-3, C1-4, or C1-5 where the denominator is chosen.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-15
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
[DIFF]
Menu C1: Accesses the differential measurement capability of the 8003. This feature is usable only
for channels in the CW mode, and would cause all softkey labels to revert to dim, dark blue if the
routine were changed from the CW to the swept mode at any point while the DIFF softkey menus
were in use.
[A-], [B-], [C-]
Menu C1-6: Selects the channel that is to be the minuend for a differential comparison. Selecting
the minuend leads to menus C1-7, C1-8, or C1-9 where the subtrahend is chosen.
[CW/SWEPT]
Menu C1: Toggles the routine between CW or swept measurements on the entry channel. These
two modes operate similar in some ways and very different in other ways.
Averaging is an example of a parameter used in both the CW and Swept Modes. Averaging does not
change when switching from one mode to the other. Whatever averaging number is set for one
mode will be carried over into the other.
Only the swept mode makes use of path calibrations or memorized traces. Therefore, regardless of
whether or not these features are being used in the swept mode, when a channel is changed to CW
mode it automatically reverts to displaying only the sensor absolute power measurement or ratio of
absolute power measurements if a channel has been defined to measure a ratio. However, when the
channel is changed back into the swept mode the instrument will remember whether or not the
channel was using path calibrations or a memorized trace when it was previously in the swept mode,
and revert to the same state again.
The entry channel can be placed into either the CW or swept mode at almost any time. An exception would be when the channel is in the CW mode and displaying the difference between sensor
measurements. A difference between sensor measurements can only be displayed in the CW mode.
Therefore, a channel cannot be changed from the CW to the swept mode while it displaying the
difference between sensor measurements.
Another instance where it is not possible to freely change between the CW and swept modes is
when the entry channel is in the swept mode and displaying a memorized trace, since memorized
traces have no meaning in the CW mode.
See Section 2.3.4 for a discussion of the differences between CW and swept modes.
[BIAS VOLTAGE]
Menu C1: Sets the output voltage from the BNC connection on the rear panel during the sweep
time of each active (ON) channel. Up to four different bias voltages can be selected. To set the bias
voltage, first select a channel (1, 2, 3, or 4). Then enter the desired bias voltage using either the
spin knob or the numeric entry keypad. Range of bias voltages is 10 V in 1mV steps.
☛
2-16
NOTE: The shaded labels at the bottom of each menu (C1, C1-1, C1-2, etc.) are only for
reference to avoid confusion during this discussion. They have no relationship to the physical
operation of the instrument.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
DEFINE
KEY
SINGLE
SENSOR
A
A/
RATIO
B/A
B/
DIFF
C/A
C/
* NF
BIAS
VOLTAGE
B
A/C
C
B/C
C/B
CW /
SWEPT
A/B
RETURN
RETURN
DEFINE
DEFINE
C1-3
C1-1
RETURN
RETURN
DEFINE
RETURN
C1-2
DEFINE
DEFINE
C1-4
C1-5
DEFINE
C1
A-
* Used only with
Noise Figure testing
A-B
B-A
B-
A-C
C-A
C-
CW ONLY
B-C
C-B
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
DEFINE
DEFINE
C1-6
C1-9
RETURN
DEFINE
DEFINE
C1-7
C1-8
NOTE:
The labels in the shaded boxes are for menu identification only
Figure 2-5: Channel Control Menus Access w/ DEFINE Key
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-17
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.5
FUNCTION Controls
The major functions of the 8003 are controlled by the six FUNCTION keys. These keys access the
measurement functions of the instrument and change measurement parameters when required. Each of
the primary functions and the menus and sub-menus accessible by these six keys are described in this
section.
2.5.1
MEAS Key
[MEAS]
The FUNCTION [MEAS] key accesses specific functions related to making ratio or comparison
measurements with other selected measurements. When [MEAS] is pressed, softkey menu F1 shown in
Figure 2-6 will be displayed.
MEAS
KEY
ABS PWR
PATHCAL
TRACE
MEMORY
CW
OPTION
ALL
SWEPT
ALL CW
*ALL
NF
MEAS
TRACE N
MEAS
REL
ON / OFF
MAX HOLD
ON / OFF
DIPSPLAY
TRACE N
MIN HOLD
ON / OFF
CLEAR
TRACE N
MEAS
F1
TRACE →
TRACE N
CLEAR ALL
TRACES
RETURN
RETURN
MEAS
MEAS
F1-2
SCALE
KEY
F1-1
SCALE
FACTOR
AUTO
SCALE
CONT
AUTOSCL
REF
POSN
REF
LEVEL
REF
LEVEL
REF →
CURSOR
REF→
MAX
SCALE
F2
RETURN
SCALE
Figure 2-6: Function Menus Accessed with the MEAS & SCALE Keys
2-18
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[ABS PWR PATHCAL]
Menu F1: Toggles between absolute power measurements using Cal Factors, and relative measurements that are being ratio’ed with a stored path cal.
When the Absolute Power measurement mode is active (ABSPWR shown on the menu in light
blue), the instrument applies a Cal Factor to each reading. All power readings are displayed in absolute power units (dBm or Watts) unless the ratio of two sensors is being measured.
When Path Calibrations are used (PTH CAL shown on the menu in light blue), measurements are
ratio’ed to a stored path calibration. Cal Factors are not used.
Path calibrations can be used only when making swept measurements. If the entry channel is measuring in the CW mode, the [ABS PWR/PATH CAL] softkey label will be in dim, dark blue and the
sensor path calibrations will have no effect on the CW measurements.
[TRACE MEMORY]
Menu F1: Accesses stored measurement traces. The entry channel current measurement trace can
be stored, the current measurement trace can be replaced with a stored trace, or the channel current
trace can be ratio’ed with a stored trace. This feature is available only when making swept measurements.
When [TRACE MEMORY] is pressed, the softkey menu will change to menu F1-1.
[MEAS-TRACE N]
Menu F1-1: Allows you to specify any memorized trace that you wish to ratio with the current
trace.
The entry area of the display will present a prompt to enter the memory location number
(0 - 9) of the stored trace to be ratio’ed with the current measurement trace. A memorized trace
can only be entered through the keypad, not by the spin knob. When a UNITS key (MHz dBm
or GHz dB) is pressed, the measurement will ratio the current measurement trace with the
specified memorized trace.
The current measurement trace of any channel can be ratio’ed to only one memorized trace. If
the current measurement trace is being ratio’ed to one memorized trace and another memorized
trace is specified, then the current trace will be ratio’ed only to the last specified memorized
trace. Meas Trace x - Meas Trace y cannot be defined.
[MEAS]
Menu F1-1: Causes the entry channel to display its current measurement ratio’ed with or without path calibration(s) as indicated, but not with any memorized traces.
[TRACE → TRACE N]
Menu F1-1: Memorizes the current measurement trace as Trace N. When this softkey is
pressed, a prompt will appear in the entry area of the display to remind the user to enter the
trace number under which the trace will be stored. When a UNITS key is pressed, the trace
will be stored in non-volatile memory. The entry area of the display will then indicate that the
trace was stored.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-19
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
If a trace is memorized as trace n, whatever trace was previously memorized as trace n will be
overwritten and cannot be retrieved. However, the title of the memorized trace is not affected
by the memorization of a new trace.
[DISPLAY TRACE N]
Menu F1-1: Presents a prompt to enter the number of the trace in memory that it is desired to
examine. When a UNITS key is pressed, the specified memorized trace will replace the entry
channel measurement trace. The memorized trace title will replace the title of the entry channel (when the channel title has been turned on).
[CLEAR TRACE N]
Menu F1-1: Clears a memorized trace. When a memorized trace is cleared, it is replaced with a
0 dBm trace so that it will have no effect if ratio’ed with a measurement trace. The title of the
memorized trace will also be cleared.
When a number is entered, the memorized trace is cleared and the entry area of the display will
indicate that the operation was completed.
☛
NOTE: A trace cannot be restored once it is cleared.
[CLR ALL TRACES]
Menu F1-1: Clears all of the memorized traces. When a memorized trace is cleared, it is
replaced with a 0 dBm trace so that it will have no effect if ratio’ed with a measurement trace.
The titles of the memorized trace will also be cleared. (See the Trace Memory description on
page 2-19).
When [CLR ALL TRACES] is pressed, the entry area of the display will show the prompt:
CONFIRM TO CLEAR
The softkey menu will present the option of either clearing all traces or to abort the clearing
function. When [CLR ALL TRACES] is pressed a second time, all memorized traces will be
cleared. The entry area of the display will indicate that the traces have been cleared and the
instrument will return to menu F1.
☛
2-20
NOTE: This action cannot be reversed once accomplished. Cleared traces cannot
be restored.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[CW OPTION]
Menu F1: Accesses certain measurement functions which can be taken only when in the CW
mode.
[REL ON/OFF]
Menu F1-2: Accesses the CW Relative measurement mode. When this softkey is pressed to
initiate the relative mode, the CW measurement on the entry channel is memorized and all
future measurements on that channel are made relative to the memorized measurement. This
means that all future measurements will be linearly ratio’ed with the memorized measurement.
When the entry channel is in the relative mode, this softkey will turn off the relative mode.
If the measurement is in logarithmic units (see the UNITS softkey description on page 2-32),
the reading will be displayed in dB. If the measurement is in linear units, the reading will be
displayed in percentage.
[MAXHOLD] and [MINHOLD ON/OFF]
Menu F1-2: When either the [MAXHOLD ON/OFF] or [MINHOLD ON/OFF] softkeys is
pressed, the CW measurement on the entry channel is memorized and displayed as the maximum or minimum measurement. All future measurements on that channel are then compared
with the memorized measurement. If the new measurement is greater than or less than the
memorized measurement, the new measurement is memorized and displayed as the new maximum or minimum measurement. As this implies that after the maxhold or minhold modes are
turned on, only the maximum or minimum measurement, as appropriate, will be displayed.
[ALL SWEPT] and [ALL CW]
Menu F1: The [ALL SWEPT] and [ALL CW] softkeys specify whether all four channels (or whatever channels are currently active) will take measurements in either the Swept or the CW mode of
operation.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-21
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.5.2
SCALE Key
[SCALE]
The FUNCTION [SCALE] key alters the parameters related to the graphical presentation of the
measured data. These parameters include display scaling, display reference level, and display position
Scaling functions are available only for swept measurements, and will be shown as unavailable (in dim,
dark blue on the softkey menu display) if the active channel is in the CW mode.
[SCALE FACTOR]
Menu F2: Allows the setting of the scale factor for the active entry trace. It causes the entry area of
the display to indicate the current scaling factor for the entry channel, and also presents a prompt
to enter a new scaling factor, if required. If the entry channel is continuously autoscaling when this
softkey is pressed, the channel will cease autoscaling and the last scale factor determined by the
autoscaling will be the scale factor shown in the entry area of the display.
Scale factors can be either selected by the spin knob or entered through the numeric keypad. If
numerically entered, the scale factor will always be rounded to the nearest allowable value. The
allowable scale factors are: 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, and 20 dB/DIV.
[AUTOSCALE]
Menu F2: Causes the 8003 to autoscale the entry channel. Autoscale involves setting the scale factor, the reference level, and the reference position to display the entry channel main trace with the
highest possible resolution while still fitting the entire trace on the display. When [AUTOSCALE]
is pressed the 8003 autoscales the entry channel, the parameters are changed, the display adjusts,
and the entry area displays the main trace scaling factor so that it can be changed, if desired.
[CONT AUTOSCL]
Menu F2: Causes the 8003 to begin continuously autoscaling the entry channel. Continuous
autoscaling means that the routine will try to maintain the greatest resolution possible while still
fitting the entire trace in the display. During every update of the channel’s trace, the 8003 will
internally autoscale the channel. The scaling that results from this autoscale will be compared with
both the channel current scaling and the results from recent autoscales. Using hysteresis, the channel will gradually change the scaling on the channel as required.
[REF POS]
Menu F2: Sets the position of the reference line display graticule for the entry channel main trace.
The current reference position is indicated by a small number, corresponding to the channel number, to the left of the grid. The reference position can only be changed by using the spin knob.
2-22
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[REF LEVEL]
First Level Menu F3: Sets the power level corresponding to the reference line being used for the
entry channel main trace. The reference level is the power level around which the channel main
trace is scaled. As scaling changes, the points on the reference line which intersect the power trace
will not change.
If [REF LEVEL] is pressed, it will cause the softkey menu to change to F2-1.
[REF LEVEL]
Second Level Menu F2-1: Allows automated setting of the reference level in addition to
manual setting. The [REF LEVEL] softkey repeats the manual entry of the reference level as
described previously.
[REF → CURSOR]
Menu F2-1: Automatically sets the reference level to the current cursor power level.
[REF → MAX]
Menu F2-1: Changes the entry channel reference power level to equal the maximum power
level on the channel trace. The entry area of the display will show this new reference level and
allow it to be changed as desired.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-23
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.5.3
DISPLAY Key
[DISPLAY]
The FUNCTION [DISPLAY] key controls the display and formatting of all of the measurements that
are taken. When [DISPLAY] is pressed, the softkey menu will be displayed as shown in F3 in
Figure 2-7 on page 2-26.
[AVG]
Menu F3: Accesses the averaging sub-menu and allows the averaging factor for the entry channel
to be changed.
Averaging reduces the amount of noise on a trace. The minimum amount of averaging should be
selected to reduce noise to an acceptable level. This allows the trace to change while still controlling the noise.
When averaging is selected on a channel, it is indicated by the character A, which appears on the
second line of the channel summary area of the CRT display.
[AVG N]
Menu F3-1: Selects the Averaging Mode and sets the averaging factor for the entry channel.
In the swept mode, the averaging function averages successive traces. The number of traces to
be averaged can either be selected with the spin knob or entered through the numeric keypad.
If entered through the keypad, the selected averaging number will always be rounded to the
nearest allowable number. The allowable averaging numbers are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, and
256 traces. In the CW mode, averaging works exactly the same way except that successive CW
power readings instead of traces are averaged.
[AVG ON/OFF]
Menu F3-1: Initiates or stops averaging on the entry channel. When averaging is off, it is the
same as if averaging were active with an averaging value of 1. Each measured trace will be displayed. This feature is particularly useful when it is desired to adjust a device under test (DUT)
while getting the fastest feedback possible, but an averaging factor has already been entered in
the instrument to use for final test. In this case, it is not necessary to have to remember the
averaging factor and change it back and forth from 1 to the final test value. Instead, the averaging capability can just be turned on and off.
[SMOOTHING]
Menu F3-1: Smoothing filters a channel trace by performing a moving average on the data
over a specified percentage of the sweep span. The parameter that specifies the percentage of
the channel trace to be averaged for each data point is called the Smoothing Aperture.
Smoothing reduces ripple in the trace. Smoothing is not the best choice for reducing noise. In
the presence of noisy signals, averaging should be used. When both smoothing and averaging
are used, the 8003 first averages consecutive unsmoothed traces then smooths each resulting
averaged trace.
2-24
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[SMOOTH APERT]
Menu F3-2: Selects the smoothing aperture parameter when in the smoothing mode.
The smoothing aperture is the percentage of the channel trace to be averaged for each data
point. The smoothing aperture can be either selected with the spin knob or entered through
the numeric keypad. Acceptable smoothing values are from 0.1% to 20%.
Smoothing aperture windows above about 5% will result in the display visibly shifting to the
left by an amount depending on the aperture selected. This results from the smoothed data
being plotted at the beginning of each smoothed segment. Fine tuning of devices such as filters
can be executed with either technique.
[SMOOTH ON/OFF]
Menu F3-2: Toggles to start or stop smoothing on the entry channel.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-25
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
AVG N
AVG
DISPLAY
KEY
AVG
ON / OFF
HOLD
ON / OFF
SMOOTHING
PLOT ALL
PLOT &
PRINT
PLOT 4
LIMIT
LINES
PRINT
LMT LNS
ON /OFF
LOG
UNITS
LINEAR
GRAPH /
READOUT
DEFINE
SEGMENT
CLEAR ALL
SEGMENTS
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
F3-11
F3
SMOOTH
ON / OFF
RETURN
DISPLAY
F3-2
ABORT
PLOT
PLOT
ENTRIES
ABORT
PLOT
F3-1
SPECIAL
PLOT
SLOPE
LIMIT
RETURN
DISPLAY
SETUP
DISPLAY
DEFINE
CUSTOM
FLAT
LIMIT
SEGMENT
N CLEAR
RETURN
PLOT
CUSTOM
POINT
LIMIT
SMOOTH
APERT
DONE
ED LOGO
DISPLAY
RETURN
DISPLAY
F3-10
F3-3
DISPLAY
F3-9
ALPHA
CURSOR POS
PLOT
TRACES
DEFINE
TRACES
TRACE 1
ON /OFF
PAINT
PRINT
PLOT
UP LEFT
DEFAULT /
RM LOGO
PLOT
LABELS
GRID
ON / OFF
TRACE 2
ON / OFF
INK
PRINT
PLOT
UP RIGHT
ABC
DEF
PLOT
GRID
SUMMARY
ON / OFF
TRACE 3
ON / OFF
LASER
PRINT
PLOT
LOW LEFT
FREQ LBL
ON / OFF
TRACE 4
ON / OFF
GHI
JKL
ABORT
PLOT
MNO
PQR
ABORT
PRINT
TITLE
ON / OFF
RETURN
STU
VWX
RETURN
RETURN
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
PLOT
LOW RIGHT
ABORT
PLOT
SC PIP2
ON / OFF
RETURN
YZ.
=/+
SPACE
DISPLAY
F3-3A
DISPLAY
F3-8
LOGO
ON / OFF
RETURN
FREQ LBL
ON / OFF
TITLE
ALPHA
CURSOR POS
TITLE
ON / OFF
CHANNEL
TITLE
UNDO /
ERR TTL
CH TTL
ON / OFF
GHI
JKL
F3-6
F3-12
MNO
PQR
STU
VWX
RED
GRAT
GRAT
COLOR
COLOR
INTENSITY
RETURN
GREEN
GRAT
RED
DIM /BRT
BLUE
DIM / BRT
GRAT RED
DIM / BRT
DISPLAY
F3-17
DISPLAY
F3-13
YZ.
=/+
LT. BLUE
GRAT
LT. BLUE
YELLOW
MAGENTA
WHITE
YELLOW
GRAT
DK. BLUE
MAGENTA
GRAT
RETURN
WHITE
GRAT
GRAT GREEN
DIM / BRT
DK BLUE
GRAT
GRAT BLUE
DIM / BRT
DISPLAY
F3-14
RETURN
RETURN
SPACE
DISPLAY
RED
GREEN
GREEN
DIM / BRT
RETURN
DISPLAY
F3-4
DISPLAY
ABC
DEF
DISPLAY
F3-5
CHANNEL
COLOR
COLOR
LABELS
RETURN
F3-7
NOTE:
The labels in the shaded boxes are
for menu identification only
DISPLAY
F3-16
DISPLAY
F3-15
F3-18
Figure 2-7: Function Menus Accessed w/ DISPLAY Key
2-26
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[HOLD ON/OFF]
Menu F3: Stops the measuring of data and the update of the channel display to cause a hold or
freeze of the display. The channel will remain frozen until the key is pressed again to toggle it back
into the normal update mode.
When a channel is in the Hold mode, its status is indicated by the character H on the second line
of its channel summary area on the display.
[PLOT & PRINT]
Menu F3: Accesses a series of sub-menus that offer you a variety of formats for the configuration of
hardcopy printouts. This function is normally used when the system is operating in the Graph Display mode. If the instrument is in the CW mode, the function can address the [PRINT] softkey (see
page 2-28) to allow the printing of a screen dump of the power meter readouts.
[PLOT ALL]
Menu F3-3: A standard plot is normally composed of a grid to define the scale, alphanumeric
labels describing information pertaining to the trace data being presented, and the trace itself.
The [PLOT ALL] softkey causes all of these elements to be printed on the hardcopy in a standard (8-1/2 x 11") format. If the 8003 has trace data available on all four channels, the data
from each of channel can be printed in a different color on a 4 (or more) pen plotter.
Figure 2-8 shows a typical PLOT ALL graph configuration.
GIGA-TRONICS Precision Scalar Analyzer
CH1: SW A
CRSR
-2.15 dBm
10
dB /
REF -27.47 dBm
CH3: SW A
CRSR
-2.70 dBm
20
dB / A
REF
24.61 dBm
Model 8003
CH2: SW A
20 dB /
CH4: SW A
20 dB /
Jun 25, 2001 15:23:49
CRSR
-2.68 dBm
REF
0.00 dBm
CRSR
-2.71 dBm
REF
32.28 dBm
+
+
+
4321
+
CH4
CH1
CH2
START
40.000 GHz
CRSR
67.022 GHz
STOP
99.000 GHz
CH3
Figure 2-8: PLOT ALL Function Hardcopy Printout (Typical)
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-27
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
[PLOT 4]
Menu F3-3: Initiates the printing of separate plots for each of the four channels. Pressing
[PLOT 4] brings up a sub-menu (F3-4) that allows you to select into which of the four quadrants of the hard copy each channel is to be positioned. The [PLOT UP LEFT],
[PLOT UP RIGHT], [PLOT LOW LEFT], and [PLOT LOW RIGHT] softkey labels refer
respectively to the Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Left, and Lower Right quadrants of the
printout. Pressing the desired location softkey allows you to define any of the four channels
trace information to that quadrant. See Figure 2-9 below for an example of a PLOT 4 hardcopy
printout.
CH1: SW A
10 dB/
-PC
REF
-35.00 dB
CH2: B
10 dB/
-PC
REF
0.00 dB
ZERO
ALL
CH1: SW C
0.1 dB/
SENSOR
A ZERO
SCALE FACTOR
10.0 dB/DIV
2
-PC
CRSR
CRSR
REF
CH2: C/A -PC
0.1 dB/
-0.19 dB
-0.00 dB
CRSR
REF
-0.14 dB
0.00 dB
CURSOR
FREQ
CURSOR
ON/OFF
-0.14 dB
7.055 GHz
1
CURSOR ∆
ON/OFF
SENSOR
B ZERO
SENSOR
C ZERO
SEARCH
CURSOR ->
MRKR N
1
DEFINE
MRKR N
2
REF ->
CURSOR
RETURN
RETURN
CAL
STRT
STOP
8.000 GHz
CH1 : SW A
0.1 dB/
-PC
REF
'A' THRU
PATH CAL
CURSOR
12.000 GHz
STRT
2.000 GHz
CRSR
7.055 GHz
CH2:SW -PC CRSR
0.1 dB/ -T1 REF
STORE
THRU A
0.00 dB
STOP
7.500 GHz
0.11 dB
0.00 dB
DONE
LMT LNS
ON/OFF
DEFINE
SEGMENT
STORE
THRU B
STORE
THRU C
SEG
1
2
A FULL
BND Y/N
1
STRT-FREQ
4.000 GHz
8.000 GHz
UPPER
0.20
0.25
LOWER
-0.20
-0.25
STOP-FREQ
8.000 GHz
10.000 GHz
UPPER
LOWER
SEGMENT
N CLEAR
CLR ALL
SEGMENTS
2
PLOT
ENTRIES
B FULL
BND Y/N
ABORT
PLOT
C FULL
BND Y/N
RETURN
RETURN
DISP
CAL
STRT
8.000 GHz
STOP
12.400 GHz
STRT
4.000 GHz
CRSR
4.000 GHz
STOP
10.000 GHz
Figure 2-9: PLOT 4 Function Hardcopy Printout
[PRINT]
Menu F3-3: Accesses a sub-menu for selecting the type of printer for hardcopy output of data
displayed on the CRT screen.
[PAINT PRINT]
Menu F3-5: Selects the output device that will generate the hardcopy to be an HP Paint Jet or
equivalent.
[INK PRINT]
Menu F3-5: Selects the output device to be an HP Ink Jet or equivalent.
[LASER PRINT]
Menu F3-5: Selects the output device to be an HP Laser Jet or equivalent.
[ABORT PRINT]
Menu F3-5: Stops the printing process at any time.
2-28
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[PLOT CUSTOM]
Menu F3-3: Activates a printout containing the plot parameters that were selected using the
[DEFINE CUSTOM] softkey.
[DEFINE CUSTOM]
Menu F3-6: The Define Custom function allows you to select specific plot parameters to be
shown on the hardcopy printout. [DEFINE CUSTOM] will bring up menu F3-6.
[DEFINE TRACE]
Menu F3-6: Displays menu F3-7 wherein any of the four channels can be defined to be ON or
OFF (trace information printed or not printed on the hardcopy plot). Menu F3-6 also allows
the selection of whether or not the background GRID, channel SUMMARY (alphanumeric
information describing channel parameters), TITLE, and frequency labels (FRQ LBL) will be
printed along with the plot of the channel trace configuration.
[SC P1P2]
Menu F3-6: Sets usage of the scaling parameters set up on the plotter itself for the hardcopy
printout. Figure 2-10 is a similar function printout.
CH1: SW A
10
dB /
CH3: SW A
20
dB / A
CRSR
REF
CRSR
REF
-1.88
-27.47
-2.02
24.61
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
CH2: SW A
20 dB /
CH4: SW A
20 dB /
Jun 25, 2001 16:13:06
CRSR
-1.91 dBm
REF
0.00 dBm
CRSR
-1.94 dBm
REF
32.28 dBm
+
+
+
4321
+
CH4
CH1
CH2
START
40.000 GHz
CRSR
67.022 GHz
STOP
99.000 GHz
CH3
Figure 2-10: SC P1P2 Function Screen Hardcopy Printout
[SPECIAL PLOT]
Menu F3-3: Causes menu F3-8 to display. You can then define the channel TRACES,
LABELS, or the background GRID to be printed with no other information appearing on the
hardcopy.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-29
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
[ABORT PLOT]
Menu F3-3: Aborts the plotting sequence at any time.
[ED LOGO]
Menu F3-3: Accesses Menu F3-3A where you can enter your company name or logo when
desired. The logo will be stored in a non-volatile RAM so it will be retained during power
down. Use of the [ALPHA/CURS POS] and alpha softkeys are similar to those of Menu F3-18
in Figure 2-7.
2-30
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[LIMIT LINES]
Menu F3-9: Allows the limit lines for the entry channel to be edited or turned on and off. If the
channel is within the limits that have been set for it, the channel number will be displayed with the
word PASS. If the channel parameters are not within the set limits, the word FAIL will be displayed.
[LMT LNS ON/OFF]
Menu F3-9: Toggles the limit lines ON or OFF.
[DEFINE SEGMENT]
Menu F3-9: Generates a table on the screen for the entry of limit line parameters, and will also
cause Menu F3-10 to be displayed. First, it is necessary to select the type of limit line from
Menu F3-10. The choices are a POINT LIMIT, a FLAT LIMIT, and a SLOPE LIMIT.
When the softkey for the type of limit line is pressed, the 8003 will automatically assign a number between 1 and 12 to the segment to be defined and position a box to the START-FREQ
column in the Limit Lines Table. The frequency is entered using the numeric keypad, and the
digits will be shown in the data entry section of the display.
Appropriate values should also be entered for the remaining columns in the table depending on
the type of Limit Lines selected.
When all of the values for a given segment have been entered, the ABORT choice on Menu
F3-10 will change to DONE. Additional segments can be defined by assigning a new segment
number and pressing the softkey for the type of Limit Line desired.
When [DONE] on Menu F3-10 is pressed, you will be returned to Menu F3-9 at which stage
[LMT LNS ON/OFF] should be pressed to turn the Limit Lines ON. This will also activate the
PASS/FAIL flag on the display.
[SEGMENT N CLEAR]
Menu F3-9: Clears all data for the segment selected. Clearing a segment does not change the
value or position of any other data in the table.
[CLEAR ALL SEGMENTS]
Menu F3-9: Clears all of the segments for the active channel. It does not clear segments on
non-active channels.
[PLOT ENTRIES]
Menu F3-9: Makes a hardcopy of the user-entered segment data that defined the limit lines.
[ABORT PLOT]
Menu F3-9: Stops the printing process at any time as desired.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-31
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
[UNITS]
Menu F3: Selects the units (dB or W) in which the measurement on the entry channel will be displayed. The menu will change to Menu F3-11.
This key is active only in the CW mode. This is because swept mode data is always displayed in logarithmic (dB or dBm) units.
[LOG]
Menu F3-11: Changes the displayed measurements to dB or dBm as appropriate.
[LINEAR]
Menu F3-11: Changes the displayed measurements to units of mW or some other dimension of
Watts.
[GRAPH/READOUT]
Menu F3: Toggles between displaying the results of a measurement in either graphic or alphanumeric readout format.
2-32
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[DISPLAY SETUP]
Menu F3): Define the color of the various elements of the display, which labels should be displayed,
and titles for the display and the entry channel (see Figure 2-7).
When the sub-menus associated with the COLOR and LABELS softkeys are accessed, the display
will show the current state of the color or label of interest in light blue. The other color or label designations will be displayed in standard menu green.
When [DISPLAY SETUP] is pressed, the softkey menu will change to F3-12.
[COLOR]
Menu F3-12: Define the color of the entry channel trace with its summary information, the
color of the graticule, and the intensity of the colors. When this softkey is pressed the softkey
menu will change to F3-13.
[CHANNEL COLOR]
Menu F3-13: Choose the color of the entry channel trace and its summary information. When
this softkey is pressed, the softkey menu will change to F3-14.
When one of the color softkeys shown in menu F3-14 is pressed, the color of the entry channel
trace and its summary information will change to the color indicated by the softkey label.
[GRAT COLOR]
Menu F3-13: Choose the color of the display graticule. When this softkey is pressed, the softkey menu will change to F3-15.
When one of the graticule color softkeys shown in menu F3-15 is pressed, the color of the graticule will change to the color indicated by the softkey label.
This softkey choose the intensity of each basic color for both the channel data and the graticule.
When the [COLOR INTENST] softkey is pressed, the softkey menu will change to F3-16.
When either the RED DIM/BRT, GREEN DIM/BRT or BLUE DIM/BRT softkeys of menu
F3-16 are pressed, the indicated color will dim or brighten everywhere except for the graticule.
When either the GRT RED DIM/BRT, GRT GRN DIM/BRT or GRT BLU DIM/BRT softkeys
of menu F3-16 are pressed, the indicated color will dim or brighten for just the graticule.
[LABELS]
Menu F3-12: Specify which labels should be displayed. When this softkey is pressed, the softkey menu will change to F3-17.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-33
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
[FREQ LBL ON/OFF]
Menu F3-17: Toggles the frequency labels to be displayed or removed from the graph display as
indicated. The frequency labels include the start, stop, cursor and cursor ∆ frequency labels
which are shown at the bottom of the graphic display. This can be specified at any time. However, if the routine is in the data readout display mode, any changes will not be apparent until
the graph display mode is entered.
[TITLE ON/OFF]
Menu F3-17: Toggles the main display title to be displayed or not displayed as indicated. See
also the Title softkey description below regarding definition of the title.
[CH TTL ON/OFF]
Menu F3-17: Toggles the title of the entry channel to be displayed or not displayed as indicated.
[TITLE]
Menu F3-12: Edit the main display title. The [CHANNEL TITLE] softkey changes the entry
channel title. When either softkey is pressed, the indicated title will be turned on if it is off and
a cursor bar will flash immediately below the character space in the title to be filled when
another character is chosen. The softkey menu will change to F3-18.
[ALPHA/CURS POS]
Menu F3-18: Selects whether to activate the alpha character softkey labels in order to create
or modify a title, or to access control over the cursor positioning.
[UNDO/ERR TTL]
Menu F3-18: Erases a complete title or undo (restore) the title if erased by mistake. Note that
it is only possible to undo the title if no new letters have been entered after selecting
ERR TTL.
The alpha softkeys have labels of six characters each for selection of characters for the title
being edited. A cursor in the form of a small square box will be over one of the characters in
each alpha softkey label. The cursor will be in the same position in each of the alpha softkey
labels. For example if the cursor is on A, it will also be on G, M, S and Y.
The cursor can be moved with the spin knob. Moving the wheel in a clockwise direction will
cause the cursor to also move in a clockwise direction. For example, if the cursor is on the letter
C and the spin knob is turned in a clockwise direction, the cursor will move to the letter F.
Similarly, moving the spin knob in a counterclockwise direction will cause the cursor to also
move in a counterclockwise direction. For example, if the cursor is on the letter A and the spin
knob is turned in a counterclockwise direction, the cursor will move to the letter D.
If an alpha softkey is pressed, the associated character in the cursor box is inserted in the next
character position in the title. Numbers can be inserted in the same way through the numeric
keypad of the instrument. The point, hyphen, forward slash, and plus symbols can be inserted
where required using the fifth alpha key, and a space can be placed at any point after the last
character position using the bottom softkey of the menu. The Backspace (BK SP) key will also
be active and, if pressed, will erase the last character defined in the title.
2-34
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
When the title is at its maximum length, the cursor will remain at the last character position
and any new characters input will simply replace the last character in the string. When the title
has been completed, the routine is returned to menu F3-12 by pressing the GHZ dB or ENT
OFF function key to the right of the numeric keypad.
If any other key is pressed that forces the instrument to leave the editing of the title (such as a
function key or a channel selection key), the title will be defined and stored as it is at the time
the other key is pressed.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-35
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.5.4
CAL Key
[CAL]
The FUNCTION [CAL] key is for path calibration, sensor calibration, and zeroing sensors and/or
bridges. When [CAL] is pressed, the softkey menu will be as shown in F4 in Figure 2-11.
CAL
KEY
SHORT /
OPEN
THRU
STORE
THRU A
CLEAR
PTH CAL
CLR PTH
CAL A
NF *
CAL
SENSOR
ZERO
SENSOR
ZERO ALL
SENSOR A
ZERO
SENSOR B
ZERO
CAL
SENSOR C
ZERO
CAL ALL
CLR PTH
CAL B
SENSOR A
CAL
CLR PTH
CAL C
SENSOR B
CAL
RETURN
SENSOR C
CAL
STORE
THRU B
STORE
THRU C
A FULL
BAND Y / N
B FULL
BAND Y / N
C FULL
BAND Y / N
CAL
RETURN
STORE
SHORT A
STORE
SHORT B
STORE
SHORT C
A FULL
BAND Y / N
B FULL
BAND Y / N
C FULL
BAND Y / N
RETURN
RETURN
F4-3
F4
CAL
RETURN
* Used only with Noise
Figure Testing.
CAL
CAL
F4-1
CAL
F4-4
F4-2
F4-5
NOTE:
The labels in the shaded boxes are for menu identification only
Figure 2-11: Function Menus Accessed with the CAL Key
[SHORT/OPEN]
Menu F4: Allows you to perform a short/open path calibration on a bridge, or to update the bridge
path calibration contained in memory.
When [SHORT/OPEN] is pressed, the softkey menu will change to allow the selection of input A,
B, or C for the short/open calibration.
See [CLR PTH CAL] in the following descriptions regarding clearing path calibrations.
The softkey display will change to Menu F4-1 to present the option to either store the short data or
return to Menu F4.
[STORE SHORT (A, B, or C)]
Menu F4-1: Initiates the collection of data which will be stored as the short path calibration
data. When the key associated with the sensor of interest is pressed, the softkey menu will go
blank. The active entry area of the display will contain the message, Storing Short. If the 8003
is controlling the source, it will temporarily select a source sweep time suitable for storing the
large number of data points needed (up to 4096). The short data will be stored in memory as
the short path calibration. Once this is done, the softkey menu will change to offer the option
of either going through the same procedure for the open condition and storing the open data or
returning to Menu F4.
2-36
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[FULL BAND (A, B, or C) Y/N]
Menu F4-1: The 8003 uses adaptive normalization. That is, the start and stop frequencies can
be changed within the frequency range for which the calibration was performed and the 8003
will automatically use the relevant calibration data.
Select Y to automatically set the start and stop frequencies to the full band of the sweeper during the calibration process. Then any subsequent start and stop frequencies will use path cal
data.
Select N to store the path cal data for the user-selected frequency range only. In this case it
would be necessary to repeat the path cal if it was required to make measurements outside of
the original frequency range used for path cal.
[THRU]
Menu F4: Performs a sensor through-path calibration in case it has not already been done on a
sensor currently being used, or in case it is desired to update the sensor path calibration data currently stored in memory. [THRU] brings up Menu F4-2 from where the sensor of interest can be
selected. A through-path calibration is performed and is stored in the same manner as either the
short or open path calibrations described previously.
[FULL BAND (A, B, or C) Y/N]
Menu F4-2: Function the same as those in Menu F4-1.
[CLR PTH CAL]
Menu F4: Accesses menu F4-3 wherein the desired sensor can be selected for the clearing of its
path calibration. When the sensor softkey is pressed, the instrument will initialize the specified sensor’s path calibration to a 0 dBm trace which would have no effect if ratio’ed with any measurement.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-37
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
[CAL SENSOR]
Menu F4: Sensors and bridges must be calibrated before they can be used with the analyzer. The
calibration linearizes the output voltage versus power input characteristics of the diode sensors.
Once a sensor is calibrated, the analyzer will remember the calibration even when turned off as
long as the sensor is used on the same channel on which it was calibrated.
Initiates the calibration of the 8003’s sensors. When [CAL SENSOR] is pressed, the softkey menu
will change to F4-4 for selection of either all sensors or the single sensor of interest.
Make sure that the sensor or bridge to be calibrated is attached to the calibrator output on the front
panel of the 8003 before pressing any of the softkeys shown in menu F4-4.
[CAL ALL]
Menu F4-4: Initiates the routine to calibrate all of the 8003 sensors and bridges. The instrument will test its sensors to try and determine which one is currently connected to the calibrator, and then attempt to calibrate it. When it cannot calibrate a sensor, it will display a prompt
to connect a sensor to the calibrator.
[SENSOR (A, B, or C) CAL]
Menu F4-4: Initiates the calibration of the corresponding sensor.
While the 8003 is calibrating a sensor, a special calibration display will be active (see
Figure 2-21). This display shows the progress and success of the sensor calibration in progress.
If the instrument is unable to successfully complete the calibration (for example, the sensor/
bridge might be damaged), the 8003 will exit the calibration routine and generate an audible
warning signal.
During a sensor calibration, the softkey menu will offer the option to either Pause Cal or Abort
Cal (as described below).
When the calibration completes, the 8003 will return to the Cal key menu (F4).
[PAUSE CAL] causes the 8003 to pause while performing its sensor calibration function. This
can be done to allow an inspection of the calibration display. The first softkey menu prompt
will then change from Pause Cal to Cont Cal.
[CONT CAL] commands the 8003 to continue with its calibration.
[ABORT CAL] causes the 8003 to stop any calibration procedure which is currently being performed, and return the routine to the Cal key menu (F4-1). Any previous calibration is
retained and used. The new, partial calibration data is eliminated.
2-38
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[ZERO SENSOR]
Menu F4: Initiates the zeroing of the sensors. When this softkey is pressed, the softkey menu will
change to F4-5.
Zeroing is eliminates any sensor drift. It is especially important for accurate low level measurements
(40 dBm). At very low levels (60 dBm), zeroing should be done every few minutes.
[ZERO ALL] and [SENSOR (A, B, and C)]
Menu F4-5: Causes the 8003 to attempt to zero all of its calibrated sensors. Pressing SENSOR
A, SENSOR B, or SENSOR C will zero one sensor at a time.
If a supported sweeper is connected to the analyzer, the analyzer will issue an RF-OFF command via the GPIB to turn the sweeper’s RF OFF. If using non-supported sweepers (sweeper
cannot be controlled over the Private Line GPIB), it is very important to make sure that the
RF power is off to all of the sensors before pressing the ZERO ALL softkey.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-39
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.5.5
CURSOR Key
[CURSOR]
The cursor can be thought of as a vertical line on the CRT display located at one frequency. As this
implies, there is only one cursor frequency for all channels. This frequency is displayed at the bottom of
the display screen on the frequency data line whenever the cursor has been turned on. Every channel
intersects that cursor at a particular power level. The intersections between the cursor frequency and the
signal trace of each channel is marked by a small cross (+). The power level of each channel at the
cursor frequency is displayed in the channel summary information area of the screen.
Markers are an important feature of the 8003, and are intimately related to the cursor. The 8003 always
knows the frequency of the signal through its control of the source and monitoring of the sweep ramp
input. This allows the 8003 to place frequency markers on the signal trace without using any source
marker capability. As a result, the 8003 cursor capability is only usable when the entry channel is in the
swept mode. If the entry channel is in the CW mode when the [CURSOR] key is pressed, all of the
softkey labels will be in dim, dark blue and pressing any of the softkeys will have no effect.
Markers are displayed on the 8003 as small circles on the traces at specific frequencies. Markers are
channel independent like the cursor. When a marker is set at a particular frequency, the marker will be
visible on all channel traces. The 10 markers available in the 8003 are set by moving the cursor to the
desired frequency, and then by defining the marker to be at that frequency.
The FUNCTION [CURSOR] key provides access to the complete cursor and marker capability of the
8003. When the CURSOR key is pressed and the entry channel is in the swept mode, the cursor will be
turned on and the entry area of the display will indicate the cursor frequency and power for the entry
channel. You can move the cursor with either the spin knob or the keypad. The softkey menu will
change to menu F5 as shown in Figure 2-12 on page 2-42.
[CURSOR FREQ]
Menu F5: Moves the cursor. Pressing this softkey causes the entry area of the display to indicate the
cursor frequency and power for the active channel. The cursor can be moved by changing the frequency with either the spin knob or the enter keypad, as desired.
[CURSOR ON/OFF]
Menu F5: Toggles the cursor on and off (see the Cursor ∆ Off next page). When the cursor is
turned on or off, this function will occur for all the channels. When the cursor is turned off, the
cursor ∆ is also turned off. When the cursor is turned on it is assumed that it might be desired to
change the cursor position. Therefore, the entry area of the display will show the cursor frequency
and the power at the cursor for the entry channel. The cursor can be moved by using either the spin
knob or the numeric entry keypad.
If the cursor is off and any entry made or action taken that requires a cursor, the cursor capability
will automatically be turned on.
2-40
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[CURSOR ∆ ON/OFF]
Menu F5: Toggles the cursor ∆ on or off. The state that the cursor ∆ capability is currently in (On
or Off) is displayed in light blue.
When the cursor ∆ is turned on, the regular cursor capability of the instrument will also be turned
on if it is off. The cursor ∆ frequency is set to the frequency of the regular cursor, and a ∆ symbol is
placed at the cursor frequency on all channel traces. At that moment, the two cursor symbols will
be superimposed upon each other. When the cursor ∆ is on, the cursor ∆ frequency is displayed at
the bottom of the display on the frequency label line.
While the cursor ∆ is on, all regular cursor power measurements are made relative to the power
level at the cursor ∆. When the cursor ∆ is turned on, it is then possible to move the regular cursor.
The entry area of the display will indicate both the cursor frequency and the power at the cursor frequency relative to the power at the cursor ∆ frequency for the entry channel. The regular cursor frequency can then be changed by using either the spin knob or the numeric entry keypad.
When the cursor ∆ is turned off, the displayed cursor power reverts to the power level of the measurement being taken at the cursor frequency.
☛
NOTE: When the regular cursor capability is turned off, the cursor ∆ is automatically
turned off. If the regular cursor capability is then turned back on, this will not reactivate
the cursor ∆ capability which must be separately turned on again.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-41
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
CURSOR
KEY
CURSOR
FREQ
CURSOR
ON / OFF
CURSOR ∆
ON / OFF
SEARCH
VALUE
SEARCH
CURSOR∆
MRKR N
DEFINE
MRKR N
REF ∆
CURSOR
CURSOR
F5
SEARCH
LEFT
DEFINE
MRKR N
SEARCH
RIGHT
CURSOR
FREQ
BANDWIDTH
MRKR N
ON
MAX
MIN
MRKR N
OFF
FLATNESS
CLEAR
MRKR N
RETURN
CLEAR ALL
MRKRS
RETURN
CURSOR
F5-1
CURSOR
F5-2
MEMORY
KEY
RECALL N
STORE N
PREV
STATE
DISPLAY N
DISPLAY
STATUS
CLEAR N
MEMORY
F6
CLEAR N
DISPLAY
CURRENT
CLEAR
ALL N
DISPLAY
PREV
CLEAR
ALL MEM
RETURN
RETURN
MEMORY
MEMORY
F6-1
F6-2
NOTE:
The labels in the shaded boxes are for menu identification only.
Figure 2-12: Function Menus Accessed with the CURSOR & MEMORY Keys
2-42
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[SEARCH]
Menu F5: Searches for and places a cursor at a user-defined level on the entry channel. When
cursor ∆ is active, SEARCH will look for and place a cursor at the user-defined level relative to the
reference cursor.
When this softkey is pressed, the cursor capability will be turned on if it is off. The entry area of the
display will show the current search value for the entry channel and allow it to be changed.
The softkey menu will change to F5-1 as shown in Figure 2-12.
[SEARCH VALUE]
Menu F5-1: The Search Value is the value for the entry channel that the search function will
look for when a search is requested. If a cursor ∆ is active, the search will be for the level relative to the cursor. If the cursor ∆ is not active, the search will be for the level that is equal to
the search value.
When [SEARCH VALU] is pressed, the entry area of the display will indicate the current
search value for the entry channel and present a prompt to enter a new search value as desired.
[SEARCH LEFT] and [SEARCH RIGHT]
Menu F5-1: Initiates the search function. If the cursor ∆ is active, the 8003 will search in the
indicated direction (left or right) from the current position of the cursor. It will look for the
level that is equal to the search value in relation to the level at the cursor ∆. If the cursor ∆ is
not active, the 8003 searches in the appropriate direction from the current position of the cursor to look for the level that is equal to the selected search value.
When the search has completed, the trace will be put on hold. The hold can be turned off by
pressing any front panel key. This hold is provided to allow the trace to be examined in the
same state as it was when the search was conducted. While in the hold state, the entry area of
the search was conducted. While in the hold state, the entry area of the display will show the
power level and a message indicating whether the search was successful, the message will be
Value Found: Trace HOLD. If the search was unsuccessful, the message will be “Error:
Cursor Value not Found” and the cursor will not have moved.
Once a search has been completed, the search value can be changed and the same search (left
or right) conducted by entering a new search value. If it is desired to exit the trace HOLD state
that follows a search, this can be done by pressing a number key. The entry area of the display
will show the number being entered. A search value can then be entered in a similar manner as
pressing the search value softkey. The significant difference is that once the number entry is
completed, the search value is changed and a new search is initiated.
To enter a new search value, but not initiate the same type of search again, the
[SEARCH VALUE] softkey should be pressed.
[BANDWIDTH (BW)]
Menu F5-1: If the BW search value is a negative dB value, pressing [BANDWIDTH] initiates
both a right and a left search simultaneously, starting from the maximum power level of the
entry channel trace. If the BW search value is a positive dB value the searches are performed
similarly, only starting from the minimum power level of the entry channel trace.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-43
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
As the preceding description implies, this function requires two markers. Therefore, if the
bandwidth function is successful, the cursor ∆ capability of the instrument will be turned on if
it was off. When this function is used, the cursor ∆ will always be positioned to mark the left
bandwidth marker on the display. Once the cursor capability has been turned on in this way, it
can only be turned off by returning to the cursor menu and using the [CURSOR ON/OFF] softkey (as previously described).
Other than the use of the cursor, the use of the bandwidth capability is very similar to the
Search Left and Search Right functions. The trace is put on hold after the search, and the display of success or failure messages will be the same. At this point, a new bandwidth search
value can be entered and another bandwidth search initiated by entering a new search value as
previously described for the Search Left and Search Right functions.
[MAX] and [MIN]
Menu F5-1: Positions the cursor at the frequency corresponding to the maximum or minimum
level of the entry channel trace. When either key is pressed, the cursor capability of the instrument will be turned on if it is off. The regular cursor will be positioned at the requested level.
MAX and MIN can be done with respect to the regular cursor when the cursor ∆ is active.
[FLATNESS]
Menu F5-1: Automatically displays (in dBm) the total deviation (flatness) between the MAX
and MIN values of the displayed signal trace. This eliminates the necessity of having to read
the MAX value, then the MIN value, and then having to subtract to determine the flatness figure.
[CURSR → MRKR N]
Menu 5-1: Moves the cursor to a defined marker position. An undefined marker is a marker that
has not been assigned to a frequency since a preset was performed, or since the marker was cleared.
When this softkey is pressed, the cursor capability will be turned on if it is off. The entry area of the
display will present a prompt to enter the number of the marker (0 through 9) to which it is desired
to move the cursor. The spin knob can move the cursor to the next marker in the indicated direction. Continuing to spin the wheel will cause the routine to jump from marker to marker until the
desired frequency is reached.
☛
2-44
NOTE: Markers need to be turned ON prior to this function.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[DEFINE MRKR N]
First Level Menu F5: Defines a marker at the cursor frequency. This softkey is also used to turn
markers on and off and to clear markers. When this softkey is pressed, the cursor capability will be
turned on if it is off. The entry area of the display will present a prompt to enter the number
(0 through 9) of the marker that it is desired to define at the cursor frequency. The default number
will be the lowest marker number which has not already been defined. If all markers are currently
defined, then there will be no default number. The softkey menu will change to menu F5-2.
When a number is entered, a marker small circle will be superimposed on the cursor on each trace
and will remain at that frequency when the cursor is moved. If the number of a marker that is
already defined is entered, then the previous frequency definition will be lost and the marker will
automatically be turned on if it was off.
[DEFINE MRKR N]
Second Level Menu F5-2: If the DEFINE MRKR N softkey is pressed again, the entry area of
the display will present a prompt to enter the number (0 through 9) of the marker it is desired
to define at the cursor frequency. This softkey will work identically to the DEFINE MRKR N
softkey that led to this sub-menu except that this softkey will not change the softkey menu.
This softkey option is provided in this menu so that one of the other softkeys in the menu
(such as changing the cursor frequency) can be used while still retaining the ability to define a
marker.
[CURSOR FREQ]
Menu F5-2: Moves the cursor. Pressing this softkey causes the entry area of the display to indicate both the cursor frequency and the level at the cursor for the entry channel. A prompt will
be presented to move the cursor by changing the frequency with either the spin knob or the
enter keypad, as desired.
This is the same type of data entry that is allowed when the Cursor key is pressed as well as
when the CURSOR FREQ softkey is pressed in the prior menu. It is provided here to allow
both the changing of the cursor and the defining of markers from one softkey menu.
[MRKR N ON] and [MRKR N OFF]
Menu F5-2: Turns any defined markers off and on without having to redefine their frequencies. When a marker is turned off, its tic mark is no longer displayed on the measurement traces
and the cursor can no longer be assigned to the marker. This allows markers to be set up for different tests while only displaying the relevant markers for each particular test, as desired.
When one of these softkeys is pressed, the entry area of the display will present a prompt to
enter the number of the marker that it is desired to turn on or off. The default will be to turn all
defined markers on or off. This would occur if the enter key were pressed without entering a
number. Note that only defined markers can be turned off or on. An error message will be generated if the number of an undefined marker is entered.
If the sweep frequencies were changed so that the frequency of a defined marker is outside the
limits of the frequency range currently being swept, then the marker would automatically be
turned off. Such a marker cannot be turned back on again until the sweep frequencies are
changed to allow the marker to be displayed.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-45
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
[CLEAR MRKR N]
Menu F5-2: Clears a defined marker. When a marker is cleared it is turned off, its defined frequency is erased, and it becomes an undefined marker. When this softkey is pressed, the entry
area of the display will present a prompt to enter the number of the marker that it is desired to
clear. The frequency of a cleared marker can not be recalled.
[CLEAR ALL MRKRS]
Menu F5-2: Clears all the markers. When the markers are cleared they are turned off, the frequencies that were defined for them are erased, and they become undefined markers.
☛
NOTE: The frequency of a cleared marker can not be recalled.
Another softkey menu will be presented giving you the choice to either clear all markers or to
abort. When the CLR ALL MRKRS softkey is pressed again, all markers will be cleared. The
entry area of the display will indicate that the markers have been cleared, and the routine will
return to the DEFINE MRKR N menu (F5).
If the [ABORT CLEAR] softkey were pressed, the routine would return directly to the DEFINE
MRKR N softkey menu (F5). No Markers would be affected by this action.
[REF → CURSOR]
Menu F5: Changes the main trace reference power level to equal the power level at the cursor on
the entry channel. If the cursor is inactive pressing this softkey will activate the cursor, place it at its
last frequency position, and then change the reference level.
2-46
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.5.6
MEMORY Key
[MEMORY]
The FUNCTION [MEMORY] key accesses the Store and Recall of instrument setups. These setups
are stored in non-volatile memory and will not be disturbed upon power down. When the MEMORY
key is pressed, the entry area of the display will present a prompt to enter the number of the stored setup
to be recalled. The softkey menu will change to menu F6 shown in Figure 2-12.
The stored setup recall will occur as soon as the setup number is entered. Then the entry area will
indicate the recall is complete, and allow the entry of another setup number to recall if so desired.
[RECALL N]
Menu F6: Recalls an instrument setup that was stored using the STORE N softkey. When this softkey is pressed, the entry area of the display will present a prompt to enter the number of the setup to
be recalled. When the setup number is entered, the stored instrument setup is recalled. The entry
area will then indicate that the recall is complete, and allow the entry of another setup number to
recall if so desired.
This is the same action that takes place when the MEMORY key is pressed. It is provided here in
case another of the softkeys in the memory menu (such as STORE N to store the current setup) has
been used, and it is then desired to recall a setup.
[STORE N]
Menu F6: Stores the current instrument setup as a numbered setup in non-volatile memory. When
this softkey is pressed, the entry area of the display will present a prompt to enter the number under
which the current setup will be stored. When the setup number has been entered, the current setup
will be stored. The entry area of the display will indicate that the storing is complete, and allow the
entry of another number under which to store the current setup if so desired.
[PREV STATE]
Menu F6: Undo any Preset conditions and Recall information.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-47
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
[DISPLAY STATUS]
Menu F6: Examine the settings of stored setups without having to recall the setups. It can also be
used to examine the settings of the current setup of the instrument. When this softkey is pressed,
the entry area of the display will present a prompt to enter the number of the setup to be displayed.
The softkey menu will change to sub-menu F6-1.
[DISPLAY N]
Menu F6-1: Displays an instrument setup that was stored using the STORE N softkey. When
the DISPLAY N softkey is pressed, the entry area of the display will present a prompt to enter
the number of the setup to be displayed.
This is the same action that takes place when the DISPLAY STATUS softkey is pressed. It is
provided here in case another of the softkeys in the Display menu is used, and it is then desired
to display a numbered setup.
When the number of the setup to be displayed is entered, the 8003 will stop taking and displaying measurements. The measurement area of the display will instead show all of the requested
setup’s parameters.
The softkey area will change to offer the option to either continue or abort the routine.
The setups of the 8003 are displayed on a set screens. The [CONT] softkey indicates to the
8003 when it should replace the current display screen with the next display screen. When the
last screen defining a setup has been displayed, press [CONT] to wrap the routine around and
again display first screen.
Press [ABORT] to stop the routine and return to the Display Status menu (F6).
[DISPLAY CURRENT] and [DISPLAY PREV]
Menu F6-1: When either of these softkeys are pressed, the respective setups are displayed in
the same way stored setups described above. As the softkey label indicates,
[DISPLAY CURRENT] displays the current setup. [DISPLAY PREV] shows the setup that
existed just before a setup parameter was last changed. This is also the setup that would be
restored if [PREV STATE] is pressed in the Memory menu (F6).
2-48
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[CLEAR N]
First Level Menu F6: Clears both stored setups and all of non-volatile memory. When a setup is
cleared, it is initialized in the same manner that the current setup when [PRESET] is pressed. When
[CLEAR N] softkey is pressed, the entry area of the display will present a prompt to enter the number of the setup to be cleared.
The softkey menu will change to sub-menu F6-2.
[CLEAR N]
Second Level Menu F6-2: Clears an instrument setup that was stored using the [STORE N]
softkey. When [CLEAR N] is pressed, the entry area of the display will present a prompt to
enter the number of the setup to be cleared.
This is the same action that takes place when [CLEAR] is pressed. It is provided here in case
another of the softkeys in the Clear menu has been used, and it is then desired to clear a numbered setup.
When the number of the setup to be cleared is entered, the 8003 will clear the stored setup and
indicate in the entry area of the display that it has completed this task. The number of another
stored setup to be cleared can then be entered.
[CLEAR ALL N]
Menu F6-2: Clears all stored setups. This does not provide access to clear the current setup or
previous state setup. Press [PRESET] to clear the current setup; press [PRESET] twice to clear
both the current and the previous setups.
The softkey menu will change to offer the option of either Clearing All or aborting the routine.
When the [CLEAR ALL N] softkey is pressed, all of the stored setups are cleared. The entry
area of the display will indicate that the setups have been cleared, and the instrument will
return to the Memory key primary menu (F6).
☛
NOTE: This action cannot be reversed once accomplished.
If the [ABORT CLEAR] softkey were pressed, the routine would return directly to the Memory
key primary menu (F6). The stored setups will not be affected.
[CLEAR ALL MEM]
Menu F6-2: Clears all information contained in the non-volatile memory. This includes the
current setup, the previous state setup, all stored setups, all stored traces, and all defined user
tests.
The softkey menu will change to offer the option to either clear all of the non-volatile memory
or to abort the routine.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-49
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
When the [CLEAR ALL MEM] softkey is pressed, all of the non-volatile memory will be
cleared and the instrument will be Preset.
☛
NOTE: This action cannot be reversed once accomplished.
If the [ABORT CLEAR] softkey were pressed, the routine would return to the CLEAR N softkey menu (F6-2). Non-volatile memory will not be affected.
2-50
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.6
SOURCE Controls
2.6.1
General Description
The 8003 is programmed to automatically control compatible signal sources through its private GPIB
bus (see Section 2.6.3). Commands are generated by using the four Source keys located on the front
panel of the 8003. Manual control of the source by the user is not required in this mode. The instrument
also has a local mode in which it does not control the source, but some features are not available in this
mode.
2.6.2
ATE Operation
When the 8003 is in an ATE environment and under GPIB control, the source might still be on the
8003 private line interface. When the source is on the 8003’s private line interface in an ATE system,
the 8003 will still control the source as it does under front panel operation. It is only necessary to send
commands to the 8003 to cause it to set up both itself and the source for standard scalar measurements.
If it is desired to control the source from a controller other than the 8003, the 8003 can be set to turn its
private bus off (see Menu SY1-10 in Figure 2-16). This will put the source into the local mode of
operation.
When the source is in the local mode of operation, the source controls on can be used for specifying the
start and stop frequencies to be indicated on the scalar display and for power measurement correction
with frequency. In this mode, the start and stop frequencies defined on the 8003 will not affect the
source settings.
2.6.3
8003 Source Compatibility
The 8003 is compatible with a range of sweepers that have an output identify command. The analyzer
tries to identify the source by sending the output identify commands of all the sweepers with which it is
compatible until it gets a response that it recognizes. If it gets a response that it recognizes, the 8003 will
then interrogate the known source to find out its parameter limits (frequencies, power level, etc.). With
this scheme the analyzer can, of course, only be compatible with sweepers that will identify themselves
and output their operating parameters. A source such as the HP8350A has no output capability,
therefore a new scheme has been devised to allow the 8003 to control this instrument.
Through a menu entry the 8003 can be set up to operate in the usual Auto Select Mode where it tries to
interrogate the source it detects on the private bus as described above. Another mode is available in
which the operator can tell the 8003 specifically which sweeper is connected to its private bus. In this
way the 8003 outputs the control commands of the user selected sweeper and, if that sweeper is in fact
connected, then the interface will work normally. The 8003, however, will have no knowledge of the
sweepers maximum and minimum parameter values. This will permit the user to possibly enter values of
frequency and power that are outside the sweeper’s valid ranges for these parameters. In the case of the
8350A, it will set these values to their maximum or minimum. The fact that the 8003 does not know
the sweeper’s max or min frequency levels means wide band path calibrations are not valid. The menu
entry will be dim, dark blue in this case.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-51
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.6.4
Key Operation
2.6.4.1
UPDATE SWEEPER ON/OFF Key
[UPD SWP ON/OFF]
The UPD SWP ON/OFF (Update Sweeper On/Off) softkey function appears in all of the Source
Control menus. Its purpose is to enable or disable the source sweeper configuration update. The default
is ON (enable). For example: If it were desired to display a range of 1 to 10 GHz on the 8003 but the
sweeper output is from 2 to 5 GHz, the following procedure would be accomplished:
•
•
•
☛
2.6.4.2
Set 2 to 5 GHz using the source Start and Stop functions
Turn OFF the UPD SWP function
Set the 8003 frequency for a range of 1 to 10 GHz
NOTE: A potential problem may occur when the 8003 and sweeper have different
configurations after the above is performed. Be sure to preset the instrument for
consistent operation.
START Key
[START]
The SOURCE [START] key initiates source frequency changes by specifying the desired start, center,
or CW frequencies depending upon the mode of operation.
When [START] is pressed, the entry area of the display will show the current start, center, or CW
frequency depending upon whether the source is in the start/stop, center/∆F, or CW mode, respectively.
A prompt will be displayed to change the frequency if desired, and the softkey menu will change to the
one illustrated in Figure 2-13.
START
KEY
START
CENTER
CW
UPD SWP
ON/OFF
START
Figure 2-13: Softkey Menu Change from Frequency Change Prompt
[START], [CENTER], and [CW]
These softkeys change the mode and frequency of the source. The softkey label that corresponds to
the mode currently in use (START for Start/Stop, CENTER for Center/∆F and CW) will be in
light blue. The other two options will be shown in standard menu green.
Pressing a softkey with a standard menu green label will cause the source to immediately switch to
measuring in the mode indicated by the softkey. The current value for the frequency associated with
2-52
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
the softkey (START, CENTER or CW) will be displayed in the entry area of the display. For example, if the source were in the Start/Stop mode, the START label would be in light blue. If the
[CENTER] softkey were pressed, then the CENTER label would change to light blue, the START
label would change to standard menu green, and the source would begin measuring in the Center/
∆F mode using the frequencies that were last entered for the Center and ∆F frequencies.
The frequency ranges that have been defined for the start/stop frequencies and the center/∆F frequencies are completely independent. Whenever a change is made from one frequency mode (start/
stop, or center/∆F) to the other, the instrument will always revert to the frequency range that was
last defined for the mode to which the instrument is switched. Similarly the frequency of the source
CW output is also independent of the start, stop, center, and ∆F frequencies. New frequencies are
entered using the numeric keypad and the appropriate terminator key.
2.6.4.3
STOP Key
[STOP]
The SOURCE [STOP] key initiates the source frequency changes. It allows the stop, ∆F, or CW
frequencies to be specified depending upon the mode of operation. See the description of the UPD SWP
ON/OFF softkey section .
When [STOP] is pressed, the entry area of the display will show the current stop, ∆F, or CW
frequency, depending upon whether the source is in the start/stop, center/∆F, or CW mode, respectively.
A prompt will be presented to change the frequency if desired, and the softkey menu will change to the
menu in Figure 2-14.
STOP
∆F
CW
UPD SWP
ON/OFF
STOP
Figure 2-14: Stop Key Softkey Menu Prompt
[STOP], [DF] and [CW]
These softkeys change the mode and frequency of the source. The softkey label that corresponds to
the mode currently being used (STOP for Start/Stop, ∆F for Center/∆F, and CW) will be in light
blue. The other two options will be in standard menu green.
Pressing one of the softkeys with a standard menu green label will cause the source to immediately
switch to measuring in the mode indicated by the softkey pressed. The current value for the frequency associated with the softkey pressed (STOP, ∆F, or CW) will be displayed in the entry area of
the display. For example, if the source were in the Start/Stop mode, then the Stop label would be in
light blue. If the ∆F softkey were pressed, then the ∆F label would change to light blue, the Stop
label would change to standard menu green, and the source would begin measuring in the Center/
∆F mode using the frequencies last entered for the Center and ∆F frequencies.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-53
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.6.5
POWER Key
[POWER]
See the description of the UPD SWP ON/OFF softkey in section 2.6.4.1.
The frequency ranges of the sweeps defined by the start/stop frequencies and the center/∆F frequencies
are completely independent. Whenever one frequency mode (start/stop or center/∆F) is changed to the
other, the instrument will always revert to the frequency range last defined for the mode to which the
instrument was switched. Similarly the frequency of the source CW output is also independent of the
start, stop, center, and ∆F frequencies.
The SOURCE [POWER] key initiates source power level changes. When pressed, the entry area of
the display will show the power level the source is set to output and present a prompt to change the level
as desired. The softkey menu will change to the menu on the left in Figure 2-15.
POWER
KEY
POWER
RF POWER
ON/OFF
POWER
SWEEP
PWR SWP
ON/OFF
START
POWER
STOP
POWER
FREQ
UPD SWP
ON/OFF
SWEEP
TIME
ANALOG /
DIGITAL
STEP
SIZE
RETURN
POWER
POWER
Figure 2-15: Power Softkey Menu Prompt
[POWER]
The entry area of the display will show the currently defined output power for the source and
present a prompt to change the power as desired.
This is the same type of data entry that is used when the POWER function key is pressed. It is provided here in case another parameter in the Power key menu is changed, and it is then desired to
change the power level. Changing the power level can be selected here as another option in the
softkey menu without the necessity of going from the softkey menu to the Source Control keys.
[RF POWER ON/OFF]
Turns the RF power output of the source on or off. The state that the source output power is currently in (On or Off) will be displayed in light blue. The other state that the source would enter if
the softkey were pressed will be displayed in standard menu green.
2-54
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[POWER SWEEP]
Turns on the Power Sweep function as described in Section 2.14. The following sub-menu softkey
selections will be available (as shown in Figure 2-15):
[PWR SWP ON/OFF]
Controls the enabling or disabling (toggle) of the power sweep measurement mode.
[START POWER]
Allows the entry of the desired power sweep starting power level (in dBm).
[STOP POWER]
Allows the entry of the desired power sweep stopping power level (in dBm).
[FREQ]
Allows setup of the desired power sweep operating frequency range.
[SWEEP TIME]
Allows setup of the desired analog sweep time.
[ANALOG/DIGITAL]
Selects either the analog or digital power sweep mode, as desired.
[STEP SIZE]
Allows setup of the digital power sweep step size.
[Sweep Time]
See the description of the UPD SWP ON/OFF softkey section 2.6.4.1.
The SOURCE [SWEEP TIME] function key initiates changing of the sweep time. When the
key is pressed, the entry area of the display will show the currently defined sweep time and a menu
similar to that shown below will be displayed.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-55
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.6.6
SWEEP TIME Key
[SWEEP TIME]
When the SWEEP TIME softkey is pressed, the entry area of the display will again show the currently
defined sweep time. Note that this is the same type of data entry that is allowed when the SWEEP TIME
function key is pressed. The reason for the redundancy is so that it will not be necessary to leave the
softkey menu and go to the Source Control function keys to change the sweep time.
[INT SWP TRIGGER]
This function is not currently implemented.
2-56
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.7
SYSTEM Controls
The system controls are keys that affect the instrument as a whole. This includes the keys used to
configure the instrument and to preset the instrument. The SYSTEM section of the 8003 consists of the
[CONFIG] and the [PRESET] keys.
2.7.1
PRESET Key
[PRESET]
The PRESET function key changes parameters that have been set for currently displayed back to the
factory-set defaults. See Appendix B for a listing of the 8003 factory-set default values.
2.7.2
CONFIG Key
[CONFIG]
The sub-menus accessed through the [CONFIG] key contain a softkey label called either [RETURN]
or [DONE] located at the bottom of the menus. Pressing this softkey will always return the routine to
the menu immediately preceding the menu currently being displayed. Pressing the softkey more than
once allows you to step backward through the menu structure to a preceding menu.
The CONFIG function key configures the scalar analyzer and any other devices that might be on its
private GPIB bus. When [CONFIG] is pressed, menu SY1 shown in Figures 2-16 and 2-17 (pages 2-58
and 2-59) will appear.
[SENSORS AC/DC]
Menu SY1: Changes the detection mode of the sensors. Pressing this softkey will bring up menu
SY1-1 to select either all or individual sensors as AC or DC. The state (AC or DC) that the setup
sensor is currently in will be displayed in light blue. The other state that the sensor would enter if
the softkey were pressed is displayed in standard menu green.
[SENSORS CW FREQ]
Menu SY1: Provides access to a series of sub-menus that allow you to specify which sensors will
take measurements in the CW mode, and what frequency correction factors will be used with the
sensors.
Whenever a channel is taking measurements in the swept mode, the 8003 determines the frequency
of the signal from the sweep input. The instrument will expect the sweep input to be sweeping from
0 V to 10 V, with 0 V representing the start frequency and 10 V representing the stop frequency.
The start and stop frequencies are assumed to be those that were specified by the use of the source
control keys. The 8003 will automatically determine the frequency of the signal from the sweep
input and correct the power readings of the sensor according to the frequency correction table
stored in the sensor’s PROM. See also the START key on page 2-52 and the STOP key on page
2-53 for the setting of the start and stop frequencies.
When a sensor is measuring in the CW mode it is possible to identify the frequency directly, specify
a cal factor, or command the 8003 to automatically determine the frequency of the signal from its
control of the source. If the 8003 is commanded to automatically determine the frequency of the
signal, it will use the source’s CW output frequency that was set by the 8003. If the 8003 is not controlling the source, the 8003 will still use the frequency set in the source control section. The specification of the CW mode of frequency correction is accessed through the [SENSOR CW FREQ]
softkey.
The softkey label that represents the currently defined mode of CW frequency correction for the
setup sensor will be light blue. All other softkey labels will be in standard menu green.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-57
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
CONFIG
KEY
SERVICE
SEE CONFIG (SERVICE) MENUS
ALL AC
SENSORS
AC / DC
ALL DC
SENSORS
CW FREQ
CW FREQ
CW CAL
FACTOR
A CAL
FACTOR
FROM
SOURCE
CORRCTN
OFF
RETURN
CONFIG
ALL FROM
SOURCE
B CAL
FACTOR
CORRCTN
ALL OFF
A FROM
SOURCE
C CAL
FACTOR
CORRCTN
A OFF
B FROM
SOURCE
CORRCTN
B OFF
C FROM
SOURCE
RETURN
CORRCTN
C OFF
RETURN
CONFIG
RETURN
CONFIG
SY1-2
A CW
FREQ
SENSOR A
AC / DC
B CW
FREQ
SENSOR B
AC / DC
C CW
FREQ
SENSOR C
AC / DC
RETURN
RETURN
CONFIG
CONFIG
SY1-1
SY1-3
SY1-4
SY1-5
CONFIG
SY1-6
SENSORS
OFFSET
CLR ALL
OFFSETS
SENSOR A
OFFSET
PULSE
SENSORS
GPIB
DEVICES
CAL SWP
RAMP
CONFIG
VPROPF
FREE RUN
SENSOR B
TRIG'D
SENSOR B
OFFSET
SENSOR C
DELAY
TRIG'D
SENSOR C
OFFSET
RETURN
RETURN
CONFIG
CONFIG
CONFIG
SY1-8
SY1-9
SY1-7
GPIB
ADDRESS
PVT BUS
ON / OFF
SOURCE
ADDRESS
SOURCE
RETURN
AUTO
SELECT
SY1
STANDARD
SENSOR A
PLOTTER
PLOTTER
ADDRESS
PRINTER
ADDRESS
NUMBER
OF PENS
HP 8350A
RETURN
* NF
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
CONFIG
SY1-A
CONFIG
CONFIG
SY1-10
CONFIG
SY1-11
NOTE:
The labels in the shaded boxes are
for menu identification only
SY1-12
Figure 2-16: System Control Menus Accessed with CONFIG Key (Part 1)
2-58
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
SEE CONFIG (SYSTEM) MENUS
CONFIG
KEY
SENSORS
AC / DC
SET CAL
SENSORS
CW FREQ
SET TIME
SENSORS
OFFSET
TEST
PATTERN
SET CAL
OUTPUT
DEFINE
PASSWORD
MINUTE
GRID L / S
SECOND
DOTS L / S
PULSE
SENSORS
SENSOR
EEPROM
GPIB
DEVICES
SET CAL
S/N
HOUR
*NF
MONTH
CIRCLES
YEAR
1 COLOR
L/S
SERVICE
CLEAR
PASSWORD
DATE
COLOR
BARS
ABORT
DONE
DONE
CHANGE
COLOR
RETURN
CAL SWP
RAMP
CONFIG
CONFIG
DONE
CONFIG
SY1-13
CONFIG
* Used only with
Noise Figure testing
SY1
STANDARD
VPROPF
SENSOR A
EEPROM
SY1-16
PAGE UP
SET TIME
SENSOR B
EEPROM
RETURN
SY1-14
SY1-15
CONFIG
SENSOR C
EEPROM
CAL LOC
PASSWORD
PROGRAM
EEPROM
CONFIG
RETURN
SY1-A
GIGATRONICS
FACTORY
ENABLE
INPUT
ABORT
CONFIG
CONFIG
SY1-17
SY1-18
ABORT
PROGRAM
RETURN
PROGRAM
EEPROM
RETURN
DEFINE
PASSWORD
CLEAR
PASSWORD
RETURN
NOTE:
The labels in the shaded boxes
are for menu identification only
PAGE UP
HOUR
PAGE
DOWN
MINUTE
GIGATRONICS
REP
SECOND
SERVICE
CENTER
MONTH
FIRST
PAGE
DATE
LAST
PAGE
YEAR
ENABLE
INPUT
DONE
RETURN
OWNER
SITE
RETURN
CONFIG
CONFIG
CONFIG
CONFIG
CONFIG
CONFIG
SY1-24
SY1-23
SY1-22
SY1-21
SY1-20
SY1-19
Figure 2-17: System Control Menus Accessed with the CONFIG Key (Part 2)
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-59
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
[CW FREQ]
Menu SY1-2: Directly specifies the frequency of the signal to the sensor. When this softkey is
pressed, the entry area of the display will show the currently defined signal frequency and present a
prompt to change it as desired. Once this softkey has been pressed, the instrument will assume that
all measurements made in the CW mode on the setup sensor are at the specified CW frequency.
The instrument will correct the power readings of the sensor according to the frequency correction
table stored in the sensor’s PROM.
[CW CAL FACTOR]
Menu SY1-2: Specifies user-defined sensor frequency response correction factors. When this softkey is pressed, menu SY1-4 will be shown allowing the selection of the sensor to which the cal factor will be applied. Once the selected sensor is specified, the instrument will apply the cal factor to
all CW measurements made with the sensor, and the frequency correction table stored in the sensor’s PROM will not be used when in the CW mode.
[FROM SOURCE]
Menu SY1-2: Specifies that the 8003 should automatically determine the frequency of the signal
from the signal source. Pressing this softkey will cause menu SY1-5 to appear wherein either all or
any individual sensors can be selected to determine the source’s CW output frequency as set by the
8003 through the source control keys.
[CORRCTN OFF]
Menu SY1-2: Accesses menu SY1-6 wherein the correction factor for either all or any individual
sensors can be turned off.
[SENSOR OFFSET]
Menu SY1: Causes menu SY1-7 to appear. This menu either clears or enters offsets for the selected
sensors. When the selected SENSOR OFFSET softkey is pressed, the entry area of the display will
show the current value of the setup sensor’s offset. The offset can then be changed as desired.
The SENSOR OFFSET softkeys of menu SY1-7 will be in light blue if the setup sensor’s offset is
nonzero. If the sensor offset is zero, the softkey label will be in standard menu green since no offset
is being used.
[PULSE SENSORS]
Menu SY1: Accesses menu SY1-8 and then SY1-9 wherein channel and operating modes can be
specified when any of the 80340 Series of Triggerable Pulse (Peak Power) Sensors are used with the
8003. The channel of interest is first selected and then either the Free Run, Trig’d, or Delay Trig’d
mode is specified in menu SY1-9. In the Free Run mode, the RF power is sampled automatically and
the sensor does not require a trigger signal. In the Trig’d mode the sensor measures the RF power
when a trigger signal is applied, and in the Delay Trig’d mode the sensor will sample the RF power
at some specific time later than the trigger.
See the Operation & Maintenance Manual included with the Triggerable Pulse (Peak Power) Sensors for complete operating information.
2-60
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
[GPIB DEVICES]
Menu SY1: Accesses menu SY1-10 wherein the GPIB address for the 8003 can be set and the
instrument’s private bus can be turned on or off. The [SOURCE] softkey of menu SY1-10 accesses
menu SY1-11. The [SOURCE ADDRESS] softkey of menu SY1-11 sets the address of the signal
source (default is 20). The [AUTOSELECT] softkey automatically interfaces any compatible
sweeper being used in the system with the exception of a Model HP8350A. If an 8350A is being
used the next softkey down, labeled HP 8350A, should be pressed to activate the interface. The
[PLOTTER] softkey of menu SY1-10 brings up menu SY1-12. Through this menu the plotter’s
address can be set (default is 05), and the number of pens the specific plotter contains can be
defined for use by the 8003 when graphic plots are made. The [PRINTER ADDRESS] softkey of
menu SY1-10 sets the address of the printer being used in the system (default is 01).
[CAL SWP RAMP]
Menu SY1: Synchronizes the 8003 to the ramp from the sweeper. This will need to be done if the
trace length on the display is less than the full 8 horizontal divisions.
[STANDARD]
Menu SY1-A: Resets the 8003 to normal (default) operation after the VPROPF function has
been used.
[VPROPF]
Menu SY1-A: Synchronizes the internal measurement process to an external ramp signal.
[SERVICE]
Menu SY1: Accesses function testing of various elements of the 8003. This will aid in the maintaining and servicing of the instrument. This softkey causes menu SY1-13 to appear. The regular
data display will be replaced with a display of the currently defined calibrator output adjustment
and the currently defined serial number of the calibrator.
[SET CAL]
Menu SY1-13: Adjusts the 0 dBm output of the calibrator of the 8003. When this softkey is
pressed, the softkey menu will change to menu SY1-14 where the calibrator output and the calibrator serial number can be revised or modified if required. A password can be defined that
must be entered to enable the adjustment of the calibrator output (see DEFINE PASSWORD
next page). This will be for environments in which access to this ability must be restricted. If a
password is defined for this adjustment function, then all the softkey labels except for the
ABORT label will be in dim, dark blue and cause no action if their associated softkeys are
pressed. The instrument will present a prompt to enter the password. If the correct password is
not entered, the instrument will deny access but will allow the entry to be tried again.
If the password is entered correctly or no password has currently been defined, then all of the
softkey menu labels will be in standard menu green.
[SET CAL OUTPUT]
Menu SY1-14: Sets the calibrator output. When this softkey is pressed, the presently defined
value of the calibrator adjustment (in percentage of deviation) will flash and a prompt will be
presented asking for a new adjustment percentage to be entered as desired. A number from
50.00 to 150.00 (%) can then be entered.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-61
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
[SET CAL S/N]
Menu SY1-14: Defines the calibrator serial number. When this softkey is pressed, the presently defined calibrator serial number will flash and a prompt will be presented asking for a new
serial number to be entered as desired. Any number up to eight digits in length can then be
entered by using the 0 through 9 number keys
[DEFINE PASSWORD]
Menu SY1-14: Defines a password that users will have to enter to change the calibrator output. When this softkey is pressed, a prompt is presented asking for a new password. Six number
keys can then be pressed. The keys being pressed will not be shown on the display. Once the six
number keys have been pressed, the display will again present a prompt asking that the password just defined be entered again to confirm the password. When the password is confirmed,
the defined password will be enabled.
☛
NOTE: Jumper W1 on the Calibrator PC Board must be moved to pins 2 and 3
from pins 1 and 2 to complete the enabling of password protection.
[CLEAR PASSWORD]
Menu SY1-14: Clears the password. Once this softkey is pressed, the password will be cleared
and future users will be able to adjust the calibrator output without having to know a password
until one is again defined.
[ABORT]
Menu SY1-14: Abandons any changes made to the calibrator output adjustment. When this
softkey is pressed the routine will return to the SET CAL softkey of menu SY1-13. Any
changes that may have been made to the calibrator output and/or the calibrator serial number
and/or the password since entering the SET CAL menu will be reversed.
When the SET CAL softkey menu is displayed, it will only be possible to leave the menu and
return to regular data display by pressing the [ABORT] or [DONE] softkeys.
[DONE]
Menu SY1-14: Terminates the setting of the calibrator output. The calibrator output adjustment and the calibrator serial number will be remembered as they appear at the time the softkey is pressed. The 8003 will also memorize the time when the DONE softkey is pressed as the
new calibration time. The instrument will return to the SET CAL softkey of menu SY1-13.
[SET TIME]
Menu SY1-13: The 8003 contains a real time clock with a battery backup so that it retains the
time and date at power off. The SET TIME softkey sets the clock time and date. When the
softkey is pressed, the regular data display will be replaced with a display of currently defined
time and date. Menu SY1-15 will also appear allowing you to set the hour, minute, second,
date, month and year. Setting of the hour, minute, and second of the clock is done using
24-hour time, 0:00:00 to 23:59:59. Years are defined by four digits.
2-62
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
The [DONE] softkey at the bottom of the menu terminates the setting of the clock. The clock
will start running from the time and date settings that appear at the time this softkey is pressed.
The routine will then return to the SET TIME menu (SY1-13).
When the [SET TIME] softkey is displayed, it will only be possible to leave the menu and
return to regular data display by pressing the DONE softkey.
[TEST PATTERN]
Menu SY1-13: Displays various test patterns. The patterns will provide helpful feedback when
making adjustments to the display hardware. The data display will be replaced with a test grid,
and the softkey menu will change to SY1-16.
When the TEST PATTERN softkey menu is displayed, it will be possible to only leave the
menu and return to regular data display by pressing the DONE softkey.
Whatever softkey label is currently associated with the display pattern being shown will be in
light blue. All other labels will be in standard menu green. If a front panel key is pressed, the
screen will display the name of the key.
[GRID L/S] and [DOTS L/S]
Menu SY1-16: Replaces the entire display with the indicated display pattern. A prompt on
the screen will be shown indicating that any key can be pressed to return to the menu. When
the key is pressed, the routine will return to the TEST PATTERN menu (SY1-13) with the
exception that the indicated pattern will continue to occupy the data display area.
[COLOR BARS]
Menu SY1-16: Replaces the data display area with a standard NTSC color bar display.
[CIRCLES and 1 COLOR]
Menu SY1-16: Selects displays which can be used for making adjustments to the video circuits
of the 8003.
[CHANGE COLOR]
Menu SY1-16: Changes the color of the pattern being displayed. When the
[TEST PATTERN] softkey in the Service Menu is pressed and the Test Pattern menu entered,
the test grid will be light blue. Changes in color will be cycled in the following order: Red, Yellow, Green, Light Blue, Dark Blue, Magenta, and White.
[DONE]
Menu SY1-16: Terminates the display of test patterns. The routine will return to the Test Pattern menu (SY1-13).
[SENSOR EEPROM]
Menu SY1-13: Enters the routines necessary to either view or change the calibration data for
the power sensors and/or bridges connected to the 8003.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-63
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
This softkey will bring up menu SY1-17. The available selections will be shown in standard
menu green. Non-available selections will be in dim, dark blue. In this menu, dim, dark blue
generally indicates that a sensor is not connected to an input.
To continue, select sensor A, B, or C. The display will change to show a calibration spreadsheet
for the selected sensor. The softkey menu will change to menu SY1-18.
[PAGE UP]
First Level Menu SY1-18: Accesses menu SY1-19. When [PAGE UP] is first pressed, the
spreadsheet will go to page 2 and the menu will change to SY1-19.
[PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN]
Second Level Menu SY1-19: Pages through the tables of calibration data to examine/change
entries. The bottom line of the screen displays new data as it is entered on the keyboard. To
change a data value in the table, move the yellow bar to the appropriate line using either the
spin knob or by repetitive entries on the UNITS keys (MHz/dBm or GHZ/dB). Enter the new
value using the keypad and the appropriate terminator key.
Subsequent operation of [PAGE UP] will continue to increment to the last page of data.
Use [PAGE DOWN] to return to an earlier page in the sequence.
[FIRST PAGE] and [LAST PAGE]
Menu SY1-19: These softkeys directly access the first and last pages, respectively, of the calibration data.
[ENABLE INPUT]
Menu SY1-19: The default condition of the 8003 is for data input to be enabled. This can be
defeated using [ENT/OFF]. To re-enable, use [ENABLE INPUT].
[SET TIME]
Menu SY1-18: This softkey functions the same as [SET TIME] described on page 2-62.
[CAL LOC]
Menu SY1-18: Selects the location at which the calibration was performed. The choices are
shown in menu SY1-21. The CAL LOCATION is shown on page 1 of the sensor identification
spreadsheet.
[PASSWORD]
Menu SY1-18: Toggles the requirement for entry of a password before any changes can be
made to the sensor calibration stored in the EEPROM. The [PASSWORD] softkey accesses
menu SY1-22.
[DEFINE PASSWORD]
Menu SY1-22: Defines a password that users will have to enter to change the sensor calibration data stored in the EEPROM.
2-64
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
When this softkey is pressed, a prompt is presented for a new password. Six number keys should
then be pressed. The keys being pressed will not be shown on the display.
Once the six number keys have been pressed, the display will again present a prompt asking
that the password just defined be entered again for confirmation. When the password has been
confirmed, the defined password will then be accepted.
Then press [RETURN] and [PROGRAM EEPROM] to store the password in the sensor
EEPROM. From this point on, the password must be entered before any calibration data can be
changed in the sensor EEPROM.
[CLEAR PASSWORD]
Menu SY1-22: Clears the currently defined password. This can be done as follows by pressing:
[CLEAR PASSWORD] [RETURN] [PROGRAM EEPROM] enter the password [PROGRAM
EEPROM]
The password will then be erased from the sensor EEPROM. Future users will be able to change
the data in the sensor EEPROM without having to enter a password until one is again defined.
[PROGRAM EEPROM]
Menu SY1-18: Downloads new sensor calibration information to the sensor EEPROM which
will replace all changeable data currently stored in the EEPROM. In this respect the 8003 functions as a PROM programmer, thus removing the need for any additional test equipment.
This softkey accesses menu SY1-23. You should enter either [PROGRAM EEPROM] in this
menu to continue, or [RETURN] to cancel.
[ENABLE INPUT]
Menu SY1-18: The default condition of the 8003 is for data input to be enabled. This can be
defeated using the [ENT/OFF] key. To re-enable, use the [ENABLE INPUT] softkey.
[ABORT]
Menu SY1-18: Pressing [ABORT] will bring up menu SY1-24. The [ABORT PROGRAM]
softkey in this menu exits back to menu SY1-17. The [RETURN] softkey cancels the ABORT
instruction.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-65
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.8
Front Panel Operation
The instructions in this section will take you in a step-by-step sequence through the procedures used in
the basic setup and operation of the instrument. This will prepare you for making the specific types of
measurements described in succeeding sections. The discussion assumes that you are using the 8003
Precision Scalar Analyzer with a supported microwave sweeper, a Series 803XXA power sensor, and a
Series 80500 return loss bridge.
Configure the analyzer and sweeper according to the instructions in Section B.3. Connect one power
sensor to sensor input A. Connect the bridge to sensor input B. Leave sensor input C disconnected.
Figure 2-18: Analyzer, Sweeper, Sensor & Bridge Interconnection
Turn on the sweeper first, and then the analyzer. The analyzer will perform its start-up self test and
initialize the sweeper. Press [PRESET] on the 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer to bring up the preset
(default) conditions.
2-66
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.8.1
Calibrating for Power Measurement
Before the 8003 analyzer can operate, the Power Sensor and Bridge must be calibrated. Connect the
power sensor to the 8003 analyzer front panel connector marked CALIBRATOR. You may need to use
an adapter to adapt from the sensor connector to the front panel type N(f) connector. Press Function
[CAL] and look at the softkey menu.
CAL
KEY
SHORT/
OPEN
THRU
CLEAR
PTH CAL
*NF
* Used only with
Noise Figure testing
CAL
SENSOR
ZERO
SENSOR
CAL
Figure 2-19: CAL Softkey Menu
Press [CAL SENSOR] to bring up a menu of sensors to be calibrated.
CALL
ALL
SENSOR
A CAL
SENSOR
B CAL
SENSOR
C CAL
RETURN
CAL
Figure 2-20: Sensor CAL Menu
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-67
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Press [SENSOR X CAL], where X is the correct sensor input (A, B, or C). As the sensor calibrates
you should see a display develop that looks something like Figure 2-21 when the calibration has
completed.
CONT/
PAUSE
PERFORMING POWER SWEEP
-1V
SENSOR
A
Autoxero
:
Pass
ATTN
ATTN
ATTN
ATTN
:
:
:
:
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
+20
+10
0
-10
-20
-100 mV
-10 mV
1
2
3
4
~ +11 dBm: Pass
~ +1 dBm: Pass
~ -9 dBm: Pass
~ -19 dBm: Pass
~ -30 dBm: Pass
Balanced sensor limits
CALIBRATOR
-25
-20
ATTN 1 10dB
-15
-10
ATTN 2
-5
20dB
OUTPUT
0
POWER
dBm
10
15
5
ATTN 3
30dB
ATTN 4
40dB
ABORT
CAL
Figure 2-21: Sensor Calibration Display Screen
Upon successful calibration the instrument will chime and return to its standard display. If the
instrument should fail to calibrate, make sure that your sensor is properly attached to channel A and
that it is tightly attached to the calibrator before assuming that there is something wrong with the
sensor. Also, make sure that you have the proper sensor cable (see Section B.3.2).
Disconnect the sensor from the calibrator and connect the Input Port of the bridge to the calibrator.
Either leave the test port of the bridge open, or connect a short to the test port. Although leaving the
test port open will give adequate results, for best accuracy, connect a short to the test port of the bridge.
Press [SENSOR B CAL] to calibrate the bridge. Again, the instrument will chime upon successful
completion of a calibration and return to its standard display. If the instrument should fail to calibrate,
check your bridge connections and sensor cable before assuming that the bridge is bad.
2.8.1.1
Calibration Intervals
Normally, front panel calibration of sensors and bridges should be done whenever the analyzer is
powered up - at least once per day. The linearity calibration is very stable and is memorized by the
analyzer in non-volatile memory so that calibration data is not lost when the analyzer is turned off.
Once calibrated, the sensors should remain in calibration for days. However, daily calibration is
recommended as good measurement practice.
There are some conditions under which it is advisable to recalibrate the sensors. The most common is a
significant change in ambient temperature. This is not a problem in most temperature controlled
manufacturing and engineering environments. However, if the ambient temperature has changed more
than 10 degrees Fahrenheit (±5 degrees Celsius) since the last calibration, you may want to recalibrate
the sensors. Another good time to recalibrate the sensors is if you suspect they have been damaged. This
can either be due to electrical damage (subjecting the sensor to more than its maximum rated power or
more than its rated input dc voltage), or mechanical damage (for instance, dropping the sensor). If the
sensor calibrates normally, changes are that it was not damaged seriously. Although the analyzer is
capable of calibrating out minor variations due to electrical or mechanical mistreatment, internally set
limit lines prevent the unintended use of badly damaged sensors.
2-68
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.8.2
Path Calibration Correction for Component Variations
These procedures explain how to perform path calibration corrections for component variations.
Connect the input port of the bridge to the RF Output connector of the sweeper. You may need an
adapter to adapt the sweeper to the bridge.
Configure the analyzer for your measurement. First, turn off channels 3 and 4. Press Channel [3]. Then
press the [OFF] key. This should remove the channel 3 trace and its associated information area. Turn
off channel 4 in the same way.
2.8.2.1
Set Up Sweep Parameters
Press the Source [START] key. Enter the desired start frequency on the numeric entry pad, and press
the correct units key (MHz or GHz). The frequency indicators at the bottom of the analyzer display as
well as the frequency display on the sweeper should indicate your new start frequency.
CH1 : SW A
20 Db /
REF
0.00 dBm
CH2 : SW B
20 dB /
REF
0.000 dBm
STOP
STOP FREQ
12.400 GHz
∆F
CW
2
1
STRT
8.000 GHz
STOP
12.400 GHz
STOP
Figure 2-22: New Frequency Parameters Display Screen
If the sweeper does not respond to the new Start frequency, check that the GPIB cable from the analyzer
to the sweeper is properly connected. Also check that both the analyzer and the sweeper agree on the
sweeper GPIB address (see the Sweeper Installation in Section B.3.3 for more details).
In the Source section, press [STOP] and enter the stop frequency. Press [POWER] and enter the
desired RF power level (often the maximum leveled power from the sweeper). Locate the [RF POWER
ON/OFF] softkey. The OFF characters are in light blue indicating that RF Power is currently set to OFF.
Press this softkey and notice that the ON characters become light blue, and that the RF power from the
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-69
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
sweeper turns on. Press [SWEEP TIME] and enter the desired sweep time on the numeric entry pad,
and press the appropriate units key (ms or s) (0.5 second is recommended initially).
CH1 : SW A
0.1 Db /
REF
SCALE
FACTOR
2.80 dBm
AUTOSCALE
SCALE FACTOR
0.1 Db/DIV
COUNT
AUTOSCL
1
REF
POSN
REF
LEVEL
STRT
8.000 GHz
STOP
12.400 GHz
SCALE
Figure 2-23: Autoscaled thru Path Before Path Calibration Display
2.8.2.2
Frequency Response Correction
Connect the power sensor to the test port of the bridge. The channel 1 trace (light blue) is now
indicating the power output at the bridge test port as a function of frequency. Because the analyzer is
currently set to a vertical scale of 20 dB/division, the trace probably looks like a straight horizontal line.
To change the vertical scale factor, press Function [SCALE] then press [AUTO-SCALE]. The
analyzer automatically scales the trace to show maximum vertical variation on the screen.
The variation on the screen is due to the residual leveling errors from the sweeper as well as frequency
variations in the bridge, adapters, and connectors. These variations must all be taken into account when
making a component measurement. One of the easiest ways to do this is by letting the analyzer
memorize the variations and automatically subtract them out of the measurement. This is known as a
Path Calibration since it calibrates out the frequency variations in each measurement path.
2-70
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
To do a path calibration, press Function [CAL] then press [THRU] which brings up the F4-2 menu in
Figure 2-24.
STORE
THRU A
STORE
THRU B
STORE
THRU C
A FULL
BND Y/N
B FULL
BND Y/N
C FULL
BND Y/N
RETURN
CAL
Figure 2-24: THRU PATH Calibration Menu
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-71
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Press [STORE THRU A]. The analyzer will display the message PREPARING SOURCE FOR
‘A’ THRU. When it is done, the analyzer will display ‘A’ THRU PATH CAL DONE. Press
[SCALE] then [REF LEVEL], and then press the digit 0 on the numeric keypad followed by the
[GHz/dB] units key. You should now see a straight line trace in the middle of the screen. If the
resulting line has more than ±0.1 dB of ripple, press [A FULL BND Y/N]. The ‘Y’ should turn dark blue,
and the ‘N’ should be light blue. This causes the sweeper to perform a path calibration over the
displayed range instead of the full frequency range of the sweeper. Press [STORE THRU A] to path
cal again. You should get a straight line trace. The analyzer is now ready for fully corrected, accurate
insertion loss measurements.
CH1 : SW A
0.1 dB/
'A' THRU
PATH CAL
-PC
REF
STORE
THRU A
0.00 dB
STORE
THRU B
DONE
STORE
THRU C
A FULL
BND Y/N
1
B FULL
BND Y/N
C FULL
BND Y/N
RETURN
STRT
8.000 GHz
STOP
12.400 GHz
CAL
Figure 2-25: Calibrated Path Display
Remove the power sensor from the bridge. Attach a short to the bridge test port. Press Channel [2] to
make channel 2 the active entry channel. Note on the analyzer screen that the box around the channel
1 summary area now moves around the channel 2 summary area to indicate that it is the active channel.
The channel 2 trace shows the reflected power coming back from the test port. To calibrate out the
frequency variations in the reflected path, press Function [CAL], then press [SHORT/OPEN] followed
by [STORE SHORT B]. After the analyzer calibrates with the short, it will ask you to connect an open
2-72
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
to the bridge test port. Connect an open to the bridge test port and press [STORE OPEN B]. When the
analyzer finishes this calibration, it is ready to make fully corrected, accurate reflection measurements.
CH2: SW B
1.0 dB/
-PC
REF
0.00 dB
STORE
SHORT A
STORE
SHORT B
'B' SHORT/OPEN
PATH CAL DONE
STORE
SHORT C
A FULL
BND Y/N
2
B FULL
BND Y/N
C FULL
BND Y/N
RETURN
CAL
STRT
8.000 GHz
STOP
12.400 GHz
Figure 2-26: Successful SHORT/OPEN CAL Display w/ Open Attached
2.8.3
Making a Device Measurement
Disconnect the OPEN from the bridge test port. Connect the device or component you will be
measuring between the bridge and the power sensor. Make channel 1 the active entry channel by
pressing Channel [1]. Scale the channel 1 (insertion loss) trace by pressing the [SCALE] key and the
[AUTO-SCALE] softkey. Scale the channel 2 (return loss) trace by selecting it as the active entry
channel and pressing [AUTO-SCALE].
Insertion and Return loss can be read directly from the display or by using the cursor. To activate the
cursor, press the Function [CURSOR] key. A cross (+) on each trace shows the current cursor
position. The parameters for the cursor on the active entry channel are read out in the active entry area
of the display. By turning the spin knob, the insertion loss or return loss can be read at any frequency
point on the display.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-73
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
CH1: SW A
10 dB/
-PC
REF
-35.00 dB
CH2: B
10 dB/
-PC
REF
0.00 dB
ZERO
ALL
SENSOR
A ZERO
SCALE FACTOR
10.0 dB/DIV
2
SENSOR
B ZERO
SENSOR
C ZERO
1
RETURN
CAL
STRT
STOP
8.000 GHz
12.000 GHz
Figure 2-27: Device Measurement Plot (Typical Display)
You should now be familiar with the basic operation of the 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer. Refer to
Chapter 3 for remote operating instructions via the GPIB.
CH1 : SW A
10 dB/
CRSR
-PC
REF
-3.00 dB
-25.00 dB
CH2 : B
10 dB/
-PC
REF
-2.06 dB
0.00 dB
CURSOR
FREQ
CURSOR
ON/OFF
-3.00 dB
6.347 GHz
2
CURSOR ∆
ON/OFF
SEARCH
1
CURSOR ->
MRKR N
DEFINE
MRKR N
REF ->
CURSOR
RETURN
CURSOR
STRT
8.000 GHz
CRSR
6.347 GHz
STOP
12.000 GHz
Figure 2-28: Cursor Plot Typical Display
2-74
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.9
Insertion & Return Loss Measurements
This section defines how to configure your signal splitting components to make accurate insertion and
return loss measurements on a device or component. Depending on how you configure your
measurement accessories, you must DEFINE a channel path and choose how you will MEASURE your
device against stored calibration or trace data.
2.9.1
Single-Sensor Insertion Loss Measurement
The simplest insertion loss measurement consists of just measuring the power gain or loss at the output
of your Device Under Test (DUT).
Figure 2-29: Swept Source & Power Sensor Only Block Diagram (w/ DUT)
In this simple measurement, first choose a channel to be the Insertion Loss channel. Then press the
[DEFINE] key to bring up the [DEFINE] softkey menu. Select the [SINGLE SENSOR] softkey and
choose the sensor to be used for that channel (A, B, or C). The displayed trace now indicates true or
absolute power measured by the sensor.
An insertion loss measurement typically compares the ratio of the power out of the DUT to the power
into the DUT. In a single sensor measurement, this is normally done by first measuring the swept power
into the device and storing that result. This is called path calibration or path cal. This stored path cal is
then ratio’ed with the power measured out of the DUT. In the softkey menu, the selection [MEASURE
ABS PWR/PTH CAL] function determines whether the analyzer measures absolute power (ABS PWR)
or ratio’s the reading with the stored path (PTH CAL). The actual path calibration is done via the CAL
front panel key and the THRU softkey, with the sensor bypassing the DUT and connected directly to
the swept source, as shown in Figure 2-29.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-75
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
CH1: SW C
0.1 dB/
-PC
CRSR
CRSR
REF
-0.19 dB
-0.00 dB
CH2: C/A -PC
0.1 dB/
CRSR
REF
-0.14 dB
0.00 dB
CURSOR
FREQ
CURSOR
ON/OFF
-0.14 dB
7.055 GHz
1
CURSOR ∆
ON/OFF
SEARCH
CURSOR ->
MRKR N
DEFINE
MRKR N
2
REF ->
CURSOR
RETURN
CURSOR
STRT
2.000 GHz
CRSR
7.055 GHz
STOP
7.500 GHz
Figure 2-30: More Accurate Insertion Loss Ratioing Meas. (Back-to-Back Adpts.
Improving Source Match)
2.9.1.1
Using Channels
The analyzer can display up to four channels simultaneously.
The display on each channel is completely user determined and independent of the number of sensors
and/or bridges being used. For example, all four channels display power readings from the same single
sensor. This might be particularly useful if the scale factors were different for each of the four channels
so that different characteristics of the same trace (such as filter skirts and pass band ripple) could be
highlighted. Actually, each channel can display a user-defined mathematical relationship, such as the
ratio of the power readings from two sensors minus the stored path calibration. To define this
relationship, you must choose a channel button, press the [DEFINE] key, and choose between single
sensor measurements, or the ratio or difference between any two sensors. By pressing [MEAS], you can
also choose to subtract path cal and/or stored trace data from the measurement.
The channel selection buttons have the secondary function of selecting the Active Entry channel. This
is indicated by an LED that lights next to the selected channel as well as a box drawn around the
channel summary area at the top of the screen. The Active Entry channel is the one that is modified by
any of the analyzer function keys (such as scale factor or cursor keys).
2-76
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.9.2
Two-Sensor Insertion Loss Measurements
The basic two-sensor insertion loss measurement consists of monitoring the power incident upon the
DUT, and comparing it to the power exiting the DUT. Incident power can be monitored in a variety of
ways, but the two most common are to use a Power Splitter or Directional Coupler, shown in
Figures 2-31 and 2-32.
Figure 2-31: Two Sensor Insertion Loss Setup w/ a Power Splitter
Figure 2-32: Two Sensor Insertion Loss using a Directional Coupler
Power splitters have the advantage of wide frequency range, typically from dc to tens of Gigahertz.
However, power splitters typically have an insertion loss of at least 6 dB. Directional couplers with an
insertion loss typically less than 1 dB are used when insertion loss is a concern. However, wide frequency
coverage is often more difficult and expensive than with power splitters.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-77
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
In a two-sensor measurement, the power ratio of the two sensors is displayed as the measurement. After
pressing the [DEFINE] key, the [RATIO] softkey allows you to choose the proper ratio. The
numerator, or first sensor selected, should be the sensor monitoring the power out of the DUT. The
denominator, or second sensor selected, should be the sensor measuring incident power (power into the
DUT). As with single-sensor measurements, the two-sensor measurement compares the measured power
ratio through the DUT with a path calibration power ratio without the DUT. The [ABS PWR/PTH
CAL] softkey determines whether the analyzer just ratio’s the absolute power measured by the sensors
(ABS PWR), or also ratio’s with a stored path calibration (PTH CAL).
The actual path calibration is a little different from single-sensor measurements. You must do two path
calibrations, one for each sensor. The reason is that the analyzer memorizes each sensor’s path cal in
separate memories. This saves time when a sensor is used on more than one channel. For instance,
suppose channel 1 displays the ratio A/B, channel 2 displays sensor A power, and channel 3 displays
sensor B power. A path cal of sensor A and sensor B is then enough data to calibrate all three channels.
To path cal the two sensors, press the [CAL] key to bring up the softkey menu on the screen. Press the
[THRU] softkey. Now press the [STORE THRU X] softkey for the two sensors you are using for this
measurement.
Single-Sensor vs Two-Sensor Measurements
Single-sensor insertion loss measurements have the advantage of being very simple to configure with
little or no extra equipment required. As long as the source output level is repeatable from sweep to
sweep, and path cal is used, the measurement can be very accurate. However, it does require that the
power from the source does not change between path cal and measurement — something which may be
a problem if the source power changes with load match, or if the measurement requires swept power
levels (such as amplifier 1 dB compression measurements).
A two-sensor ratio can improve the accuracy of an insertion loss measurement by reducing the error due
to source mismatch. In any practical measurement, some power from the source is reflected back to the
source by the device under test. Any mismatch at the source causes some of this signal to be reflected
back to the device under test. The reflected signal looks like a variation in the incident power, which
would lead to errors in a single-sensor measurement. With two sensors, the incident sensor monitors the
same variations (due to reflected signals) from the source, that the output sensor measures. The ratio of
output to incident power therefore cancels the effect of source reflections. In practice, this cancellation
is not perfect but leads to a much improved effective source match.
Two-channel insertion loss measurements are also useful for measurements requiring sweeper power
changes such as amplifier or mixer 1 dB compression point. In a typical gain compression measurement,
the sweeper power level is ramped from the small signal region of the DUT to its saturation level. With
two-sensor measurements, both the incident and output sensor monitor the changing sweeper levels.
The ratio of output to incident power is then always the true gain of the amplifier. At some point, the
amplifier or mixer goes into compression and the gain rapidly decreases. The output level where the gain
decreases by exactly 1 dB is the 1 dB compression point of the amplifier (a second analyzer channel can
display just the power from the sensor connected to the amplifier output; the 1 dB compression power).
2-78
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.9.3
Single-Sensor Return Loss Measurements
There are two types of single-sensor return loss measurements; one using a return loss bridge, and one
using a directional coupler. Both types use exactly the same operating procedure. Return loss bridges are
more common because of their broad frequency range and very good directivity. Figures 2-33 and 2-34
show typical examples of test setups using bridges and couplers.
In a return loss measurement, the bridge or coupler is connected between the sweeper and DUT. A
power sensor either built into the bridge or attached to the coupler then monitors power reflected back
from the DUT. The ratio of the power incident on the device to the power reflected from the device is
the return loss.
Figure 2-33: Return Loss Setup Using a Bridge
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-79
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Figure 2-34: Return Loss Test Setup Using a Directional Coupler
In a single-sensor return loss measurement, the incident power is measured during path calibration and
stored by the analyzer. It is then subtracted from the measured reflected power (subtracting dB’s is
equivalent to ratio’ing Watts). To set up the analyzer to make a single sensor return loss measurement,
first choose a channel to be your return loss channel. Then press the [DEFINE] key to bring up the
DEFINE softkey menu on the screen. Press the [SINGLE SENSOR] softkey and choose the sensor that
will be measuring the reflected power. Since path calibrations will be used, press [MEAS] and toggle
the [ABS PWR/PTH CAL] softkey until [PTH CAL] is active (light blue color).
To path cal the channel, first connect a short to the bridge or coupler test port. This will cause all of the
sweeper power to be reflected back to be measured by the reflected sensor - accounting for bridge or
coupler path losses. Press [CAL] and the [SHORT/OPEN] softkey. Then press the [STORE SHORT X]
softkey that corresponds to the sensor measuring the reflected power. Once the Short cal is done,
connect an OPEN to the bridge or coupler test port. Press the [STORE OPEN X] softkey to complete
the calibration.
☛
NOTE: The most accurate return loss calibration is the short/open calibration. It is possible
to calibrate the bridge or coupler with only a short or only an open - although with degraded
accuracy.
Like insertion loss measurements, the single-channel return loss measurement is accurate as long as a
path cal is made and the sweeper power does not change. However, a two-sensor return loss
measurement can give better accuracy by improving the effective source match of the sweeper. See the
two sensor insertion loss in Section 2.9.2 for a more detailed explanation.
2-80
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.9.4
Two-Sensor Return Loss Measurements
In a two-sensor return loss measurement, a power splitter or directional coupler is inserted between the
return loss bridge or reflection directional coupler to monitor incident power.
Figure 2-35: Two Sensor Return Loss Setup Block Diagram
The ratio of the reflected to incident power with the path cal subtracted then properly indicates return
loss. Because the two sensor configuration measures return loss directly as a ratio, it is insensitive to
sweeper power changes. As with 2 channel insertion loss measurements, press [DEFINE] followed by
the [RATIO] softkey, followed by the sensor measuring reflected power, followed by the sensor
measuring incident power. Path calibration must be done twice, once for each sensor used.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-81
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.9.5
Three-Sensor Configurations
Three-sensors typically measure both power through the device and power reflected from the device,
ratio’ed with the monitored incident power level.
Typically, two channels display insertion loss and return loss simultaneously. See the discussions for two
channel insertion loss and two channel return loss measurements to define the channels and path cal
the sensors.
Figure 2-36: Three Sensor Configuration Block Diagram
2.9.6
Trace Memory
Trace memory is a powerful tool to normalize the displayed trace with either a golden standard or a
particular reference device. In almost every case, a standard path cal could perform the same function.
But trace memory can serve an additionally useful function.
Suppose you want to compare several components to a ‘golden standard’ component. After performing a
path cal, you would measure the golden standard to find its characteristics (see Figure 2-37 for an
example of golden standard measurement results).
Ideally, you would then like a way of memorizing this trace and subtracting it from subsequent traces on
your other DUTs so that you could see how much variation the other DUTs had from the standard.
That is exactly what trace memory allows you to do. To memorize the golden standard trace, press
[DEFINE] then press the [MEAS] softkey. The analyzer stores up to 10 traces; you must first tell it
which of the 10 memory registers you want the trace stored in. You do this by pressing the [TRACETRACE N] softkey followed by a number from 0 to 9, followed by the [GHz/dB] units key. To actually
perform the subtraction of a DUT-Golden standard, press [MEAS-TRACE N] followed by the number
of the trace to be subtracted (0 to 9), followed by the [GHz/dB] units key. The trace should now
indicate differences between the DUT and the golden standard. To return to normal trace display, press
the [MEAS] softkey.
2-82
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
CH2:SW -PC CRSR
0.1 dB/ -T1 REF
0.11 dB
0.00 dB
LMT LNS
ON/OFF
DEFINE
SEGMENT
SEG
1
2
STRT-FREQ
4.000 GHz
8.000 GHz
UPPER
0.20
0.25
LOWER
-0.20
-0.25
STOP-FREQ
8.000 GHz
10.000 GHz
UPPER
LOWER
SEGMENT
N CLEAR
CLR ALL
SEGMENTS
2
PLOT
ENTRIES
ABORT
PLOT
RETURN
STRT
4.000 GHz
CRSR
4.000 GHz
STOP
10.000 GHz
DISP
Figure 2-37: “Golden Standard” Precision 20 dB Attenuator Measurement Using 20 dB
Attenuator Reference
The advantage of using trace memory over doing a path cal through the golden standard is that trace
memory preserves the original path calibration. If you want to measure a different golden standard, or if
you wanted to save several reference traces, you could make all the measurements using the same correct
original path calibration.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-83
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.10
Scaling the Display
One very common operation in a scalar analyzer is scaling the vertical axis. Scaling allows you to
optimally position a channel trace on the screen, whether it is to see the device’s gross characteristics
(such as filter skirts or amplifier out-of-band rolloff), or the fine characteristics (such as ripple in a filter
or amplifier’s pass band), or to zoom in at a certain level to see how close a device makes or misses its
specification limits.
CH1: SW A -PC CRSR -0.48 dB
1.0 dB/
REF -0.00 dB
CRSR
CH2: C/A-PC CRSR
0.1 dB/
REF
-0.14 dB
0.00 dB
CURSOR
FREQ
CURSOR
ON/OFF
-0.48 dB
6.024 GHz
1
CURSOR ∆
ON/OFF
SEARCH
CURSOR ->
MRKR N
DEFINE
MRKR N
REF ->
CURSOR
RETURN
STRT
CURSOR
2.000 GHz
CRSR
6.284 GHz
STOP
10.000 GHz
Figure 2-38: Device Gross Characteristics (Filter Skirt) Display
CH1 : SW A
0.1 Db /
-PC
REF
SCALE
FACTOR
-8.48 dB
0.00 dB
AUTOSCALE
SCALE FACTOR
0.1 dB/DIV
COUNT
AUTOSCL
1
REF
POSN
REF
LEVEL
STRT
2.000 GHz
CRSR
6.204 GHz
STOP
10.000 GHz
SCALE
Figure 2-39: Device Fine Characteristics (Filter Pass Band) Display
2-84
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
All of the scaling functions of the analyzer can be found under the [SCALE] key. Each channel can be
scaled independently, so the proper channel button must be pressed to make it the active entry channel
before scaling. To scale a channel, press [SCALE] to bring up the scaling softkey menu on the display.
The displayed trace vertical characteristics are dependent on three settings - the SCALE factor, the
REFerence POSition, and the REFerence LEVEL.
Ref Level Readout Area
CH1 : SW A
0.1 Db /
-PC
REF
SCALE
FACTOR
-8.48 dB
0.00 dB
AUTOSCALE
SCALE FACTOR
0.1 dB/DIV
Scale Factor
Readout Area
COUNT
AUTOSCL
CH1: PASS
Ref Position
Readout Area
1
REF
POSN
REF
LEVEL
STRT
2.000 GHz
CRSR
6.204 GHz
STOP
10.000 GHz
SCALE
Figure 2-40: SCALE Display & Softkey Menu Typical Display
The easiest way to scale a trace is with the [AUTO SCALE] softkey. When you press this key, the
analyzer will automatically scale the trace so that it fills the screen and is centered vertically. When
autoscaling, the analyzer only changes the SCALE factor and REF LEVEL. Their new values can be read
from the status section for the active channel.
Sometimes you will want to manually change the vertical characteristics of the display. To do this, you
will use the [SCALE FACTOR], [REF LEVEL] and [REF POS] softkeys.
The [SCALE FACTOR] softkey allows you to change the scale factor per division (in dB/division) with
either the spin knob or the number pad. The scale factor setting is displayed in the lower left area of the
status section for each channel.
The [REF LEVEL] softkey allows you to specify the level for the reference line. The reference line is the
level on the screen which remains fixed during scaling. In other words, all points on the trace are scaled
from that fixed level. The REF LEVEL value can be changed by either the spin knob or a number pad
entry. This value is displayed in the lower right area of the status section for each channel.
The [REF POS] softkey allows you to change the graticule position on the screen of the reference line.
The REF POS can only be changed by the spin knob, not by the number pad. The graticule position of
the reference line is indicated by a small number on the left hand side of the grid corresponding to the
channel number.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-85
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.10.1
Hints on Simplified Scaling
The proper choice of REF POSition for the reference line can greatly simplify scaling. For device
characteristics that only vary in one direction (for example, the gross characteristics of a filter, or almost
any return loss trace), a convenient choice of the REF POS might be the top graticule line. Then,
choose the REF LEVEL to be the maximum level of the trace. Now, when the trace is scaled, the zero
return loss point or filter pass band will always remain on the screen, and the trace can always be
conveniently scaled to fill the screen.
When measuring a device’s characteristics that vary around a fixed level (pass band ripple, attenuation
or gain vs. frequency, etc.), it may be best to choose the middle graticule line for the reference line’s REF
POSition. Then choose the REF LEVEL to be the average level of the device characteristic. This allows
as much of the trace as possible to remain on the screen while scaling.
2.10.2
Using the Cursor to Set the Reference Level
Sometimes it is very convenient to indicate the desired reference level with the cursor. For example, you
may want to examine the fine detail around a local maximum point you have previously identified with
the cursor.
Make sure you have activated the cursor by pressing the [CURSOR] key. Now press [SCALE] to get
back to the SCALE softkey menu. Use the spin knob to set the cursor at the desired level. Press the
[REF LEVEL] softkey to bring up the REF LEVEL softkey menu. Now, press the [REF-CURSOR]
softkey. The REFerence LEVEL will automatically be set to the cursor level.
CH1:SW B
10 dB/
CRSR
-PC
CRSR
REF
-26.51 dB
-26.51 dB
CURSOR
FREQ
-26.51 dB
6.172 GHz
CURSOR
ON/OFF
CURSOR ∆
ON/OFF
+
1
SEARCH
CURSOR ->
MRKR N
DEFINE
MRKR N
REF ->
CURSOR
STRT
Figure 2-41: REF
2-86
2.000 GHz
CRSR
6.172 GHz
STOP
18.000 GHz
CURSOR
→ CURSOR Function puts Local Maximum Reference Point at the
Reference Point for Easy Scale Factor Expansion
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.11
Cursors & Markers
Cursors and markers provide a very convenient way to read numeric values right off the trace. The 8003
Precision Scalar Analyzer can display up to one cursor, one delta-cursor, and ten markers simultaneously
on all four channels).
CH1:SW A -PC
1.0 dB/ H
ACSR
REF
-3.00 dB
-0.17 dB
SEARCH
VALUE
SEARCH
LEFT
SRCHD
-3.00 dB
6.672 GHz
VALUE 'FOUND' TRACE HOLD
SEARCH
RIGHT
2 ∆
BANDWIDTH
MAX
1
∆
MIN
RETURN
STRT
2.000 GHz
∆ CRSR
6.672 GHz
CURSOR
STOP
10.000 GHz
Figure 2-42: Typical Measurement (Cursors, Delta Cursors & Markers)
2.11.1
Search Functions Using the Cursor
The cursor indicates power and frequency at any point on the trace. It is activated when the
[CURSOR] key is pressed, and can be controlled by the spin knob or by entry of a frequency on the
numeric keypad.
The cursor search functions automate commonly used cursor operations such as min/max searches and
-3 dB and bandwidth searches.
2.11.2
Min & Max Search
To search for the maximum point on a trace, press [CURSOR] followed by the [SEARCH] softkey.
Press [MAX] to find the maximum point on a trace. The power/insertion loss/return loss at the
maximum point is read next to the label CRSR in the active channel’s summary area. The frequency at
the maximum point is read at the bottom center of the screen.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-87
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
CH2: SW B
10 dB/
CRSR
-PC CRSR
REF
-14.61 dBm
0.00 dBm
CURSOR
FREQ
CURSOR
ON/OFF
-14.61 dBm
-4.768 GHz
CURSOR ∆
ON/OFF
2
SEARCH
CURSOR ->
MRKR N
+
DEFINE
MRKR N
REF ->
CURSOR
CURSOR
STRT
2.000 GHz
DCSR
4.768 GHz
STOP
8.400 GHz
Figure 2-43: MAX Search Finds Minimum Return Loss of a Filter (Passband)
Alternately, you can press the [CURSOR] key again to reactivate the power/frequency readout in the
active entry area. Pressing the [MIN] softkey finds the minimum point on a trace. MAX and MIN
searches are often used as checks of a device against specification limits.
CH1: SW A
0.2 dB/
CRSR
-PC
CRSR
REF
CURSOR
FREQ
-20.02 dB
-20.00 dB
CURSOR
ON/OFF
-20.02 dB
7.730 GHz
CURSOR ∆
ON/OFF
SEARCH
CURSOR ->
MRKR N
1
DEFINE
MRKR N
REF ->
CURSOR
RETURN
CURSOR
STRT
2.000 GHz
CRSR
7.730 GHz
STOP
18.000 GHz
Figure 2-44: MIN Search Finds Max. Insertion Loss Point (20 dB Fixed Attenuator)
2-88
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.11.3
Searches on Frequency Selective Devices
One of the most common searches on frequency selective devices is the -3 dB point. This is easily
done on the 8003 Analyzer by pressing [CURSOR] followed by the [SEARCH] softkey.
Note the Cursor position in relation to the target -3 dB point on the trace. Press [SEARCH LEFT] to
search to the left of the cursor for the -3 dB point. Press [SEARCH RIGHT] to search to the right of the
cursor for the -3 dB point. If the search is successful, the frequency and relative power level are shown in
the active entry area.The active entry area on the screen shows that the default search value is -3 dB.
SEARCH
VALUE
CH1: SW A -PC CRSR -3.00 dB
2.0 dB/ H
REF -0.00 dB
SRCH
SEARCH
LEFT
-3.00 dB
3.175 GHz
VALUE FOUND: TRACE HOLD
SEARCH
RIGHT
1
BANDWIDTH
MAX
MIN
RETURN
STRT
2.500 GHz
CURSOR
CRSR
3.175 GHz
STOP
4.000 GHz
Figure 2-45: -3 dB Point (Low Pass Filter) at 3.175 GHz
You can change this to any negative or positive value by entering the desired value on the numeric
keypad and pressing [GHz/dB]. For example, Figure 2-46 shows the -30 dB point on a high pass filter
(sometimes used to determine filter cutoff).
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-89
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
SEARCH
VALUE
CH1: SW A -PC CRSR -30.00 dB
10.0 dB/ H
REF -0.00 dB
SRCH
SEARCH
LEFT
-30.00 dB
6.417 GHz
VALUE FOUND: TRACE HOLD
SEARCH
RIGHT
1
BANDWIDTH
MAX
+
MIN
RETURN
STRT
5.000 GHz
CURSOR
CRSR
6.417 GHz
STOP
8.000 GHz
Figure 2-46: -30 dB Point (High Pass Filter)
The SEARCH LEFT and SEARCH RIGHT functions scan in the appropriate direction from the
current position of the cursor to look for the level that is equal to the search value (relative to the
0 dB/dBm value). This is because many users prefer to specify devices from the 0 dB insertion level.
Sometimes, this scheme may lead to unexpected results. For example, if the device under test is a filter
with a minimum of 6 dB of insertion loss in the pass band, the search functions will never find the
-3 dB point. To correct this situation, first find the Maximum point in the pass band using the
[SEARCH] and [MAX] softkeys. Press [CURSOR] to return to the top level softkey menu and press
the [DCURSOR ON/OFF] softkey. The new reference level will now be the maximum point on the
trace and the search function will operate as expected.
2-90
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.11.4
Bandwidth Searches
The 8003 Analyzer can also find the bandwidth of frequency selective devices. Press [CURSOR]
followed by the [SEARCH] softkey. Then press the [BANDWIDTH] softkey. The analyzer will
automatically find the maximum point in the pass band of the device, then find the -3 dB points on the
right and left of the maximum, and calculate the bandwidth.
Once the [BANDWIDTH] softkey is pressed, the search level can be changed by simply entering a new
value on the numeric entry keypad and pressing [GHz/dB].
CH1: SW A -PC ∆CSR -0.00 dB
5.0 dB/ H
REF -0.00 dB
SRCH
SEARCH
VALUE
SEARCH
LEFT
-3.00 dB
7.193 GHz
VALUE FOUND: TRACE HOLD
SEARCH
RIGHT
1
∆
BANDWIDTH
+
MAX
MIN
RETURN
STRT
1.711 GHz
∆CSR
CURSOR
7.193 GHz
STOP
20.000 GHz
Figure 2-47: Automatic Bandwidth Movement (Very Narrow Bandpass Filter)
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-91
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.11.5
Cursor Delta (∆) Functions
The 8003 Analyzer can make relative level and frequency measurements using the Cursor Delta
function. To make a relative measurement, first place the Cursor at the desired reference point. Then
press the [CURSOR ∆ ON/OFF] softkey to toggle the Cursor Delta function on (ON should be in light
blue). A small triangle (∆) appears right on top of the Cursor ‘+’ symbol. This is the cursor delta marker.
The active entry area shows 0 dB relative level and 0 kHz relative frequency. This information is
repeated in the channel summary area for the active channel, and in the cursor frequency area at the
bottom of the screen.
Now use the spin knob to move the cursor away from the cursor delta marker and notice that the
relative level and frequency are indicated in the active entry area. You can also use the numeric entry
keypad to enter an exact frequency offset from the cursor delta marker. In Figure 2-48, the cursor delta
function finds the next worst return loss point for this device.
CH2:SW B
10 dB/
CRSR∆
-0.91 dB
1.113 GHz
-PC
∆CSR
REF
-0.91 dB
-0.00 dB
CH2 - FILTER RETURN LOSS
CURSOR
FREQ
CURSOR
ON/OFF
CURSOR ∆
ON/OFF
2
SEARCH
∆
+
CURSOR ->
MRKR N
DEFINE
MRKR N
REF ->
CURSOR
STRT
-2.000 GHz
∆ CSR
-1.113 GHz
CURSOR
STOP
8.400 GHz
Figure 2-48: Cursor Delta Indicates Relative Level & Frequency (Next Worse Return Loss
Point)
2-92
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.11.6
Cursors on Multiple Channels
Whenever cursors are used on multiple channels, they will always be tied to the same frequency but will
show the appropriate amplitude on each channel. This is particularly useful when the cursor finds a
feature of interest on one channel. Then, the corresponding amplitude can be read from another
channel.
An example of this is a 1 dB compression measurement on an amplifier (see Figure 2-49). Suppose
channel 1 is set to measure gain vs. input power, and channel 2 is set to monitor the output power of the
amplifier. The cursor SEARCH functions find the point where gain decreases by exactly 1 dB on
channel 1. The corresponding output level on channel 2 is the 1 dB compression level of the amplifier.
CH1 : SW B/A-PC CRSR
0.5 dB/
REF
CRSR
9.30 dB
10.31 dB
16.06 dBm
10.001 GHz
CH2 : SW B
5.0 dB/
CRSR
REF
16.06 dBm
8.91 dBm
CH1 - AMPLIFIER GAIN
CH2 - AMPLIFIER OUTPUT POWER
CURSOR
FREQ
CURSOR
ON/OFF
CURSOR ∆
ON/OFF
1
SEARCH
2
CURSOR ->
MRKR N
DEFINE
MRKR N
REF ->
CURSOR
CURSOR
Figure 2-49: Cursors (Each Channel) Tied to Same Frequency Help Finding the 1 dB
Compression Point on an Amplifier
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-93
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.11.7
Markers
Markers are useful to keep track of key points on a trace. The 8003 analyzer supports up to 10 internally
generated markers. Markers are indicated by small circles on the trace.
Markers, like cursors, have many uses. One common use is to mark specific points of importance when
tuning devices. For instance, filters must be tuned to an exact cutoff frequency. A marker indicates this
cutoff frequency. The user then tunes for the proper amplitude at the marked frequency.
To place a marker on the trace, first move the Cursor to the desired marker location. Then press
[CURSOR] and the [DEFINE MRKR N] softkey. Enter a number from 0 to 9 on the numeric entry
keypad and press the [GHz/dB] units key. A small marker circle will appear at the cursor location
(Figure 2-50). The cursor can then be moved to set up another marker. Markers can be individually
turned on and off using the [MRKR N ON] and [MRKR N OFF] softkeys.
CH1 : SW A
0.5 dB/
-PC
REF
CURSOR
FREQ
0.00 dB
CURSOR
ON/OFF
MARKER AT 8.4 GHZ
1
CURSOR ∆
ON/OFF
CH1: FAIL
SEARCH
CURSOR ->
MRKR N
DEFINE
MRKER N
REF ->
CURSOR
STRT
2.000 GHz
STOP
12.000 GHz
CURSOR
Figure 2-50: Filter Passband (Tuned Until Amplitude is -0.5 dB at the Marker)
The analyzer does not support sweeper-generated z-axis (or intensity) markers. It does, however, support
sweeper-generated amplitude blips since these are amplitude spikes that actually appear on the output
signal. Sweeper generated markers are often crystal-generated to improve the frequency accuracy of the
trace. The frequency accuracy of the internally generated markers on the 8003 analyzer is generally
limited by the accuracy of the sweeper’s sweep ramp.
2-94
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
2.12
Power Measurements
One of the unique capabilities of the 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer is to accurately measure microwave
power. The analyzer is designed to always make as accurate power measurements as possible, but
squeezing the last bit of performance from the analyzer requires attention to a few simple guidelines
discussed later in section 2.14.
Accurate 8003 Analyzer power measurements always begin with the sensor calibration. Sensors should
be calibrated at least once daily, preferably after a 5-minute warmup period. See Section 2.8.1 for
calibration procedures.
CONT/
PAUSE
PERFORMING POWER SWEEP
-1V
SENSOR
A
Autoxero
:
Pass
ATTN
ATTN
ATTN
ATTN
:
:
:
:
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
+20
+10
0
-10
-20
-100 mV
-10 mV
1
2
3
4
~ +11 dBm: Pass
~ +1 dBm: Pass
~ -9 dBm: Pass
~ -19 dBm: Pass
~ -30 dBm: Pass
Balanced sensor limits
CALIBRATOR
-25
-20
ATTN 1 10dB
-15
-10
ATTN 2
-5
20dB
OUTPUT
0
POWER
dBm
10
15
5
ATTN 3
30dB
ATTN 4
40dB
ABORT
CAL
Figure 2-51: Sensor Calibration Screen
The 8003 Analyzer is capable of making fully corrected power measurements during a sweep. It does this
by applying Cal Factors to each measurement point in the sweep. The sensor’s Cal Factor is a correction
for its frequency response. Cal Factors are precisely measured (typically at every 1 GHz) by the
manufacturer or your Cal Lab, and are traceable to the National Institute of Standards Technology
(NIST). All 803XXA series sensors used with the 8003 Analyzer have a table of Cal Factors stored in an
EEPROM in the sensor. You can examine each sensor’s Cal Factor table by pressing [CONFIG]
followed by the [SERVICE] softkey. Then press [SENSOR EEPROM] followed by [SENSR X EEPROM],
where X is the sensor letter (A, B, or C). You will see a table similar to the one in Figure 2-52, giving
identification information for the sensor.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-95
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
PAGE 1
SENSOR C IDENTIFICATION
SENSOR TYPE: TYPE N BALANCED
SENSOR SERIAL NUMBER......................01811240
LOWER FREQUENCY LIMIT (GHz)...............
0.010
UPPER FREQUENCY LIMIT (GHz)............... 18.000
VIDEO RESISTANCE RO+ (K-Ohms).............
2.660
VIDEO RESISTANCE RO- (K-Ohms).............
2.710
FREQUENCY RESPONSE START FREQ (GHz).......
2.000
FREQUENCY RESPONSE STEP FREQ (GHz)........
1.000
NUMBER OF ITEMS IN FREQ RESPONSE TABLE....
17
NUMBER OF SPECIAL FREQUENCY RESPONSE......
1
RETURN LOSS START FREQUENCY (GHz).........
0.000
RETURN LOSS STEP FREQUENCY (GHz)..........
0.000
NUMBER OF ITEMS IN RETURN LOSS TABLE......
0
NUMBER OF SPECIAL RETURN LOSS.............
0
CAL LOCATION: GIGA-TRONICS FACTORY
CAL DATE: MONDAY 25 JUN 2001 16:30:06
DATA INPUT: _
PAGE
UP
SET
TIME
CAL
LOC
LAST
PAGE
PROGRAM
EEPROM
ENABLE
INPUT
ABORT
CONFIG
Figure 2-52: Sensor ID Table
Press [PAGE UP] to see the sensor Cal Factor table. You may need to press [PAGE UP] again or [PAGE
DOWN] to see all of the table.
PAGE 2
FREQ RESPONSE TABLE (17 POINTS)
DATA POINT
FREQUENCY (GHz)
CAL FACTOR (dB)
1
2.000
-0.11
2
3.000
-0.11
3
4.000
-0.13
4
5.000
-0.12
5
6.000
-0.16
6
7.000
-0.16
7
8.000
-0.14
8
9.000
-0.19
9
10.000
-0.23
10
11.000
-0.19
11
12.000
-0.25
12
13.000
-0.38
13
14.000
-0.43
14
15.000
-0.49
15
16.000
-0.55
DATA INPUT: _
PAGE
UP
PAGE
DOWN
FIRST
PAGE
LAST
PAGE
ENABLE
INPUT
CONFIG
Figure 2-53: Sensor CAL Factor Table
To exit back to the measurement mode, first press [FIRST PAGE] followed by [ABORT] and
[ABORT PROGRAM]. Then press [RETURN] twice. You will now be back in the measurement mode.
2-96
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
The [ABSPWR/PATHCAL] softkey controls whether the analyzer makes a complete ABSolute PoWeR
measurement (including Cal Factor correction), or ratio’s the measurement with a previously stored
PATH CALibration. If it ratio’s with a PATH CALibration, the analyzer will not apply Cal Factor
corrections since the measurement is already a ratio. This characteristic allows you to see the Cal Factor
correction applied to a sweep. Figure 2-54 shows two traces made with the same sensor. The channel 1
trace shows an ABSolute PoWeR measurement with Cal Factor correction. The channel 2 trace shows
exactly the same measurement without Cal Factor correction. As you can see, with Cal Factor
corrections, the analyzer correctly shows the true flatness of the sweeper.
CH1: SW C
0.1 dB/
REF -10.03 dBm
SCALE FACTOR
0.1 dB/DIV
CH2: SW C -PC
0.1 dB/
REF
10.03 dB
CH1 - WITH CAL FACTORS
CH2 - WITHOUT CAL FACTORS
SCALE
FACTOR
AUTOSCALE
CONT
AUTOSCL
CH 1
21
CH 2
REF
POSN
REF
LEVEL
SCALE
STRT
2.000 GHz
STOP
18.000 GHz
Figure 2-54: 8003 Swept Power Measurements with CAL Factor Correction
To set up the analyzer to make Absolute Power measurements on a channel, press [MEAS]. Toggle the
[ABSPWR/PATHCAL] softkey until [ABSPWR/] is in light blue and [PATHCAL] is in dim, dark blue.
All measurements will now be fully corrected with Cal Factor corrections, and will be displayed in units
of dBm.
To set up the analyzer to ratio with a path calibration, press [MEAS] and toggle the [ABSPWR/
PATHCAL] softkey until [PATHCAL] is in light blue. Now the analyzer will ratio with the stored path
calibration data, but will not use Cal Factor corrections. All measurements will be relative to the stored
path calibration data and displayed in dB.
☛
NOTE: In either of the above cases, the cursor reads absolute power levels or power ratios
at the selected frequency.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-97
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.12.1
CW Power Measurements
The analyzer also supports a CW measurement mode that very closely resembles using a 4-channel CW
power meter. All four channels can be toggled between swept and CW measurement modes using the
[ALL SWEPT] and [ALL CW] softkeys under the [MEAS] key. To change modes, press [MEAS]
followed by the [ALL CW] softkey. You should see a screen similar to Figure 2-55.
START
CW FREQUENCY
8.400 GHz
CENTER
CW
SEN A
SEN B
SEN C
RAT C/A
-11.27 dBm
-33.00 dBm
- 2.69 dBm
8.58 dBr
OFFS
0.00 dB
FREQ
8.40 GHz
OFFS
0.00 dB
FREQ
8.40 GHz
OFFS
0.00 dB
FREQ
8.40 GHz
∆OFS
0.00 dB
FQ C
8.40 GHz
START
Figure 2-55: CW Readings (All 3 Sensor Inputs Plus Ratio)
When the [ALL CW] softkey is pressed, all channels that are ON are put into CW reading mode. The
source is also put into CW mode using the CW frequency assigned using the source control key. If this is
the first time you are using CW mode, change the CW frequency of the source to your desired frequency
by first pressing [START] followed by the [CW] softkey. Enter the frequency on the numeric entry
keypad and press the [GHz/dB] units key.
The CW measurement mode is more than a large readout display. The most significant difference is that
the sensor input signal is actually filtered with a much narrower bandwidth to remove noise. In swept
mode, the sensor input signals use a wide bandwidth for responsiveness to swept inputs.
2.12.2
Mixed Mode Measurements
The 8003 Analyzer uses a mixture of Swept and CW measurement modes. For example, you may want
to sweep a mixer’s RF port and measure its RF and IF responses in swept mode. But you might also want
to monitor the fixed LO power in CW mode. As a special case, each channel can be individually
configured to swept or CW measurement modes. To do this, press [DEFINE] to define a channel as
swept or CW. Toggle the [CW/SWEPT] softkey until the channel is in the desired mode. The 8003 also
has GRAPH or READOUT modes. The GRAPH mode is the familiar swept screen with traces. The
READOUT mode is the one used for the ALL CW display. To change display modes, press
[DISPLAY] and toggle the [GRAPH/READOUT] softkey until the analyzer is in the desired display
mode.
2-98
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
The [CW/SWEPT] softkey in the DEFINE menu, and the [GRAPH/READOUT] softkey in the
DISPLAY menu give you complete flexibility in configuring the analyzer measurement modes and
display. The [ALL SWEPT] and [ALL CW] softkeys in the MEAS menu combine the functions to make
switching between modes much faster and simpler.
☛
2.12.3
NOTE: A Power Sweep Measurement capability is also available with the 8003 instrument.
This feature is described in the Power Sweep Measurements Section 2.10.
Cal Factor Corrections in the CW Mode
When a channel is set to CW mode, the readings are corrected for Cal Factor. The 8003 Analyzer
assumes that the signals measured are all at the same frequency that the source is set to.
Sometimes the sensors measure at a frequency different than that of the source. This may happen if
there is frequency translation (mixers or up/downconverters) or frequency multiplication/division. In
this case, you can manually enter the correct frequency by pressing [CONFIG] followed by the
[SENSORS CW FREQ] softkey. You will see that the [FROM SOURCE] softkey is in light blue indicating that the analyzer is currently using the CW frequency it commanded the source to go to.
Press the [CW FREQ—] softkey and the appropriate [X CW FREQ] softkey where X is the sensor letter.
Then enter your desired operating frequency on the numeric entry keypad followed by the [GHz/dB]
units key (see Figure 2-56).
CLR ALL
OFFSETS
SEN C OFFSET
20.00 dB
CH1 - SPECIAL CW FREQ
CH2 - DEFAULT SOURCE FREQ
CH3 - SPECIAL CAL FACTOR
AND OFFSET
SENSOR
A OFFST
SEN A
SEN B
SEN C
RAT C/A
-11.39 dBm
-33.37 dBm
18.39 dBm
29.79 dBr
OFFS
0.00 dB
FREQ
18.00 GHz
OFFS
0.00 dB
FREQ
8.40 GHz
OFFS
20.00 dB
CALF
-1.20 dB
∆OFS
20.00 dB
CF C
-1.20 dB
SENSOR
B OFFST
SENSOR
C OFFST
RETURN
CONFIG
Figure 2-56: 3 Different Methods (CAL Factor Correction Plus Sensor Offsets)
Another way to make a Cal Factor correction is by direct entry of Cal Factor. This may be necessary if
the sensor is user calibrated (perhaps with an adapter), and the user Cal Factors are not entered in the
sensor EEPROM table. To make a direct Cal Factor correction, press the [CONFIG] key followed by
the [SENSORS CW FREQ] softkey. Press the [CW CAL FACTOR] softkey, then the appropriate [X
CAL FACTOR] softkey where X is the sensor letter.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-99
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
To turn off Cal Factor correction completely, press [CONFIG] followed by the [SENSORS CW FREQ]
softkey. Then press the [CORRCTN OFF] softkey. You will be given the choice to turn off selected
sensor corrections, or all sensor corrections.
2.12.4
Sensor Offsets
In the CW mode, OFFSETS perform an analogous function to trace memory in swept mode. The offset
is a fixed dB value that is added or subtracted from the reading (much in the same way that a memorized
trace is subtracted from the measured trace). Offsets are useful for compensating for attenuators or
amplifiers between the DUT and the power sensor.
To enter an offset, press [CONFIG] followed by the [SENSORS OFFSET] softkey. Press the
appropriate [SENSOR X OFFSET] softkey where X is the sensor letter. Enter the offset value on the
numeric entry keypad and press the GHz/dB units key. Use a positive offset value for attenuation
between the DUT and sensor, and a negative offset value for gain.
2.12.5
Other CW Functions
When using the 8003 as a CW meter, some functions commonly found on CW meters come in handy.
These are RELative measurements, MAX hold and MIN hold, and Averaging.
Averaging reduces the amount of noise on the signal. Most often, averaging is used when measuring
very low level signals (below -40 dBm) to reduce the noise fluctuations of the reading. The number of
averages chosen determines the amount of filtering. To add averaging to a CW Power measurement,
first press the [DISPLAY] key, then select the AVG softkey. Either use the spin knob, or type in a
desired averaging number from 1 to 256. (If you enter a number on the numeric entry keypad, remember
to press the [GHz/dB] units key). Turn averaging on by pressing the [AVG ON/OFF] softkey.
AVG N
AVERAGE FACTOR
16
CH1 - WITH AVERAGING
AVG
ON/OFF
SEN A
-67.63 dBm
OFFS
0.00 dB
FREQ
5.00 G Hz
SMOOTHING
RETURN
CONFIG
Figure 2-57: Averaging Used to Reduce Noise
MAX and MIN hold the maximum or minimum values recorded. This is often useful when adjusting a
device or sweeping its response. To activate MAX or MIN hold, press [MEAS] and select the [CW
OPTION] softkey. Then toggle either the [MAXHOLDON/OFF] or [MINHOLDON/OFF] softkey to
activate the function. MAX or MIN hold will be in effect as long as the function is ON. If the [CW
OPTION] softkey is in dim, dark blue, the channel on which you are trying to set MAX or MIN hold is
2-100
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
in the SWEPT mode. You must change it to the CW mode using the [DEFINE] key as described
Section since MAX and MIN hold work only in the CW mode.
The RELative mode for CW measurements is similar to path cal for Swept measurements. Use the
RELative mode to make CW measurements relative to a fixed reference level. To use the RELative
function, first set your desired reference level using the CW Power reading as a guide. Then, to activate
the RELative mode, press [MEAS] and select the [CW OPTION] softkey. Press the [RELON/OFF]
softkey to read power relative to the reference level.
REL
ON/OFF
CH1 - ABSOLUTE READING
CH2 - RELATIVE READING
MAXHOLD
ON/OFF
MINHOLD
ON/OFF
SEN A
SEN A
REL
-26.77 dBm
0.00 dBr
OFFS
0.00 dB
FREQ
5.00 GHz
OFFS
0.00 dB
FREQ
5.00 G Hz
RETURN
MEAS
Figure 2-58: Reference Level & Corresponding Relative Reading
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-101
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.13
Accurate Range Measurements
Two of the key features of the 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer are its broad 90 dB dynamic range and its
exceptional -70 dBm sensitivity. Dynamic range and sensitivity are often key issues in component
measurements. They determine the maximum insertion loss measurable for switches, attenuators, and
filters. They determine how well input return loss can be measured on a high gain amplifier with low
input levels. They also help when sweeper power is reduced through the use of splitters, switches,
matching attenuators, or long lengths of cable.
It makes sense that wide dynamic range measurements start with getting the most power available from
the source. But the art is in the low level measurement made at the other end of the device under test.
At very low signal levels, noise dominates the measurement. As a user, you will detect this noise in two
forms - broadband thermal and circuit noise, and long term drift. Eliminating, or at least controlling this
noise means attention to three factors - temperature stability, measurement mode, and averaging. If you
are making measurements below -40 dBm, attention to these three factors will improve your
measurement accuracy.
2.13.1
Temperature Stability
One of the best ways to control long term drift is to make sure that the analyzer and sensor have been
connected and powered up long enough to stabilize in temperature. In general, if the instruments are at
room temperature, you should allow at least 15 minutes after turn-on before attempting an accurate low
level measurement. Temperature stability will continue to improve until 1 or 2 hours after turn-on.
When calibrating or connecting the DUT, try to minimize handling the sensors or bridges. Although
temperature corrected and insulated, you may still see residual effects of a long hand grasp of the sensor especially when measuring below -55 dBm.
2.13.2
Measurement Modes
Low level measurements can be made in three modes: the CW mode and two SWEPT modes (ac and dc
detection). The mode chosen will impact the characteristics of any low level measurements. You may
wish to choose different modes for different test requirements.
2.13.2.1
CW Mode
The 8003 Analyzer makes its best low level measurements in the CW mode. To get to CW mode, either
press [MEAS] and select the [ALL CW] softkey, or press [DEFINE] and the [CW/SWEPT] softkey for
your desired channel. Unlike the two swept modes, CW mode uses narrow bandwidth filtering to reduce
noise much more efficiently. This means that the CW mode will give a stable reading much more
quickly at low levels than either swept mode (of course, only at a single frequency). You can use this
characteristic to either use less averaging (hence, less time) to get a stable reading, or more stable digits
of resolution for the same measurement time.
To make the best low level measurements in the CW mode you should frequently re-zero the 8003
Analyzer. This removes the effect of drift from the measurement. Press [CAL] and select the ZERO
SENSOR softkey. Then press the [SENSORXZERO] softkey, where X is the sensor letter (A, B, or C). If
you are using a GPIB-supported sweeper, the 8003 Analyzer will automatically turn the RF off during
zeroing. The sweeper must have less than -80 dBm of power output during RF off. Please be aware that
many sweepers do not adequately suppress their signal during RF OFF if their output level is set above
-20 dBm. If in doubt, disconnect the sensor, zero it, and reconnect it to the sweeper to check that the
sweeper level is -70 dBm during RF OFF. Note that the closer you get to -70 dBm, the more apparent
the drift will become, and the more frequently you will need to re-zero the Analyzer. Select the amount
of averaging desired to get a stable reading. To use averaging, press [DISPLAY] and select the AVG
2-102
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
softkey. Turn averaging ON by pressing the [AVGON/OFF] softkey. Use the spin knob or numeric
entry keypad to select the desired number of averages. To restart the averaging, turn the averaging OFF
then ON again.
2.13.2.2
Swept Mode with AC Detection
If you are making swept measurements, ac detection mode will tend to give you better low level
measurements than dc detection. The reason is that in ac detection mode, the sweeper output is
chopped, and the analyzer constantly compares the RF ON level to the RF OFF level. Because the
analyzer is always measuring the RF OFF level, the effects of drift are effectively canceled. The
disadvantage of the swept-ac mode compared to the CW mode is that it takes much longer to average to
a stable reading since only one average is made per sweep.
To use ac detection, first make sure that you are in the swept measurement mode. Press [MEAS] and
select the [ALL SWEPT] softkey, or press [DEFINE] and select the [CW/SWEPT] softkey. Select ac
detection by pressing [CONFIG] and selecting the [SENSORSAC/DC] softkey. Then, either press the
[ALLAC] softkey or the [SENSRXAC/DC] softkey - where X is the desired sensor letter. This will put
the analyzer in the ac detection mode. Make sure that the AC MOD OUTPUT BNC connector on the
8003 Analyzer’s rear panel is connected to the sweeper PULSE MOD or AM input (see Section B.3.3.1
for the sweeper configuration instructions). If the sweeper is not GPIB supported, make sure that it’s
AM or PULSE modulation function is also enabled.
To make the best measurements in swept-ac detection mode, first zero the sensor using the method
described in the CW mode in Section 2.13.2.1. Although frequent re-zeroing is not required since the
ac detection is eliminating drift, an initial zero is required for accurate absolute power displays. Use a
slow sweep (1 second) to ensure adequate resolution. Turn on averaging to reduce signal noise. To use
averaging, first press [DISPLAY] and select the [AVG] softkey. Turn averaging on by pressing the
[AVG ON/OFF] softkey. Then select the appropriate averaging number using the spin knob or numeric
entry keypad. To restart the averaging, turn the averaging OFF then ON again.
2.13.2.3
Swept Mode with DC Detection
There may be occasions when swept low level measurements cannot be made in ac detection mode. An
example may be testing an amplifier with an AGC control that cannot handle ac modulation. In these
cases, the dc detection mode can be used. However, it may be difficult to adequately average out noise
quickly enough to avoid the effects of drift. This will typically be the case for measurements below
-60 dBm. To use dc detection, first make sure that the analyzer is in swept mode using the instructions
for ac detection given previously. Then press [CONFIG] and select the [SENSORS AC/DC] softkey.
Either press the [ALL DC] softkey, or toggle the desired [SENSRXAC/DC] softkey until DC is in light
blue. Note that dc detection is the default mode of the analyzer.
To make the best swept low level measurements in dc detection mode you should first make sure that
the analyzer has reached a very stable operating temperature to minimize the drift. Then, frequently rezero the analyzer using the instructions given in the CW Mode in Section 2.13.2.1. Turn on averaging
to reduce signal noise using the instructions given in the Swept Mode With AC Detection in
Section 2.13.2.2.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-103
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2.14
8003 Power Sweep Measurements
POWER
RF POWER
ON / OFF
PWR SWP
ON / OFF
POWER
SWEEP
START
POWER
CH1 : SW A
2 dB/
CRSR 6 dBm
REF 4 dBm
STOP
POWER
UPD SWP
ON / OFF
FREQ
SWEEP
TIME
1
ANALOG /
DIGITAL
STEP
SIZE
POWER
RETURN
POWER
-20
STRT
Menus used for Power
Sweep Measurements
-2.00 dBm
4
dBm
PSF 2000.0 MHz
10
STOP 10.00 dBm
Display Produced by
Power Sweep Measurements (Typical)
Figure 2-59: Menus & Typical Display (Power Sweep Measurements)
Besides Swept and CW measurements, the 8003 Analyzer supports a Power Sweep measurement mode.
A linear power sweep of 20 dB or less is possible with 0.01 dB level resolution over a power range of
15 dBm to -120 dBm, depending on the source used (Giga-tronics 12000A, 7200, 7300 and HP8340,
8350B are presently supported). Digital power sweep is also possible with a 110 dB sweep range and a
minimum step size of 0.01 dB. The Power Sweep Mode can be entered from the Swept Mode by pressing
[POWER] followed by the [POWER SWEEP] softkey. Once this mode is accessed, the following
variables can be set:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power Sweep ON/OFF
Start Power Level
Stop Power Level
Frequency of Power Sweep
Sweep Time
Analog/Digital Power Sweep Mode
(Analog mode is the default. In the Digital mode, the Step Size default is 0.1 dB with a range of
about 0.01 to ±110 dB. Digital power sweep dwell time is fixed at 10 msec).
A linear power sweep measurement can be made using the following keystrokes:
[POWER] [POWER SWEEP] [PWR SWP ON/OFF] (toggle ON)
[ANALOG] (toggle to ANALOG if necessary)
[START POWER] (enter the desired starting power level in dBm)
[STOP POWER] (enter the desired stopping power level in dBm)
[FREQ] (enter the desired frequency)
[SWEEP TIME] (enter the desired sweep time)
2-104
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Operation
After the above parameters have been entered, a display similar to Figure 2-59 will appear, showing the
selected settings and characteristics of the power sweep within the defined parameters.
A digital power sweep measurement can be made using the following keystrokes:
[POWER] [POWER SWEEP] [PWRSWPON/OFF] (toggle ON)
[DIGITAL] (toggle to DIGITAL if necessary)
[STEP SIZE] (enter the desired step size in dBm)
[START POWER] (enter the desired starting power level in dBm)
[STOP POWER] (enter the desired stopping power level in dBm)
[FREQ] (enter the desired frequency)
If any other measurement modes are accessed, it may be necessary to reenter the Power Sweep Mode as
described above.
All of the usual measurements and corrections are possible (Ratio, Cal Factor, Averaging, Smoothing,
Frequency Correction, etc.)
Since the dynamic range of Giga-tronics power sensors is from -70 to +47 dBm depending on the sensor
type, the selected power range must be kept within these limits. It is up to you to make sure this criteria
is met.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-105
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
2-106
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3
Remote Operation
3.1
Introduction
This chapter explains how to operate the 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer from a remote location using a
system controller in conjunction with necessary computer devices. The system operates over a General
Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) compliant with IEEE 488 interface standards.
3.2
IEEE Bus Interface
3.2.1
Connect the System Controller
Connect the GPIB port on your system controller to the 8003 with an IEEE 488 interface cable.
Connect the interface cable to the GPIB/SYSTEM port on the 8003 rear panel. If you will be
controlling the sweeper through the 8003 Analyzer, connect the sweeper GPIB interface cable to the
GPIB/PRIVATE port. If you will be controlling the sweeper directly from the system controller,
connect the sweeper GPIB interface cable to the GPIB/SYSTEM port (see Figure 3-1).
Figure 3-1: Location of GPIB/System Connection (Rear Panel)
3.2.2
Set the GPIB Address
The 8003 Analyzer has a default GPIB address of 4. If you need to change the address, press [CONFIG]
on the front panel, then press the [GPIB DEVICES] softkey. You should see a message in the active
entry area of the display that says ANALYZER ADDRESS 4 (or whatever the current address number
is). Enter your new GPIB address on the numeric entry keypad and press the [GHz dB] units key.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-1
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.2.2.1
Programming the 8003
The remainder of this chapter explains how to program the 8003 Analyzer and supported sweeper over
the GPIB bus. The instructions assume that you are familiar with the front panel operation of the
instrument and that you have properly configured the system.
The 8003 GPIB command set allows direct control of most front panel functions, including all of the
functions found under the DEFINE, MEAS, DISPLAY, CURSOR, SCALE, CAL, MEMORY, START,
POWER, SWEEP TIME, and PRESET softkeys (with the exception of the display setup functions found
under the DISPLAY key). Some of the lesser used functions under the SERVICE softkey menu of the
CONFIG key are not controlled via direct GPIB commands, but can be accessed through the keyboard
emulation mode.
The GPIB command set allows extended capabilities of the analyzer beyond those accessible through
the front panel. These include reading of swept measurement data, upload and download of trace
memories, path cal and Cal Factor memories, three modes of high speed CW power measurements, and
a Pass Through mode for direct communication with devices on the 8003 private bus.
The 8003 Analyzer uses a simple programming structure consisting of commands (called verbs) followed
by command modifiers. Because the 8003 is driven by softkeys, these commands do not necessarily
follow the same sequence as front panel key strokes. However, you will find that they do give a very
logical access to the instrument’s functions.
A simple sequence of commands is usually sufficient to set up the instrument and obtain data over the
bus. The basic sequence of commands is:
1.
Send a GPIB device clear to PRESET the analyzer to a known, fixed state.
2.
Set up the analyzer measurement mode (SWEPT or CW) and configure its channels (single sensor,
ratios, or differences).
3.
Set up the sweeper parameters (frequencies, power levels).
4.
Set up the analyzer’s display mode and scaling (this step is optional).
5.
If needed, Calibrate and Zero the sensors.
6.
Take a reading of data.
This sequence of commands is illustrated in the programming example on the next four pages. The first
two examples for CW and swept measurements are written in TBASIC for IBM-PC users. The second
two examples are the identical programs written in HP-Basic for HP series 200 and 300 users.
3-2
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Typical TBASIC Program for Swept Measurements
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
470
480
490
500
560
570
580
590
600
610
620
625
630
640
650
! ***************************************************************
! 8003 Swept Measurement Demonstration program
! TBasic version
! Copyright 2001, Giga-tronics Power Measurements Division
! ***************************************************************
!
OPTION BASE 1! arrays start with index of 1
DIM Data array[512],Buffer$(5000)! allocate storage for swept data
!
POLL Status,Primary;4! Use serial poll to clear any existing srq s
WRITE GPIB CMD(Dcl)! Device Clear does a PRESET on the 8003
!
! Set up Analyzer channel configuration first
!
PRINT @4:SWP 1,A;on;meas! channel 1 is in swept mode, sensor A,
!
and reads in absolute units
PRINT @4:SWP 2,B;on;meas! channel 2 is in swept mode, sensor B,
!
and reads in absolute units
PRINT @4:CHAN 3;off;CHAN 4;off! turn off channels 3 and 4
!
! Now, set up the sweeper parameters
!
PRINT @4:SWPF;start 2000;stop 8000;level 10;swpt 500
! Set start frequency 2GHz, stop frequency 8 GHz,
! Output level +10 dBm, and sweep time 500 ms/sweep
PRINT @4:SWPF;level on! turn on RF output
SLEEP 8 ! put in appropriate wait time for sweeper to set up
!
! These next lines set up display format but are not strictly
! necessary for data collection over the bus
!
PRINT @4:GRAPH! graph display mode
PRINT @4:SWP 1;scale 1;ref pos 0;ref lev 10! scale channel 1
PRINT @4:SWP 2;scale 5;ref pos 0;ref lev 0! scale channel 2
!
! Zero sensor A before taking a reading
!
ON SRQ GOTO Done zeroa! exit when zeroing done
PRINT @4:ZERO A;srq! Zero sensor A, pull srq when done
Loop1: GOTO Loop1! Wait until srq (or do other tasks)
Done zeroa: POLL Status,Primary;4! Clear srq with serial poll
OFF SRQ ! disable further srq s
!
! Take a reading
!
SLEEP 4 ! put in time to make sure sweeper is settled
PRINT @4:OUTPUT 1;items 512! read 512 swept data points
INPUT @4 LINE Buffer$! Read data into string buffer
INPUT FROM Buffer$:Data array! convert to data array
PRINT Data array;
!
END
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-3
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Typical TBASIC Program for Stepped CW Measurements
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
470
480
490
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
600
610
3-4
! ************************************************************
! 8003 CW Measurement Demonstration program
! TBasic version
! Copyright 2001, Giga-tronics Power Measurements Division
! ************************************************************
!
OPTION BASE 0! arrays start with index of 0
DIM Buffer[19]! allocate storage for CW data
!
POLL Status,Primary;4! Use serial poll to clear any existing srq s
WRITE GPIB CMD(Dcl)! Device Clear does a PRESET on the 8003
!
! Set up Analyzer channel configuration first
!
PRINT @4:POWER 1,A;avg 4;on! channel 1 is in swept mode,
!
Sensor A, 4 averages
PRINT @4:CHAN 2;off;CHAN 3;off;CHAN 4;off
!
! Now, set up the sweep parameters
!
PRINT @4:FIXED;freq 2000;level -15
! Set CW frequency of 2 GHz, level at -15 dBm
PRINT @4:FIXED;level on! turn on RF output
SLEEP 8 ! put in appropriate wait time for sweeper to set up
!
! This next line sets up display format but is not strictly
! necessary for data collection over the bus
!
PRINT @4:READOUT! power meter display mode
!
! Zero sensor A before taking a reading
!
ON SRQ GOTO Done zeroa
! exit when zeroing done
PRINT @4:ZERO A;srq! Zero sensor A, pull srq when done
Loop1: GOTO Loop1! Wait until srq (or do other tasks)
Done zeroa: POLL Status,Primary;4! Clear srq with serial poll
OFF SRQ
! disable further srq s
!
! Take a reading
!
FOR Reading no = 0 TO 19! take 20 readings
PRINT @4:FIXED;freq ;2000+Reading no/19*(8000-2000)
!step sweeper in 20 even steps from 2 to 8 GHz
SLEEP 1 ! make sure sweeper is settled
PRINT @4:POWER 1,avg off! turn averaging off to restart
PRINT @4:POWER 1,avg on! then turn averaging on
PRINT @4:OUTPUT 1! ask for reading
INPUT @4:Buffer[Reading no]! put reading in data buffer
NEXT Reading no
PRINT Buffer;
!
END
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Typical HP-Basic Program for Swept Measurements
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
470
480
490
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
600
! ***********************************************************
! 8003 Swept Measurement Demonstration Program
! HP300 Series Version
! Copyright 2001, Giga-tronics Power Measurements Division
! ***********************************************************
!
OPTION BASE 1! arrays start with index of 1
DIM Data array(512)! allocate storage for swept data
!
Status=SPOLL(704)! use serial poll to clear any existing srq s
CLEAR 704! Device Clear does a PRESET on the 8003
!
! Set up analyzer channel configuration first
!
OUTPUT 704;SWP 1,A;on;meas! channel 1 is in swept mode, sensor A
!
and reads in absolute units
OUTPUT 704;SWP 2,B;on;meas! channel 2 is in swept mode, sensor B
!
and reads in absolute units
OUTPUT 704;CHAN 3;off;CHAN 4;off! turn off channels 3 and 4
!
! Now, set up the sweeper parameters
!
OUTPUT 704;SWPF;start 2000;stop 8000;level 10;swpt 500
! Set start frequency 2 GHz, stop frequency 8 GHz,
! output level +10 dBm, and sweep time 500 ms/sweep
OUTPUT 704;SWPF;level on! turn on RF output
WAIT 8! put in appropriate wait time for sweeper to set up
!
! These next lines set up display format but are not strictly
! necessary for data collection over the bus
!
OUTPUT 704;GRAPH
! graph display mode
OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;scale 1;ref pos 0;ref lev 10
! scale channel 1
OUTPUT 704;SWP 2;scale 5;ref pos 0;ref lev 0
! scale channel 2
!
! Zero sensor A before taking a reading
!
ENABLE INTR 7;2! enable interrupts from instrument srq s
ON INTR 7 GOTO Done zeroa! exit when zeroing done
OUTPUT 704;ZERO A;srq! zero sensor A, pull srq when done
Loop1: GOTO Loop1! Wait until srq (or do other tasks)
Done zeroa: Status=SPOLL(704)! clear srq with serial poll
!
! Take a reading
!
WAIT 4
! put in time to make sure sweeper is settled
OUTPUT 704;OUTPUT 1;items 512 ! read 512 swept data points
ENTER 704;Data array(*)
PRINT Data array(*)
!
END
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-5
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Typical HP-Basic Program for Stepped CW Measurements
100 ! ********************************************************
110 ! 8003 CW Measurement Demonstration Program
120 ! HP300 Series Version
130 ! Copyright 2001, Giga-tronics Power Measurements Division
140 ! *********************************************************
150 !
160 OPTION BASE 0! arrays in this example start with index of 0
170 DIM Buffer(19)! allocate storage for CW data
180 !
190 Status=SPOLL(704)! use serial poll to clear any existing srq s
200 CLEAR 704! Device Clear does a PRESET on the 8003
210 !
220 ! Set up analyzer channel configuration first
230 !
240 OUTPUT 704;POWER 1,A;avg 4;on! channel 1 is in CW mode, sensor A
250 !
and has an averaging number of 4
260 OUTPUT 704;CHAN 2;off;CHAN 3;off;CHAN 4;off
270 !
turn off channels 2, 3, and 4
280 !
290 ! Now, set up the sweeper parameters
300 !
310 OUTPUT 704;FIXED;freq 2000;level -15
320 ! Set CW frequency of 2 GHz and output level of -15 dBm
330 OUTPUT 704;FIXED;level on! turn on RF output
340 WAIT 8! put in appropriate wait time for sweeper to set up
350 !
360 ! This next line sets up the display format but is not strictly
370 ! necessary for data collection over the bus
380 !
390 OUTPUT 704;READOUT! make sure that the analyzer is in readout
400 !
(large number display) mode
410 !
420 ! Zero sensor A before taking a reading
430 !
440 ENABLE INTR 7;2! enable interrupts from instrument srq s
450 ON INTR 7 GOTO Done zeroa! exit from current routine when zeroing
done
460 OUTPUT 704;ZERO A;srq! zero sensor A, pull srq when done
470 Loop1: GOTO Loop1! Wait until srq (or do other tasks)
480 Done zeroa: Status=SPOLL(704)! Clear srq with serial poll
490 !
500 ! Take a series of readings in CW mode
510 !
520 FOR Reading no=0 TO 19! take 20 readings
530 OUTPUT 704;FIXED;freq ;2000+Reading no/19*(8000-2000)
540 ! set sweeper cw frequency to evenly space readings from 2 to 8 GHz
550 WAIT 1! put in time to make sure sweeper and analyzer are settled
560 OUTPUT 704;POWER 1,avg off! restart averaging by first turning off
570 OUTPUT 704;POWER 1;avg on! then turn averaging on
580 OUTPUT 704;OUTPUT 1! ask for reading
590 ENTER 704;Buffer(Reading no)! put the reading in the data buffer
600 NEXT Reading no
610 PRINT Buffer(*)
620 !
630 END
3-6
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3
Structured GPIB Language
The 8003 is a complex instrument with many features. The goal of providing a structured language
environment is to make programming the 8003 easier. The advantage of using a structured language is
that it provides a common structure for each command. This structure is easy to remember and makes
the resulting programming command strings readable by others. This, in turn, helps make your programs
more self documenting, thus aiding in maintaining them.
3.3.1
Common Structure
The language used in the 8003 command structures is in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Std. 488.2-1987,
IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols, and Common Commands. Each structure defines a
command, which addresses an 8003 feature or resource. The command is defined by a context setting
VERB mnemonic. The general form for all commands is as follows:
VERB [hs specifier] [ds sensor specifier] [us modifier]...[us modifier]
Where VERB is a context setting mnemonic which is always required. For convenience, long and short
forms for the same verb are sometimes available (for example, POWER and PWR).
The mnemonic inside the brackets is optional (see Section 3.3.3 for definition of each separator).
hs is a header separator
ds is a data separator
us is a unit separator
The ... notation indicates that a field may be repeated. In the general syntax format, it indicates that the
modifier may be repeated.
The specifier can be either a channel or sensor specifier. The type of specifier is particular to the
command.
A channel specifier is a mnemonic that defines the channel for which the command is to be applied. In
the general syntax form shown above, this specifier is shown as optional. The type of command
determines whether or not it is required. This specifier is for all channel-specific command VERBS. An
example of a channel specific command would be a command that directed the 8003 to make a
measurement on a given channel. An example of a non-channel specific command would be to direct
the 8003 to use the graphic display mode or to turn off the private bus.
A sensor specifier is a mnemonic that defines a sensor or sensor pair for which the command is to be
applied. This specifier is for all sensor-specific commands. An example would be a command that directs
the 8003 to calibrate a sensor.
A modifier is a sub-structure to modify or augment the main context. This sub-structure also has a
general format which is defined below. When several different versions of a modifier are given (such as
OFFSET, OS, ATTN), any version can be used with the same results.
3.3.2
8003 GPIB Commands
Tables 3-2 and 3-3 lists the 8003 GPIB commands. The commands are duplicated on the separate
laminated sheet furnished with this manual.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-7
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
8003 GPIB Commands
Measurement Commands
abs
Channel & Sensor Commands
; SRQ
norm
on
off
A
SWP<?>
1
B
2
C
3 ,
4
A/B
A/C ;
B/A
B/C
C/A
C/B
avg n / on-off
CHAN
scale n /auto
1
2
3 ,
4
ref_pos n
ref_lev n
items n
trace n
-trace n
store_trc
clear_trc
store_short n
<linefeed> store_open
marker n /all
; on/off / clear/freq n
def_mrkr n
; freq n/curs freq
A
B
C
A/B
A/C
B/A abs
B/C ; norm
C/A on
C/B off
A-B
A-C
B-A
B-C
C-A
C-B
limit on-off
; clear
point f1,p1,p2
flat f1,p1,p2,f2
slope f1,p1,f1,p3,p4
A
PWR<?>
B
on
; SRQ
C
off
RFT
1
A/B
avg n/on-off
2
A/C
max n/on-off
3 ,
B/A
min n/on-off
4
B/C ; rel/on-off
items n
C/A
C/B
T0
A-B
T1
A-C
T2
B-A
T3
offset n
ac
dc
free run
trig
dly trig
Noise Figure Commands
smooth n/on-off
limit n/all
SENSOR
A
B ;
C
NF<?>
1
2
3 ,
4
A
B ;
C
B-C
; SRQ
abs
norm
on
off
avg n / on-off
scale n /auto
ref_pos n
ref_lev n
items n
trace n
-trace n
store_trc
clear_trc
store_short n
<linefeed> store_open
; on/off / clear/freq n
marker n /all
; freq n/curs freq
def_mrkr n
smooth n/on-off
limit on-off
; clear
limit n/all
uncorr
point f1,p1,p2
corr
flat f1,p1,p2,f2
ngain
slope f1,p1,f1,p3,p4
C-A
C-B
on
source
temp
off
1
sch<?> max
2
CURSOR
min
3 ;
right
4
left
NFSET ;
if_atten
src_switch
bw
flat
if_switch
freq<?>
delta
n
nn.n
A/B/C
auto
n
nf
gain
nf
ext
on/off
(See other side for more commands)
Figure 3-2: GPIB Commands (Front)
3-8
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
8003 GPIB Commands Cont.
Calibration Commands
CAL
A
B ;
C
srq
THRU
A
B
C
;
srq
A
SHORT B
C
;
srq
<linefeed> OPEN
A
B
C
;
srq
ZERO
Input/Output Commands
Trace n
Pathcal A/B/C
Calfactor A/B/C
ENR n
INPUT ;
1
2
3
4
Trace n
Pathcal A/B/C
Calfactor A/B/C
ENR n
OUTPUT ;
items
; n
curp
srq
limit
Instrument Configuration Commands
GRAPH
DISABLE
BIAS
1
2 , n
3
4
RDTEMP
*IDN?
(instrument identification)
ENABLE (private bus)
*ESR?
(read external status register)
on
MEMORY ;
store n
recall n
KEYEM
off
READOUT
Sweeper Commands
SWPF ;
start<?>
stop<?>
level<?>
swpt<?>
upd
n
n
n
off
on
n
on-off
freq<?> n
level<?> n
FIXED ;
pff
on
opd
on-off
Printer Commands
ink
PRINT ; paint
laser
PLOT ;
cd<?>
n
span<?> n
level<?> n
SWPS ;
off
on
swpt<?> n
upd
on-off
all
;srq
upl
lowl
lowr
sp_trace
sp_label
sp_grid
custom ;grid
freq_lb
summary
scale
title
trace n
logo
Figure 3-3: GPIB Commands (Back)
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-9
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.3.3
Command Execution
A command string is executed when an EOL signal is received (see Section 3.3.3.4). Until an EOL
signal is received the 8003 will parse, check for operational errors and syntax errors and store but not
execute the request as defined by a command string. Any number of context setting VERBS may appear
in an input string. Each time a new VERB is parsed, a new context is established and all specifiers and
modifiers to follow are interpreted for that VERB. The required syntax for each command must be
followed to avoid generating syntax errors. The VERB structures may appear in any order within the
program string.
3.3.3.1
hs Definition
The header separator (hs) mnemonic is defined as zero or more ASCII white space characters between a
command header and accompanying data.
3.3.3.2
ds Definition
The data separator (ds) mnemonic is defined as zero or more ASCII white space characters followed by
an ASCII comma followed by zero or more ASCII white space characters. It can be between any two
items of data. Always see the syntax diagram for the specific command for the proper use of this
separator.
3.3.3.3
us Definition
The unit separator (us) mnemonic is defined as zero or more ASCII white space characters followed by
an ASCII semicolon followed by zero or more ASCII white space characters.
3.3.3.4
EOL Definition
The End Of Line separator (EOL) mnemonic is defined as zero or more ASCII white space characters
followed by zero or one ASCII carriage return character followed by an ASCII line feed character.
Alternatively, the IEEE 488 EOI line may be sent true with the last ASCII character of the last
mnemonic. The command string is executed upon parsing of the EOL command.
3.3.3.5
Case Insensitivity
All of the command mnemonics can be sent in either upper or lowercase. Although the 8003 is
insensitive to case, it is useful to program strings in a mix of upper and lowercase alphas. One suggestion
is to construct VERB and sensor specifier mnemonics in uppercase and all other alpha mnemonics in
lowercase alphas. The reason for this is to make the verbs more visible and hence more readable. Other
programmers reading your ATE code will appreciate this and so will you when you are reviewing code
months after you have written it. All of the examples in this chapter are presented in this fashion.
3-10
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3.4
IEEE GPIB Interface Characteristics
AH1
Acceptor Handshake, complete capability
SH1
Source Handshake, complete capability
T6
Talker Function, complete capability (-TON)
TE0
Extended Talker Function, no capability
L4
Listener Function, Basic listener, unaddressed if MTA
LE0
Extended Listener Function, no capability
SR1
Service Request Function, complete capability
RL1
Remote Local Function, complete capability (LLO)
PP0
Parallel Poll Function, no capability
DC1
Device Clear Function, complete capability
DT1
Device Trigger Function, complete capability
C0
Controller Function, no capability
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-11
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.3.5
Channel Bias Voltage Definition Command Structure
BIAS, BV
Syntax:
BV hs Channel Specifier ds numerical value
Example:
BV 1,4500
Specifiers:
Channel specifiers:
1, 2, 3, and 4
Numerical value range:
-10000 to 10000
assumed units:
millivolts
Description: This verb defines a bias voltage as a function of a specified channel. The bias voltage is
available at the rear panel connector of the same name. This voltage is present at the rear
panel connector whenever the 8003 is making a measurement on that channel. Up to four
different voltages may be defined to correspond to the four channels.
3.3.6
Sensor Calibration Command Structure
CAL
Syntax:
CAL hs Sensor Specifier [us modifier] EOL
Example:
CAL B;srq EOL
Specifiers:
Modifiers:
A, B, or C
This modifier is to request that a service request be sent upon completion of the Sensor
Calibration.
Modifier name:
SRQ
Modifier Syntax:
SRQ
Description: This verb defines and initiates a Sensor Calibration.
If the SRQ modifier is received, the 8003 will calibrate the specified Sensor. When the calibration is
complete, the event complete bit is set in the external status register and the service request and the
external status bits are set in the instrument status byte.
3-12
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3.7
Channel Definition Command Structure
CHAN, CH
Syntax:
CH hs Channel Specifier [ds Sensor Specifier] [us modifiers] .. [us modifiers]
Example:
CHAN 2,B/C;on;meas;CHAN 1;off;CHAN 3;norm;on
Specifiers:
Channel Specifiers:
1, 2, 3, and 4
Sensor Specifiers:
A, B, C, A-B, A-C, B-A, B-C, C-A, C-B, A/B, A/C, B/A,
B/C, C/A, and C/B
Modifiers:
This modifier defines the measurement to be made in absolute units (non-normalized).
Modifier name:
MEAS, M, ABS
Modifier Syntax:
MEAS
This modifier defines the measurement to be made in relative units
(meas data - path cal).
Modifier name:
NORM, N, -PC
Modifier Syntax:
NORM
This modifier turns on a specified channel.
Modifier name:
ON, +
Modifier Syntax:
ON
This modifier turns off a specified channel.
Modifier name:
OFF,-
Modifier Syntax:
OFF
Description: This verb describes attributes to a channel. Such features as sensor assignment and
turning a channel on or off are defined by a command string beginning with this verb.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-13
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.3.8
Cursor Definition Command Structure
CURSOR, CUR
Syntax:
CUR hs Channel Specifier [us modifier]..[us modifier]
Example:
CUR 4;on;sch? max
Related Command:
SWP
Specifiers:
Channel specifiers:
1, 2, 3, and 4
Modifiers:
This modifier turns on a cursor for the specified channel making the SWEPT measurement.
Modifier name:
ON,+
Modifier Syntax:
ON
This modifier turns off a cursor for the specified channel making the SWEPT measurement.
Modifier name:
OFF,-
Modifier Syntax:
OFF
This modifier sets up a search condition for the cursor on the specified channel. The
addition of the question mark affixed to the end of the SEARCH modifier is a query flag. If
the query flag is set, the measurement will be made and the next time that the 8003 is
addressed to talk it will output the value of the cursor as defined by the search request.
The format of the returned data is described for each type of search request below.
3-14
Modifier name:
SEARCH, SEARCH?, SCH, SCH?
Modifier Syntax:
SCH[?] us SEARCH MOD
SEARCH MOD:
MAX
FULL Modifier Syntax:
SCH[?] us MAX
query value returned:
freq, data EOL
freq:
freq = D.ddd Where D is zero to 6 digits. The value
represents the frequency of the maximum power point in
the trace in units of MHZ.
data:
data = ±d where D is zero to three digits to the right of
the decimal point and three digits to the left. The
assumed units are dBm or dB depending upon the
measurement mode.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
SEARCH MOD:
MIN
FULL Modifier Syntax:
SCH[?] us MIN
query value returned:
freq, data EOL
freq:
freq = D.ddd Where d is zero to 6 digits. The value
represents the frequency of the minimum power point in
the trace in units of MHZ.
data:
data = ±D Where D is zero to three digits to the right of
the decimal point and three digits to the left. The
assumed units are dBm or dB depending upon the
measurement mode.
SEARCH MOD:
RIGHT, RT
FULL Modifier Syntax:
SCH[?] us RT hs numerical value
numerical value range:
-90.00 to +90.00
numerical resolution:
0.01
assumed units:
dBm, dB
query value returned:
freq, data EOL
freq:
freq = D.ddd Where D is zero to 6 digits. The value
represents the frequency of the cursor in units of MHZ.
This value is returned here for confirmation.
data:
data = ±D Where D is zero to three digits to the right of
the decimal point and three digits to the left. The
assumed units are dBm or dB depending upon the
measurement mode.
SEARCH MOD:
LEFT, LT
FULL Modifier Syntax:
SCH[?] us LT hs numerical
value numerical value range:
-90.00 to +90.00
numerical resolution:
0.01
assumed units:
dBm, dB
query value returned:
freq, data EOL
freq:
freq = D.ddd Where D is zero to 6 digits. The value
represents the frequency of the cursor in units of MHZ.
This value is returned here for confirmation.
data:
data = ±D Where D is zero to three digits to the right of
the decimal point and three digits to the left. The
assumed units are dBm or dB depending upon the
measurement mode.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-15
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
SEARCH MOD:
BW
FULL Modifier Syntax:
SCH[?] us BW hs numerical
value numerical value range:
-90.00 to +90.00
numerical resolution:
0.01
assumed units:
dBm, dB
query value returned:
freq 1, freq 2, freq bw, data EOL
freq 1:
lower frequency of bandwidth in MHZ. The format is
D.ddd where D is zero to six digits.
freq 2:
upper frequency of bandwidth in MHZ. The format is
D.ddd where D is zero to six digits.
freq BW:
bandwidth in MHZ. The format is D.ddd where D is zero
to six digits.
data:
±D.ddd dB bandwidth (specified by host computer and
returned here for confirmation). Where D is zero to 3
digits to the left of the decimal point. The value is
returned to the host computer for confirmation.
SEARCH MOD:
FLAT
FULL Modifier syntax:
SCH? hs FLAT
query value returned:
freq, data EOL
freq:
freq = D.ddd where D is zero to 6 digits. The value
represents the current cursor frequency in MHz
data:
Finds the curve flatness where flatness = maximum
trace power minus minimum trace power. Data format =
D where D is zero to three digits to the left of the decimal
point, and two digits to the right of the decimal point.
The assumed units are dBm or dB, depending on the
measurement mode.
This modifier defines the frequency of the cursor. The cursor will be placed at the
frequency specified by this modifier.
3-16
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Modifier name:
FREQ, FREQ?
Modifier Syntax:
FREQ[?] [hs numerical value]
numerical value range:
limited by the signal source if the source is supported
upon the private bus. Otherwise the frequency range is
1.000 MHZ to 99.000 GHZ. If the query flag (‘?’) is
selected, the next time the 8003 is talk addressed the
instrument will return the cursor data in the following
form:
query value returned:
freq, data EOL
freq:
freq = D.ddd Where D is zero to 6 digits. The value
represents the frequency of the cursor in units of MHZ.
data:
±ddd.dd [units are dB(m)]
Description:
This modifier qualifies that it is the delta cursor which is
to be modified.
Modifier name:
DELTA
Modifier Syntax:
DELTA ds state
State definition:
ON, + = delta cursor on
Full Syntax:
CUR hs [chan specifier] us DELTA state
Description: This verb defines a cursor function for a specified channel. The feature is specified via the
modifiers for this verb. An example of a feature is to place the cursor at the maximum
power point in a swept trace for a given channel
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-17
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.3.9
Instrument Preset Command Structure
<Device Clear>
Syntax:
A standard GPIB device clear (either selective or general) will preset the instrument.
Examples:
CLEAR 704: for HP Series Controllers
WRITE GPIB CMD(Dcl): for IBM Series Controllers running TBASIC
Description: A GPIB device clear will cause the instrument to perform an instrument preset. The instrument will go to the following default state:
Function
Default Setting
Cross Cursor:
Delta Cursor:
Markers:
Active Channel:
OFF, frequency at 10000 MHz
OFF
OFF
1
Sensor Mode:
Sensor Specific for Source of Frequency:
Sensor Frequency:
Sensor Cal Factor:
Sensor Offset:
Sensor Full Band Path Cal Option:
DC
Back Panel Swp Input
0.05 GHz
0
0
NO
Setup:
Color Intensity:
Graticule Color:
Frequency Label:
Title:
Swept Mode
Red, Green, Blue are bright
Green
ON
OFF
Mode:
Parameter:
Color:
Swept Frequency
A, B, C, A/B for channels 1 through 4.
Cyan, Red, Yellow, Magenta for channels 1
through 4 respectively
dB mode
0
Absolute Measurement
OFF, average factor = 8
OFF, smooth apert = 5%
OFF
20 dB
Center
0 dB
-3.00 dB
-3.00 dB
REL OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
0 volt
Cursor
Sensor
Display
Channel
Format:
Memorized Trace:
Measurement:
Average:
Smoothing:
Continue Auto Scale:
Scale per Division:
Reference Position:
Reference Level:
Bandwidth Search Value:
Channel Search Level:
CW Mode Setup:
Max Hold:
Min Hold:
Channel Title:
Limit Line:
Modulate Bias Voltage:
3-18
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Function
Default Setting
Signal Source Mode:
Start Frequency:
Start/Stop Swept Freq
Sweeper Start Frequency or 1 MHz if not
controlled by the 8003
Sweeper Stop Frequency
200 ms
OFF, minimum RF level of the signal source or
0 dBm if not controlled by the 8003.
OFF
Source
Stop Frequency:
Sweep Time:
RF Power Level:
Source Modulation:
The following instrument settings are not changed during an instrument preset:
•
•
•
•
3.3.10
All GPIB addresses (Analyzer, Source, Printers, and Plotters)
Sensor linearity calibrations
Trace Memories
Path Cal Memories
Disable Private Bus Command Structure
DISABLE
Syntax:
DISABLE
Related Command:
ENABLE
Description: This verb disables the private bus. When sent, the 8003 private bus becomes inactive. An
Enable command must be sent or a power down/power up cycle must be executed to
enable the private bus.
3.3.11
Enable Private Bus Command Structure
ENABLE
Syntax:
ENABLE
Related Command:
DISABLE
Description: This verb enables the private bus. When sent, the 8003 private bus becomes active. A
Disable command must be sent to disable the private bus.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-19
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.3.12
External Status Register Query Command Structure
*ESR?
Syntax:
*ESR?
Example:
*ESR?
Description: This verb is the standardized COMMON external status register query command as
defined by IEEE 488.2 1988. When talk addressed after receiving the command, the 8003
will output the value of its external status register. The return value is defined as follows:
status:
EOL
Where status is an integer in the range of 0 to 128.
The description of the individual bits and their decoding can be found in Section 3.3.32.
3-20
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3.13
Fixed Frequency Source Mode Definition Command
Structure
FIXED
Syntax:
FIXED [us modifier]..[us modifier]
Examples:
(See page 3-66 in the SWPF command description for a more complete programming
example of the UPD modifier.)
Related Command:
POWER
Modifiers:
This modifier defines a CW frequency for the FIXED frequency mode of signal source.
The query flag (‘?’) affixed to the cw frequency modifier queries the value of the cw
frequency. If set, the next time the 8003 is talk addressed it will output the value of the cw
frequency in MHZ. The format of the returned data is:
D.dddddd:
Where D is zero to 6 digits and the assumed units are MHZ
Modifier name:
FREQ, FREQ?, FR, FR?, CW, CW?
Modifier Syntax:
CW[?] [ds numerical value]
Numerical value range:
Dependent upon the signal source if the source is
supported on the 8003 private bus. If not supported, the
range is 1 MHZ to 99 GHZ
This modifier defines a POWER LEVEL for the fixed
frequency mode of signal source. The query flag (‘?’)
affixed to the power level modifier queries the value of
the power level. If set, the next time the 8003 is talk
addressed it will output the value of the power level in
dBm.
The resolution is 0.01 dBm. The format of the returned
data is:
±D.dd
where D is zero to three digits and the assumed units
are dBm
Modifier name:
LEVEL, LEVEL?, PL, PL?
Modifier Syntax:
PL[?] [ds numerical value]
Numerical value range:
Dependent upon the signal source if the source is
supported upon the 8003 private bus. If not supported
then the range is -99 to +99 dBm.
The update modifier decouples analyzer frequency
updates from sweeper frequency updates. This is most
commonly used when the analyzer and sweeper are set
to different frequencies, as in mixer or frequency
multiplier measurements. The analyzer normally uses
frequency information to change the operating frequencies of the sweeper, annotate x-axis of the swept
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-21
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
display, apply correct Cal Factors to the reading, take
the correct portions of trace memories and path cal
memories, and fix cursors and markers. The update
modifier allows independent control of the sweeper
frequencies and all other frequency related analyzer
functions. If the modifier UPD ON is included once with
the SWPF, SWPS, or FIXED verbs, then all subsequent
uses of those verbs will update the sweeper frequency
along with the analyzer frequency. If the modifier UPD
OFF is included once with the above verbs, then all
subsequent uses of those verbs will change only
analyzer frequency parameters.
Modifier name:
UPD
Modifier syntax:
UPD hs state
State definition:
ON, OFF
Send the following commands to modify both the sweeper and analyzer frequencies to
2000 MHz
FIXED;UPD ON
FIXED;2000
Send the following commands to modify only the analyzer frequency to 6000 MHz.
FIXED;UPD OFF
FIXED;6000
Description: This verb places the signal source mode to fixed frequency. This is an instrument wide
command and, as such, has no channel or sensor specifiers. However there are many
parameters associated with the source mode. These are defined by the modifiers which
follow the verb.
3-22
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3.14
Graph Display Definition Command Structure
GRAPH, GPH
Syntax:
GPH
Example:
GRAPH
Related Command:
SWP
Description: This verb places the 8003 display in the graph mode. There are no channel or sensor
specifiers and no modifiers.
3.3.15
Instrument Identifier Command Structure
*IDN?
Syntax:
*IDN?
Example:
*IDN?
Description: This verb is the standardized COMMON identify query command as defined by
IEEE 488.2 1988. When talk addressed after receiving the command, the 8003 will output
a string that identifies itself as the 8003 SNA. The return value is defined as follows:
Giga-tronics,8003,0,Software rev,Software rev dateEOL
Where:
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Giga-tronics is the manufacturer’s name
8003 is the model number
0 is an unused field
the software rev is the revision number such as 3.01
the software rev date is the date of the software revision
3-23
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.3.16
Input Command Structure
INPUT
Description: This verb inputs frequency, trace, pathcal, and cal factor information to the 8003 for use in
specific test routines. When information is downloaded, the 8003 needs to know the span
of the frequency range that the data represents. The first two values expected by the
analyzer, therefore, will be the Start and Stop frequencies. The ensuing data will then
represent values of power evenly spaced over the specified range. The first data item is a
power reading at the start frequency, and the last data item is a power reading at the stop
frequency. 512 power values are expected for trace memory, while 4096 values are
required for sensor Pathcal and Cal Factor data. The units for frequency are MHz, and the
units for power are dB. All data must be separated by a comma and end with a line feed.
Syntax:
INPUT us memory modifier hs sensor/trace specifier
Modifiers:
Trace specifiers:
0 through 9
Sensor specifiers:
A, B, C
Pathcal specifiers:
A, B, C
Calfactor specifiers:
A, B, C
Trace:
This refers to the 10 trace memories that can be used
for ratio measurements with any channel (see Section
2.3.7 on page 2-14 in the OPERATION Chapter of this
manual for a complete description).
Pathcal:
This refers to the sensor’s path calibration memory (see
Section 2.8.2 under Frequency Response Correction for
a complete description).
Calfactor:
This refers to the sensor’s calibration factor data (see
the paragraph starting at the bottom of Section 2.12 on
page 2-95 in the OPERATION chapter of this manual for
a complete description).
Data Input Format:
START FREQ,STOP FREQ (MHz)
then 512 data points for TRACE (dB)
then 4096 data points for PATHCAL
then 4096 data points for CALFACTOR
D.ddd
±ddd.dd
±ddd.dd
±ddd.dd
D = 0 to 6 digits
Example:
start frequency,stop frequency,data,(start freq),...,data(stop freq)
Immediately following the INPUT command string, the analyzer expects the data with the
above format.
Syntax Examples:
INPUT,TRACE 4
INPUT;PATHCAL B
INPUT;CALFACTOR C
Programming Examples:for HP 200 or 300 series controllers:
OUTPUT 704;INPUT;TRACE 4,Start_freq,stop freq,Data_array(*)
Related Command:
3-24
OUTPUT
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3.17
Key Stroke Emulation Enable/Disable Command Structure
KEYEM, KE
Syntax:
KEYEM hs modifier
Modifiers:
This modifier turns on the key stroke emulation mode.
Modifier name:
ON,+
Modifier Syntax:
ON
This modifier turns off the key stroke emulation mode.
Modifier name:
OFF,-
Modifier Syntax:
OFF
Description: Key Stroke Emulation is a feature that allows the GPIB controller to access 8003 functions
that are not available through normal GPIB commands. This is a special mode wherein a
sub-set of ASCII characters are interpreted as the 36 keys on the front panel of the 8003
(see Figure 3-1 on page 3-1).
There are two completely separate methods for entering and exiting the key emulation
mode which cannot be interchanged. In the first method, the controller sends a KEYEM
ON command and then asserts a global local. The GPIB 488 REN line is sent false and all
characters are passed on as key strokes, just as if they were entered from the front panel.
It should be kept in mind that once the key emulation mode is turned on, any commands
sent to the 8003 while it is in local (remote enable line false) will be interpreted as a key
stroke. It is still possible to program the instrument in remote while the key emulation
mode is enabled. This is done by placing the 8003 in remote (remote enable set true and
listen addressed). This allows the host controller to switch between the true remote state
and the local key stroke emulation mode without disabling the key stroke emulation mode.
The feature is disabled by sending a KEYEM OFF command.
Although the above method is easy to do and will work no matter what data must be sent
to the 8003, it does require the controller to place all of the instruments on the bus in the
local mode with the global local command. This can cause certain devices to change their
settings which might not be desirable.
The second method does not require the entire bus to go into the local mode. It can be
accessed as described above but, instead of a global local command, a device specific go
to local command is used. Characters will then be treated as key strokes until a reserved
character [in this case an asterisk (*)] is received to exit the key emulation mode and start
converting characters back into normal GPIB commands. Under the circumstances
described in #2 on the next page, the timing of the * character must be programmed so as
not to prematurely abort some keyboard emulation function that might still be in process.
This means that if the buffer were full with 16 characters, the routine would not see the *
reserved character and would continue to try and interpret GPIB commands as key
strokes.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-25
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Because the key stroke emulator is implemented as a succession of key strokes, certain
limitations should be kept in mind:
1.
The go to local command just before key stroke emulation will terminate most GPIB
functions still in progress. A waiting time of at least 1 second between the last GPIB
command and the go to local command is recommended. Likewise, a small 10
millisecond waiting period after the go to local command has been given is
recommended before giving key stroke emulation commands.
2.
The key stroke emulator buffers a maximum of 16 characters or individual key
strokes. The buffer is emptied serially as the instrument completes each keystroke
emulation. If the buffer is full, any extra key strokes sent to the instrument will be lost.
The time it takes to empty the buffer varies depending on the key stroke function
requested. Some key strokes such as entering limit lines are processed quickly,
while others such as plotting take a longer time to process. It is up to the
programmer to make sure that the instrument has digested the key strokes in its
buffer before sending new key strokes.
3.
When given a go to remote command after key stroke emulation, the analyzer will
wait for the key stroke commands to finish execution before processing any further
bus commands. This feature allows a program to automatically wait for the execution
of slow key stroke commands (such as plotting). See the example on the next page
for use of this feature to separate two key stroke commands when the first takes an
indeterminate amount of time.
Table 3-1: Definition of ASCII Codes
3-26
Key
Stroke
Definition
Key
Stroke
Definition
Key
Stroke
Definition
A
soft 1
O
Memory
5
5
B
soft 2
P
Start freq
6
6
C
soft 3
Q
Power
7
7
D
soft 4
R
Stop freq
8
8
E
soft 5
S
Sweep time
9.
9
F
soft 6
T
Preset
a
Enter off
G
soft 7
U
Config
b
Backspace
H
soft 8
-
Minus
c
MHZ/msec/dBm
I
Define
.
Decimal pt
d
GHZ/sec/dB
J
Meas
0
0
e
Channel 1
K
Scale
1
1
f
Channel 2
L
Disp
2
2
g
Channel 3
M
Cal
3
3
h
Channel 4
N
Cursor
4
4
i
Channel off
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Examples
Simple example using an HP Series 300 Controller:
100
OUTPUT 704;KEYEM ON! enable keystroke emulation
110
!
120
WAIT 1! always wait before go to local command
130
LOCAL 7
140
WAIT .01 ! always wait 10 ms after local command
150
OUTPUT 704;LDA! key stroke emulation for plotting
160
! current display
170
REMOTE 704! exit key stroke emulation mode
180
!
190
OUTPUT 704;KEYEM OFF! disable keystroke emulation
! send remote enable false
More complex example using an HP Series 300 Controller (see Figure 3-2):
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
470
480
490
500
510
CLEAR 704 ! Instrument preset
OUTPUT 704;SWPF;start 2000;stop 4000;level 0;level
! Sweep from 2 to 4 GHz at 0 dBm
OUTPUT 704;CH 2;off;CH 3;off;CH 4;OFF
OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;scale 1;rp 0;rl 0
! Manually scale ch 1, turn other channels off
!
OUTPUT 704;KEYEM ON! Enable key stroke emulation
!
! Local mode turns key stroke emulation on
WAIT 1! always wait before a local command
LOCAL 7
! send remote enable false
WAIT .01 ! always wait 10 ms after local command
!
! First, set up a limit line with 2 segments:
OUTPUT 704;LDBC2d4d-4d
! First half sets up slope limit with 2 GHz start freq
! and +/- 4 dB upper and lower limits
WAIT 1! wait 1 second to process key strokes
OUTPUT 704;3d3d-3d
! Second half sets 3 GHz stop freq and +/-3 dB limits
WAIT .5! wait to process key strokes
OUTPUT 704;LDBB3d3d-3d4d
! Now, set up flat limit from 3 to 4 GHz with
! +/- 3 dB upper and lower limits
WAIT 1! wait to process key strokes
OUTPUT 704;LDA! Turn limit lines on
WAIT 1! wait to process key strokes
!
OUTPUT 704;LCA! plot the current display
!
! Use go to remote feature to automatically wait
! for the end of the plotting function
REMOTE 704! go to remote
OUTPUT 704;CH 1;ON! Dummy bus command is not
! executed until analyzer finishes plotting
!
! Now continue with other key stroke functions
WAIT 1
LOCAL 7
! go to local sequence
WAIT .01
OUTPUT 704;LAEB! turn smoothing on
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-27
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
520
530
540
REMOTE 704! done with key stroke emulation
!
OUTPUT 704;KEYEM OFF! disable key stroke emulation
GIGA-TRONICS Precision Scalar Analyzer
CH1: SW A
1.0
dB /
REF 0.00 dBm
Model 8003
Jun 25, 2001 16:23:49
1
CH1
STRT
2.000 GHz
STOP
4.00 GHz
Figure 3-4: Plot Obtained Using More Complex HP Series 300 Prg. Example
3-28
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3.18
Memory Command Structure
MEMORY
Syntax:
MEMORY [us modifier] [ds numeric value]
Examples:
MEMORY;STORE 1
Store front panel setting in store/recall memory 1
MEMORY;RECALL 1
Recall front panel setting from store/recall memory 1
Modifiers:
Stores current front panel state in store/recall memory n.
Modifier name:
STORE
Modifier syntax:
STORE [ds numeric value]
valid numeric values:
0 through 9
assumed units:
no units (these are store/recall memories)
Recalls current front panel state from store/recall memory n.
Modifier name:
RECALL
Modifier syntax:
RECALL [ds numeric value]
valid numeric values:
0 through 9
assumed units:
no units (these are store/recall memories)
Description: The memory verb stores and recalls the entire instrument front panel state in the instrument’s store and recall memories.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-29
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.3.19
Measurement Query Command Structure
OUTPUT, OP
Output Current Data Syntax:
OP hs Channel Specifier us modifier [us modifier]
Output Current Data:
One form of the OP verb defines a measured data output. The data captured will be the
data measured on the channel indicated by the channel specifier which follows the output
verb. The format of the measured data depends upon the measurement mode and the
output request. If the channel is making a swept measurement and the data returned
represents the measured trace, the format is:
data(freq min),data(freq n),...,data(freq max) EOL.
See the section describing the swept measurement verb SWP on page 3-54 for more
details. If the channel is making a CW measurement and the data represents the
measured data point, the format is dataEOL.
See the section describing the CW power measurement verb POWER on page 3-36 for
more details. If the request is for cursor power measured at the cursor frequency, the
format definition can be found on page 3-31 using the CURP modifier.
Output Current Data Specifiers:
Channel Specifiers are 1, 2, 3, and 4
Output Current Data Modifiers:
This modifier defines the number of data items to be returned when the measured data is
requested for output to the host computer.
Modifier name:
ITEMS
Modifier Syntax:
ITEMS ds numerical value
valid numerical values:
1 to 512
assumed units:
no units
This modifier is used if the channel is making a swept measurement. The format of the
returned data is detailed in the section describing the swept measurement verb SWP on
page 3-54.
This modifier is to specify that a service request be sent upon completion of the measurement defined for this channel.
Modifier name:
SRQ
Modifier Syntax:
SRQ
Once the SRQ modifier is received, the 8003 will make the measurement specified for this
channel. If the number of averages defined for this channel has been satisfied, the event
complete bit is set in the external status register and the service request and the external
status bits are set in the instrument status byte.
3-30
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
The LIMIT modifier reads the PASS/FAIL status of a limit line test. This command
assumes that a limit line has been previously defined and turned on (see SWP command,
LIMIT modifier). When this command is received, the analyzer will read the PASS/FAIL
status of the indicated channels limit line test and wait to be talk-addressed by the controller. When talk-addressed, the analyzer will return the string PASS or FAIL according to the
results of the limit line test (PASS indicates that the channel’s trace was within the limits,
FAIL indicates outside the limits).
Modifier name:
LIMIT
Modifier syntax:
LIMIT
return data format:
PASS or FAIL
This modifier is to request that the power be measured at the cursor position (assumes
channel is in swept mode and that the cursor is turned on). The data returned will be in the
following format:
cursor data = freq, data EOL
freq = F
data = ±D
where F is a variable field number with three digits to the right of the decimal point in MHZ,
and D is a variable field number with three digits to the right of the decimal point in dBm or
dB.
Modifier name:
CURP
Modifier Syntax:
CURP
Output Current Data Example:
OP 3;srq;curp EOL
Output Current Data Related Command:
SWP
Output Stored Data:
The second form of the OP command sends TRACE, PATHCAL, or CALFACTOR data
from the 8003 to the controller. The data format is as follows:
start freq, stop freq, dataSTART DATA, ....., dataFREQ N,....dataSTOP FREQ
Output Stored Data Syntax:
OP us memory specifier hs sensor/trace specifier
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-31
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Output Stored Data Specifiers:
Memory specifiers are TRACE, PATHCAL, and CALFACTOR
Sensor specifiers are A, B, and C
Trace specifiers are 0 through 9
☛
NOTE: TRACE uses a Trace specifier, PATHCAL and CALFACTOR use Sensor specifiers.
Output Stored Data Format:
START FREQ,STOP FREQ (MHz)
then 512 data points for TRACE (dB)
then 4096 data points for PATHCAL
then 4096 data points for CALFACTOR
D.ddd
±ddd.dd
±ddd.dd
±ddd.dd
D = 0 to 6 digits
Output Stored Data Examples:
OUTPUT;TRACE 5
OUTPUT;PATHCAL A
OUTPUT;CALFACTOR C
Output Stored Data Related Command:
INPUT
Description: There are two forms of Output commands. One form outputs currently measured data.
The other form outputs stored data such as Trace memories, Path Cal memories, and
sensor Cal Factor memories. These forms have completely different syntaxes but share
the same verb. Users are cautioned to make note of the difference between the two. The
Output Current Data and the Output Stored Data descriptions starting on page 3-31.
3-32
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3.20
Plot Command Structure
PLOT
Syntax:
PLOT us modifier [us modifier] [us SRQ]
Examples:
PLOT;ALL;SRQ
Full size plot of all parameters, assert SRQ when done.
PLOT;LOWR;SRQ
Plot in lower right quadrant, assert SRQ when done.
PLOT;CUSTOM;GRID;FREQ_LB;SRQ
Custom plot of grid and frequency labels only, assert SRQ when done.
PLOT;CUSTOM;SCALE
Make analyzer read new P1, P2 plotter coordinates
PLOT;CUSTOM;DEF_LOGO;NEW LOGO
Plots NEW LOGO instead of Giga-tronics logo
Modifiers:
Does a full size plot with all parameters
Modifier name:
ALL
Modifier syntax:
ALL
Modifier Description:
Does a plot in the upper left (UPL), upper right (UPR),
lower left (LOWL), or lower right (LOWR) quadrants of
the paper.
Modifier name:
UPL, UPR, LOWL, or LOWR
Modifier syntax:
UPL, UPR, LOWL, or LOWR
Modifier Description:
Does a special plot of trace only (SP_TRACE), labels
only (SP_LABEL), or frequencies only (SP_FREQ).
Modifier name:
SP_TRACE, SP_LABEL, or SP_FREQ
Modifier syntax:
SP_TRACE, SP_LABEL, or SP_FREQ
Modifier Description:
Asserts GPIB SRQ at the end of a plot. The system
controller would normally use an interrupt service
routine to take action once the analyzer asserts SRQ.
An SRQ can be cleared by doing a GPIB serial poll of
the analyzer.
Modifier name:
SRQ
Modifier Description:
Does a custom plot with user defined features. The
modifier CUSTOM should be followed by a set of modifiers that define the custom plot (see examples next
page).
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-33
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Modifier name:
CUSTOM
Modifier syntax:
CUSTOM [us modifier] ... [us modifier]
Custom Modifiers:
Modifier Description:
See page 2-29 for a brief description of the GRID,
FREQ_LB, SUMMARY, SCALE, and LABEL modifiers.
Modifier name:
GRID, FREQ_LB, SUMMARY, SCALE, and LABEL
Modifier syntax:
GRID, FREQ_LB, SUMMARY, SCALE, and LABEL
Modifier Description:
The trace modifier for CUSTOM determines which
channel(s) are plotted.
Modifier name:
TRACE
Modifier syntax:
TRACE ds numerical value
valid numerical value:
0 to 4
assumed units:
no units (This is the channel number)
Modifier Description:
The logo modifier for CUSTOM plots the Giga-tronics
logo and date at the top of the plot.
Modifier name:
LOGO
Modifier Description:
The def_logo modifier for CUSTOM plots a user-defined
string instead of the Giga-tronics logo.
Modifier name:
DEF_LOGO
Modifier syntax:
DEF_LOGO us label
where label is an alphanumeric string up to 50 characters long.
Description: The plot verb makes various plots of the display on a plotter connected to the analyzer’s
private GPIB bus. For a detailed description of the different types of plots, please see the
Plot & Print Softkey description starting on page 2-27 in the OPERATION chapter of this
manual. Since plots may take more than a minute to complete, it is strongly advised to use
the SRQ function to detect when the plot is finished (see the example of a typical Plotter
Command program on page 3-35.)
3-34
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Plotter Command Programming Example
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
470
480
490
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
!**********************************************************
! PLOTTER COMMAND DEMONSTRATION
!**********************************************************
!
CLEAR 704 ! device clear presets analyzer
WAIT 4
!
OUTPUT 704;SWP 1,A;on;SWP 2,A;off;CHAN 3;off;CHAN 4;off
OUTPUT 704;SWPF;start 2000;stop 4000;level 10;level on;swpt 300
WAIT 3! wait for sweeper to digest changes and output clean sweep
OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;scale auto! autoscale trace
WAIT 1
!
!........................................................
BEEP
INPUT Press RETURN when plotter is ready for demo ... , Inp$
! First set up controller to use SRQ s
ON INTR 7 GOSUB Service srq
ENABLE INTR 7;2
!
GOTO Jumparound
! Full size plot of entire display
OUTPUT 704;PLOT;all;srq
GOSUB Wait for srq
!
PAUSE
! Plot entire display in lower right hand quadrant
OUTPUT 704;PLOT;lowr;srq
GOSUB Wait for srq
!
PAUSE
! Custom plot with trace and frequency readouts only
OUTPUT 704;PLOT;custom;trace 1;freq lb;srq
GOSUB Wait for srq
!
PAUSE
Jumparound:!
! Custom plot with logo changed
OUTPUT 704;PLOT;custom;grid;trace 1;def logo MY COMPANY NAME1234
! Note that HP Basic requires double quotes to insert a quotation
! mark within a quoted string
STOP
!...........................................................
!
! Various subroutines:
!
Wait for srq:! This subroutine waits until an SRQ occurs
Received srq=0! Clear flag to stay in next loop
WHILE Received srq=0! Exit loop only when srq service sets flag
END WHILE
Status1=SPOLL(704)! Serial poll clears srq message
ENABLE INTR 7;2! Re-enable interrupts
RETURN
!
Service srq:!
Received srq=1! Set srq flag when interrupt received
RETURN
!...........................................................
END
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-35
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.3.21
CW Power Measurement Command Structure
POWER
Syntax:
POWER [?] hs channel specifier [ds sensor specifier] [us trigger mode] [us modifiers]
Specifiers:
Channel specifier:
1 through 4
Sensor specifier:
A, B, C, (A/B, A/C, B/A, B/C, C/A, C/B, A-B, A-C, B-A,
B-C, C-A, or C-B allowed for trigger mode TØ only)
Trigger Modes:
Trigger mode syntax:
TØ, T1, T2, T3
Default trigger mode:
TØ
General Description:
Once the trigger mode is set, the 8003 will remain in that trigger mode until another trigger
mode command is sent. If the POWER command is sent with one of the fast data modes
(T1 through T3), the analyzer will freeze its display to maximize data rate through the
GPIB bus. When any one channel is put in one of the fast data modes, all channels
change to the same fast data mode. To place the instrument in the standard TØ mode with
display updates, do any of the following:
•
Send the POWER command with mode TØ
•
Send a DEVICE CLEAR bus command to the analyzer
•
Send an INTERFACE CLEAR bus command
•
Put the instrument in LOCAL mode - either manually or over the bus
In the fast data modes (T1 through T3), it is advisable to use the RDTEMP command to
periodically update low level temperature and offset drift correction. See the description
for the RDTEMP command in Section 3.3.22.
Normal CW Mode:
Trigger mode name:
TØ
This is the analyzer’s default power-up mode. In this mode, the analyzer free-runs at a
relatively slow data rate. The mode offers familiar power meter functionality to the user
with channel ratioing and differences, averaging, max and min holds, and relative
measurements - although at a slower reading rate than the fast CW modes described
below. When the analyzer receives an OUTPUT [channel#] command over the bus, it will
send the current power reading for that channel to the controller (see the OUTPUT
command description in Section 3.3.19 for more information). The power reading is
corrected for Cal Factor, temperature, and low-level offsets. Reading rate is fairly slow
(greater than 10 readings per second). The analyzer will wait until it is talk addressed, and
then it will return the reading in the format ±ddd.dd in dB.
Fast Free-run CW Mode:
Trigger mode name:
T1
In this mode, the analyzer makes high speed CW power measurements. The analyzer
free runs but does not update the display to maximize measurement speed. The free-run
mode is the simplest to use, and is intended for ATE measurements where the timing of
the reading is not extremely critical. All four channels may be used and configured in any
sequence of sensors but channels are restricted to single-sensor-per-channel measure-
3-36
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
ments only (no ratios or differences). Every measurement cycle, the analyzer takes a
reading for each active channel (or n readings if the AVG n modifier is specified). Note that
the averaging number may be different for each channel. Whenever the analyzer is talk
addressed, it sends the most recent (averaged) reading from each active channel to the
controller. The OUTPUT command is not required before talk-addressing the analyzer.
Unlike the TØ mode, the T1 mode will send the data for all active channels when talk
addressed. The data returns in the format:
±ddd.dd,±ddd.dd,...,±ddd.dd
with one data item for each active channel separated by commas. The T1 mode is
capable of measurement speed in excess of 180 measurements per second.
Fast Bus Triggered CW Mode:
Trigger mode name:
T2
This is also a high speed CW reading mode with display updates suppressed. This mode
is very similar to the T1 mode described above except that the analyzer does not free run,
but instead waits for a trigger from the controller. This allows precise timing of measurement events in the system. The trigger is the GPIB Group Execute Trigger (GET)
command. Note that there are both addressed and universal versions of the GET
command so that just the analyzer, or all instruments on the bus can be triggered. When
the trigger is received, the analyzer takes a reading on each active channel (or n readings
if AVG n is specified) and then waits to be talk addressed. When talk addressed, the
analyzer sends each channel’s data to the controller in the serial fashion described above.
Note that in the triggered mode, the 8003 expects the controller to read the data after the
trigger is received. In the Free Run Mode (T1), the controller never needs to read the data.
An additional capability in Triggered Mode is the use of data buffers for each active
channel. Buffering the data allows the analyzer to measure even faster since it does not
have to output the data between readings. Buffering is requested by adding the ITEMS n
modifier to the POWER command (see the ITEMS modifier under the T2 MODIFIERS
section on page 3-40).
For full GPIB handshaking with buffered measurements, see the SRQ modifier description
under the T2 MODIFIERS section on page 3-40 also.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-37
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Fast TTL Triggered CW Mode:
Trigger mode name:
T3
This mode is exactly like the T2 mode described above except that the analyzer is
triggered by a TTL signal provided to the 8003 rear panel BNC input marked INPUT 1/TTL
LEVELS. The mode should be used when it is more convenient, or more accurate to time
the measurement by a digital TTL signal, rather than a GPIB bus command. The
measurement is edge triggered - that is, the 8003 waits to see a TTL-transition from low to
high at the input before triggering the reading. The TTL-high signal must be present for at
least 500 ms for the analyzer to see it. Buffers may be used in this mode and are
described in the ITEMS modifier description for T3 mode on page 3-41. Note that care
must be taken in this mode to ensure that the signal source’s (or UUT’s) output power is
completely settled before giving the TTL trigger.
For full TTL handshaking with buffered measurements, see the RFT modifier description
under the T3 MODIFIERS section on page 3-41. A typical programming example for the
Fast TTL Triggered mode is shown on page 3-47.
Modifiers:
3-38
Modifiers Common To All Trigger Modes
Modifier Description:
This modifier turns on a specified channel in CW power
measurement mode.
Modifier Name:
ON,+
Modifier Syntax:
ON
Modifier Description:
This modifier turns off the specified channel.
Modifier Name:
OFF,-
Modifier Syntax:
OFF
Modifier Description:
This modifier determines the average factor for the
measurement. In TØ mode, averaging works like a
continuous filter, with each subsequent reading taken
from the end of the filter. To dump the filter and restart
averaging, use the RESET or RS modifier. In T1, T2,
and T3 modes, each reading is newly averaged n times.
Modifier Name:
AVERAGE, AVG
Modifier Syntax 1:
AVG hs numerical value
Valid numerical units:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256
Modifier Syntax 2:
AVG hs state
State definition:
ON, +, OFF, -, RESET, RS
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Modifiers:
Modifiers:
Modifiers Used Only With TØ Mode
Modifier Description:
This modifier places the instrument in max hold mode.
Every time the analyzer is talk-addressed, the instrument will output the maximum reading seen since the
mode was activated.
Modifier name:
MAXH
Modifier syntax:
MAXH hs state
State definition:
ON, +, OFF, -
Modifier Description:
This modifier places the instrument in min hold mode.
Every time the analyzer is talk-addressed, the instrument will output the minimum power reading seen since
the mode was activated.
Modifier name:
MINH
Modifier syntax:
MINH hs state
State definition:
ON, +, OFF, -
Modifier Description:
This modifier places the measurement in relative
reading mode. When the command is received by the
analyzer, it takes the current power reading and stores it
as a reference. Every time the analyzer is talkaddressed, the instrument will output the difference
between the current reading and the stored reference
reading (in dB).
Modifier name:
REL
Modifier syntax:
REL hs state
State definition:
ON, +, OFF, -
Modifier Description:
SRQ in TØ mode operates slightly differently than SRQ
in T2 mode. In the TØ mode, when the SRQ modifier is
sent the analyzer will wait until the number of averages
defined for the channel has been completed. The
analyzer will then set the event complete bit in the
external status register. The service request and
external status bits are set in the instrument status byte.
The SRQ interrupt line on the GPIB bus is asserted.
This should cause an interrupt in the external controller
which may be handled by an interrupt service routine.
Modifier name:
SRQ
Modifiers Used Only With T1 Mode:
NONE:
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
There are no modifiers specific to the T1 mode.
3-39
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Modifiers:
3-40
Modifiers Used Only With T2 Mode
Modifier Description:
ITEMS activates buffered readings in T2 mode. A Buffer
is memory internal to the analyzer set aside to store
readings. The memory is user defined to any length
between 1 and 512 readings. In buffered reading mode,
the analyzer directs readings to the buffer memory until
the buffer is full. When talk-addressed, the analyzer then
sends the entire buffer full of readings to the controller.
Buffering the data allows the analyzer to measure even
faster since it does not have to output the data to the
controller between each reading. Once a buffer is
specified for one channel, all active channels must use a
buffer of the same size. The last ITEMS n command
received determines the buffer size for all channels.
When n=1 or when ITEMS is not specified, the triggered
mode waits to be talk-addressed after each reading. For
buffer sizes greater than 1, the analyzer does not wait to
be talk-addressed after each trigger, but instead adds
the new reading to each active channel’s buffer. When
the buffer is full, the analyzer halts and waits to be talkaddressed. When talk-addressed, the analyzer sends
the buffered readings to the controller. The entire buffer
for the lowest channel number is sent first, followed by
the buffer for the next highest channel number, and so
on, until all buffers are sent. Each individual data item is
separated from the next by a comma, and data from the
end of one buffer and the beginning of the next is simply
separated by a comma.
Modifier name:
ITEMS
Modifier syntax:
ITEMS hs numerical value
Valid numerical values:
Any integer between 1 and 512
Modifier Description:
SRQ sets up a GPIB handshake for buffered readings in
T2 mode. In GPIB-triggered mode, the analyzer ignores
extra triggers that may occur while the analyzer is
occupied with a reading. When data buffers are used,
this may lead to a situation where the controller thinks
that the 8003 should be through taking data, while the
8003 is waiting for more triggers. One way around this
problem is to ensure that the trigger rate is below the
8003’s maximum data rate. Another way is to use the
optional SRQ modifier to provide a full GPIB handshake.
When the SRQ modifier is added to the POWER
command, the analyzer will assert the bus SRQ line
after it completes each reading. The controller software
must then be written to wait for the SRQ interrupt before
giving another trigger. Due to the overhead of processing the SRQ interrupt, full handshake operation may be
slower than single-ended triggering of the readings.
Modifier name:
SRQ
Modifier syntax:
SRQ
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Modifiers:
Modifiers Used Only With T3 Mode
Modifier Description:
ITEMS activates buffered readings in T3 mode. A Buffer
is memory internal to the analyzer set aside to store
readings. The memory is user defined to any length
between 1 and 512 readings. In buffered reading mode,
the analyzer directs readings to the buffer memory until
the buffer is full. When talk-addressed, the analyzer then
sends the entire buffer full of readings to the controller.
Buffering the data allows the analyzer to measure even
faster since it does not have to output the data to the
controller between each reading. Once a buffer is
specified for one channel, all active channels must use a
buffer of the same size. The last ITEMS n command
received determines the buffer size for all channels.
When n=1 or when ITEMS is not specified, the triggered
mode waits to be talk-addressed after each reading. For
buffer sizes greater than 1, the analyzer does not wait to
be talk-addressed after each trigger, but instead adds
the new reading to each active channel’s buffer. When
the buffer is full, the analyzer halts and waits to be talkaddressed. When talk-addressed, the analyzer sends
the buffered readings to the controller. The entire buffer
for the lowest channel number is sent first, followed by
the buffer for the next highest channel number, and so
on, until all buffers are sent. Each individual data item is
separated from the next by a comma, and data from the
end of one buffer and the beginning of the next is simply
separated by a comma.
Modifier name:
ITEMS
Modifier syntax:
ITEMS hs numerical value
Valid numerical values:
Any integer between 1 and 512
Modifier Description:
The RFT (Ready For Trigger) modifier provides a full
hardware handshake for TTL-triggered readings. As
with GPIB-triggered readings, the 8003 will ignore extra
hardware triggers that occur before it is ready to take
another reading. In the TTL-triggered mode, an optional
hardware handshake is provided which is analogous to
the SRQ handshake used in the GPIB-triggered mode.
The hardware handshake mode with data buffers is the
analyzer’s fastest way to collect data. Single channel
reading speeds of greater than 400 readings per second
are possible in this mode. To use the hardware
handshake, add the RFT modifier to the POWER
command (this assumes you have already selected T3
mode). The AC MOD OUT connector on the 8003
provides the hardware handshake. If the RFT modifier is
given, the 8003 provides a TTL-high at the AC MOD
OUT connector until it receives a hardware trigger on its
INPUT 1 connector. It then sets AC MOD OUT to TTLlow while it is busy processing the reading. When it has
finished the reading, the 8003 toggles the AC MOD OUT
connector back to TTL-high. Appropriate circuitry in the
test system can decode and use this signal to complete
the handshake. There are a couple of timing consider-
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-41
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
ations that must be observed. First, when the 8003
asserts AC MOD OUT high to indicate Ready for
Trigger, the test system must wait for at least 500 µs
before pulling the INPUT 1 trigger line high. Second, the
INPUT 1 trigger must be kept high for at least 500 m.
Modifier name:
RFT
Modifier syntax:
RFT
Description: The 8003 analyzer offers a very powerful and flexible CW measurement capability over
the GPIB bus. Four modes of CW measurements allow 1) slow readings with display
updates, 2) fast free-running measurements, 3) fast GPIB-triggered measurements, and
4) fast TTL-triggered measurements. Single channel reading rates in excess of 300
readings per second are achievable in the fast data modes. In addition, the fast GPIB and
TTL-triggered modes both allow the optional use of internal data buffers and bus or
hardware handshakes to maximize system throughput.
CW power measurements are made over the GPIB bus using the POWER command.
See the Fast-CW Mode Programming Example starting on page 3-43.
See the Tri-Triggered Fast-CW Mode Programming Example on page 3-47.
See the Fast Step CW Measurement Mode Programming Example on page 3-48.
3-42
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Fast-CW Mode Programming Example
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
470
480
490
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
600
610
620
630
640
!**********************************************************
! PROGRAM TO DEMONSTRATE MEASUREMENT SPEED OF
! GIGA-TRONICS 8003 PRECISION SCALAR ANALYZER RUNNING IN
! fast-cw MODE.
! COPYRIGHT 2001 GIGA-TRONICS INC.
!
! This program assumes:
! 1) Analyzer at GPIB address 4
! 2) Sweeper in CW mode and set to desired power level
! 3) Sensor plugged into A input and connected to sweeper output
!
!************************************************************
!
OPTION BASE 1! All arrays start at index 1
INTEGER Maxcount,Counter
!
CLEAR 704 ! Send device clear to preset the analyzer
!
OUTPUT 704;READOUT! Numeric screen format
OUTPUT 704;POWER 1,A! Channel 1 reads sensor A
OUTPUT 704;CHAN 1;ON;CHAN 2;OFF;CHAN 3;OFF;CHAN 4;OFF
!
! Set up sweeper for measurement
! CW, 2 GHz, RF on, 0 dBm
OUTPUT 704;FIXED;FREQ 2000;LEVEL ON;LEVEL 0
WAIT 2! Wait for sweeper to set up parameters
!
!..........................................................
! MEASUREMENT OF FREE RUNNING FAST CW MODE MEASUREMENT SPEED
!
! Example of zeroing sensor first (use only for low level msmts)
ON INTR 7 GOSUB Zero srq! SRQ service routine
Srq flag=0! Clear srq flag
ENABLE INTR 7;2! Enable interrupts
OUTPUT 704;ZERO A;srq! Zero sensor A, assert SRQ when done
WHILE Srq flag=0! Endless loop while waiting for zero
END WHILE ! (of course, program could be doing
! something else)
WAIT 1
!
OUTPUT 704;POWER 1;T1! Set free running fast cw mode = T1
WAIT 1! IMPORTANT** wait for analyzer to change modes and update
!
temperature correction
!
OUTPUT 704;POWER 1;AVG OFF! No averaging for this example
!
! Example of updating temp and low level calibration
OUTPUT 704;RDTEMP!
WAIT 1! Wait to complete command
!
GOTO Msmt loop! Jump around srq service routine
Zero srq: Srq flag=1! srq service routine sets srq flag
Status 8003=SPOLL(704)! serial poll clears srq message
ENABLE INTR 7;2! re-enable interrupts
RETURN
!
Msmt loop:!
! Initialize loop variables
Maxcount=1000! Take 1000 readings
Counter=0 ! Initialize counter
!
! MAIN LOOP
Starttime=TIMEDATE
WHILE Counter<Maxcount
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-43
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
650
660
670
680
690
700
710
720
730
740
750
760
770
780
790
800
810
820
830
840
850
860
870
880
890
900
910
920
930
940
950
960
970
980
990
1000
1010
1020
1030
1040
1050
1060
1070
1080
1090
1100
1110
1120
1130
1140
1150
1160
1170
1180
1190
1200
1210
1220
1230
1240
1250
1260
1270
1280
1290
3-44
ENTER 704;Reading! In free running mode, analyzer gives last readin
! any time that it is talk-addressed.
Counter=Counter+1
END WHILE
Tottime=TIMEDATE-Starttime
OUTPUT 704;PWR 1;T0! Good housekeeping returns to display update mode
WAIT 1! Always wait after mode change
!
PRINT Free running mode msmts/second = ;Maxcount/Tottime,Power = ;Rea
!
!.............................................................
! MEASUREMENT OF TRIGGERED FAST CW MODE MEASUREMENT SPEED
!
OUTPUT 704;PWR 1;T2! First set triggered fast cw mode = T2
WAIT 1! IMPORTANT** wait for analyzer to change modes and update
! temperature correction
!
! Initialize loop variables
Maxcount=1000! Take 1000 readings
Counter=0 ! Initialize counter
!
! MAIN LOOP
Starttime=TIMEDATE
WHILE Counter<Maxcount
TRIGGER 704! Triggered mode requires Group Execute Trigger
ENTER 704;Reading
Counter=Counter+1
END WHILE
Tottime=TIMEDATE-Starttime
!
PRINT Triggered mode msmts/second = ;Maxcount/Tottime,Power = ;Readin
!
OUTPUT 704;PWR 1;T0! Good housekeeping to return analyzer to
! standard cw mode to update display
WAIT 1
!
!.............................................................
! EXAMPLE OF 2 CHANNEL MEASUREMENT IN FAST-TRIGGERED MODE
!
OUTPUT 704;POWER 1,A;ON;POWER 2,A;ON;CHAN 3;OFF;CHAN 4;OFF
! Note that both channels are reading the same sensor A. This is just
! for convenience in running a demo. It is just as easy to define
! channel 2 to read sensor B. With 2 different sensors, the msmt speed
! is almost identical to the code running here.
!
OUTPUT 704;PWR 1;T2! First set triggered fast cw mode = T2
WAIT 1! IMPORTANT** wait for analyzer to change modes and update
! temperature correction
!
! Initialize loop variables
Maxcount=1000! Take 1000 readings
Counter=0 ! Initialize counter
!
! MAIN LOOP
Starttime=TIMEDATE
WHILE Counter<Maxcount
TRIGGER 704! Triggered mode requires Group Execute Trigger
ENTER 704;Reading a,Reading b
! Now, analyzer returns 2 readings for every trigger
Counter=Counter+1
END WHILE
Tottime=TIMEDATE-Starttime
!
PRINT Sensor A = ;Reading a;, Sensor B = ;Reading b
PRINT 2-channel msmt speed = ;Maxcount/Tottime; rdgs/second
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
1300
1310
1320
1330
1340
1350
1360
1370
1380
1390
1400
1410
1420
1430
1440
1450
1460
1470
1480
1490
1500
1510
1520
1530
1540
1550
1560
1570
1580
1590
1600
1610
1620
1630
1640
1650
1660
1670
1680
1690
1700
1710
1720
1730
1740
1750
1760
!
OUTPUT 704;PWR 1;T0! Good housekeeping to return analyzer to
! standard cw mode to update display
WAIT 1
!.............................................................
! EXAMPLE OF BUFFERED MEASUREMENTS IN FAST-TRIGGERED MODE
!
OUTPUT 704;POWER 1,A;ON;POWER 2,A;ON;CHAN 3;OFF;CHAN 4;OFF
! Read from 2 channels in this example
!
! ***** THE ITEMS n COMMAND SETS THE BUFFER SIZE *****
OUTPUT 704;PWR 1;T2;ITEMS 100! Triggered fast cw mode = T2
! Also, buffer of 100 elements set for each active channel
WAIT 1! IMPORTANT** wait for analyzer to change modes and update
! temperature correction
!
DIM Buffer a(100), Buffer b(100)
! MAIN LOOP
FOR Reading=1 TO 100
TRIGGER 704! Triggered mode requires Group Execute Trigger
! Analyzer automatically buffers one reading per channel for
!
each trigger
WAIT .005! Important to not send new trigger before analyzer is
! ready to accept it. See T1 mode description
NEXT Reading
!
! Now read buffers from the analyzer
OUTPUT 704;OUTPUT 1! Tell analyzer to send buffers
ENTER 704;Buffer a(*),Buffer b(*)
!
! Print buffers
FOR I=1 TO 100
PRINT I; Chan A = ;Buffer a(I); Chan B = ;Buffer b(I)
NEXT I
!
OUTPUT 704;PWR 1;T0! Good housekeeping to return analyzer to
! standard cw mode to update display
!
!.............................................................
! EXAMPLE OF BUFFERED MODE WITH FULL GPIB HANDSHAKE
!
OUTPUT 704;POWER 1,A;ON;CH 2;OFF;CH 3;OFF;CH 4;OFF
! Use only channel 1 for this example
!
! *** THE SRQ MODIFIER TELLS ANALYZER TO ASSERT SRQ AFTER EVERY READING
! Use GPIB triggered mode with 100 element buffer
OUTPUT 704;POWER 1;T2;ITEMS 100;SRQ
1770
1780
1790
1800
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
1860
1870
1880
1890
1900
1910
1920
1930
WAIT 1! IMPORTANT** wait for analyzer to change modes and update
! temperature correction
!
! SET UP INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINE TO HANDLE SRQ
Srq flag=0! Reset interrupt service routine flag
ON INTR 7 GOSUB Reading srq
ENABLE INTR 7;2
!
! MAIN LOOP
FOR Reading=1 TO 100
TRIGGER 704! Triggered mode requires Group Execute Trigger
! Analyzer automatically buffers one reading per channel for
!
each trigger
WHILE Srq flag=0! Infinite loop waits for reading SRQ
END WHILE
NEXT Reading
!
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-45
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
1940
1950
1960
1970
1980
1990
2000
2010
2020
2030
2040
2050
2060
2070
2080
2090
2100
2110
2120
3-46
! NOW READ BUFFER FROM ANALYZER
ENTER 704;Buffer a(*)
!
! Print buffer
FOR I=1 TO 100
PRINT I; Chan A = ;Buffer a(I)
NEXT I
!
OUTPUT 704;PWR 1;T0! Good housekeeping to return analyzer to
! standard cw mode to update display
STOP
!
! INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINE FOR READING SRQ
Reading srq:!
Srq flag=1! Set SRQ flag
Status=SPOLL(704)! Serial poll clears srq
ENABLE INTR 7;2! Re-enable interrupts
RETURN
END
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
TTL-Triggered Fast-CW Measurement Programming Example
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
470
480
490
500
510
520
530
540
!*********************************************************
! PROGRAM TO DEMONSTRATE AN APPLICATION OF TTL-TRIGGERED
! FAST CW MEASUREMENTS
!
! COPYRIGHT 2001 GIGA-TRONICS INC.
!
! This program assumes:
! 1) Analyzer at GPIB address 4
! 2) Gigatronics 7200 Sweeper on the system bus at GPIB address 20
! 3) Sensors plugged into A and B channel inputs
!
!***************************************************************
!
OPTION BASE 1
DIM Buffer a(181),Buffer b(181)
!
! FIRST CONFIGURE THE ANALYZER
CLEAR 704 ! Send device clear to preset the analyzer
OUTPUT 704;READOUT! Numeric screen format
OUTPUT 704;POWER 1,A;POWER 2,C;CHAN 3;OFF;CHAN 4;OFF
! Channel 1 reads incident power, chan 2 reads output power
!
! SET UP GIGATRONICS 7200 SIGNAL GENERATOR IN DIGITAL STEP SWEEP MODE
OUTPUT 720;GA2GZ! Start frequency of 2 GHz
OUTPUT 720;GB20GZ! Stop frequency of 20 GHz
OUTPUT 720;GC100MZ! Step frequency of 100 MHz
OUTPUT 720;GD10MS! Step dwell time of 10 ms
OUTPUT 720;PL0DB! Output power level of 0 dBm
OUTPUT 720;RF1! Turn the RF on
WAIT 3! Wait for the sig gen to set up parameters
!
!...............................................................
! MEASUREMENT OF INCIDENT AND OUTPUT POWER DURING DIGITAL STEP SWEEP
!
USING TTL TRIGGER TO MAKE 8003 POWER READINGS
!
OUTPUT 704;PWR 1;T3;ITEMS 181
WAIT 1! IMPORTANT to allow analyzer to process trigger mode change
! TTL trigger mode with 501 item buffer on channels 1 and 2
! Analyzer is now armed and ready. Any TTL triggers received
!
will trigger a reading on each channel and stuff in buffer
!
OUTPUT 720;D2! Now, trigger synthesizer to take a single sweep
WAIT 10! Wait for step sweep to finish
!
OUTPUT 704;OUTPUT 1! Tell analyzer to output data
ENTER 704;Buffer a(*),Buffer b(*)
! Analyzer outputs channel A buffer first, then chan B buffer
PRINT Buffer a(*);
PRINT Buffer b(*);
!
OUTPUT 704;POWER 1;T0! Good housekeeping to return analyzer
! to display update mode
WAIT 1
END
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-47
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Fast Step CW Measurement Mode Programming Example
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
410
420
430
440
450
3-48
!***************************************************************
! PROGRAM TO DEMONSTRATE FAST CW MEASUREMENTS USING
! GIGA-TRONICS 8003 PRECISION SCALAR ANALYZER RUNNING IN
! fast-cw MODE
! COPYRIGHT 2001 GIGA-TRONICS INC.
!
! The program assumes:
! 1) Analyzer at GPIB address 4
! 2) Sweeper connected to 8003 private bus
! 3) Sweeper capable of 8-12 GHz freq range and +10 dBm output
! 4) Sensor connected to 8003 channel A input and sweeper output
!***************************************************************
!
CLEAR 704 ! Send device clear to preset the analyzer
!
OUTPUT 704;CHAN 1;ON;CHAN 2;OFF;CHAN 3;OFF;CHAN 4;OFF
OUTPUT 704;READOUT! Numeric screen format
!
! Set up sweeper for stepped-CW operation at +10 dBm
OUTPUT 704;FIXED;FREQ 8000;LEVEL ON;LEVEL 10
WAIT 2
!
! This next command puts the analyzer in power meter mode, displaying
! power from sensor A on channel 1.
OUTPUT 704;PWR 1,A;AVG OFF
WAIT 2! Not necessary, but allows number on display
!
OUTPUT 704;PWR 1;T2! First set triggered fast cw mode = T2
WAIT 1! IMPORTANT** wait for analyzer to change modes and update
! temperature correction
!
! MAIN ROUTINE
! Steps sweeper from 8 to 12 GHz in 100 MHz steps and measures power
!
FOR I=8000 TO 12000 STEP 100
OUTPUT 704;FIXED;FREQ ;I! Change sweeper frequency
WAIT .4! User adjust for sweeper settling time
TRIGGER 704! Trigger 8003 to make fast cw measurement
ENTER 704;Reading! Read power
PRINT I;Reading
NEXT I
!
OUTPUT 704;PWR 1;T0! Good housekeeping to return to standard
! cw measurement mode so that display updates
END
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3.22
Temperature & Low Level Offset Update Structure
RDTEMP
Syntax:
RDTEMP hs sensor specifier
Specifiers:
A, B, or C
Output format for temperature:
dd.d
Assumed units:
degrees C
Description: In the fast CW measurement modes (trigger modes T1 through T3 of the POWER
command), temperature and low level correction are turned off to maximize the measurement speed. At most power levels (>-50 dBm), this causes negligible reading error. At very
low power levels, the RDTEMP command should be used before each fast measurement
run to update temperature and low level offset drift.
If the analyzer is listen addressed immediately after the RDTEMP command, it will also
output the temperature in degrees Celsius for the sensor.
3.3.23
Print Definition Command Structure
PRINT
Syntax:
PRINT us modifier EOL
Examples:
PRINT;paint;SRQ
PRINT;laser’SRQ
Modifiers:
This modifier defines the type of printer to be receiving the raster scan plot as an HP INK
JET PRINTER.
Modifier name:
INK
Modifier Syntax:
INK
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines the type of printer to be receiving
the raster scan plot as an HP PAINT JET PRINTER.
Modifier name:
PAINT
Modifier Syntax:
PAINT
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines the type of printer to be receiving
the raster scan plot as an HP LASER JET+ PRINTER.
Modifier name:
LASER
Modifier Syntax:
LASER
Modifier Description:
Asserts GPIB SRQ at the end of a print routine. The
system controller would normally use an interrupt
service routine to take action once the analyzer asserts
SRQ. An SRQ can be cleared by doing a GPIB serial
poll of the analyzer.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-49
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Description: This verb drives an external Ink Jet or Paint Jet printer through the analyzer’s private GPIB
bus (or Laser Jet printer connected to the analyzer’s RS-232 bus). The 8003 does a
screen dump to the printer in the raster scan mode - capturing everything currently on the
screen. Because the print takes a considerable (and variable) amount of time to execute, it
is highly recommended to use the SRQ modifier to tell the controller when the print is
finished.
3.3.24
Readout Display Definition Command Structure
READOUT, TEXT, TXT
Syntax:
TXT
Example:
READOUT
Related Command:
POWER
Description: This verb places the 8003 display in the readout (non-graph) mode. There are no channel
or sensor specifiers and no modifiers.
3-50
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3.25
Sensor Definition Command Structure
SENSOR, SEN
Syntax:
SEN hs Sensor Specifier [us modifier]..[us modifier]
Specifiers:
Modifiers:
A, B, and C
This Modifier defines an offset in dBs for the sensor.
Modifier name:
OFFSET, OS, ATTN
Modifier Syntax:
OS ds numerical value
numerical value range:
-90.00 to +90.00
numerical resolution:
0.01
assumed units:
dB
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines the detection mode as AC
detection for the sensor specified.
Modifier name:
AC
Modifier Syntax:
AC
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines the detection mode as DC
detection for the sensor specified
Modifier name:
DC
Modifier Syntax:
DC
Description: There are two separate formats that use the SWP verb. One form (described above)
defines a current Swept power measurement mode and attributes for a channel. The
second form (described starting on page 3-60) measures TRACE, PATHCAL, and
CALFACTOR data that will be stored to be used with future measurements.
Modifiers Specific to 8034XA Series Peak Sensors Only
The 8034XA Series Peak Sensors allow measurement of pulsed RF signals. Unlike the standard CW
sensors, the Peak Sensors require a trigger signal. The Peak Sensors capture the instantaneous power
at the moment of the trigger and hold the value until the next trigger. The Peak Sensors offer three different trigger modes - one internal free-running trigger mode, and two external trigger modes. The following modifiers choose between the three trigger modes. For Section 3.3.25, the examples have been
provided after their modifier unlike the previous sections, due to numerous modifiers for the 8034XA.
Examples:
SEN R A;ac;attn -10.5;SEN B;dc;SEN C;dc
SENSOR A;FREERUN
SEN B;dlytrig
Modifier Description:
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
The FREERUN modifier puts the Peak Sensor in free
running trigger mode. This mode is primarily intended
for measuring CW signals (where no external trigger is
available) with the Peak Sensor. Triggers are internally
generated at approximately 1 kHz rate.
3-51
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Modifier Name:
FREERUN
Modifier Syntax:
FREERUN
Modifier Description:
The TRIG modifier puts the Peak Sensor in trigger
immediate mode. In this mode, when a TTL transition
from low to high occurs at the trigger input connector on
the sensor, the Peak Sensor captures and holds the
instantaneous peak power. The internal delay from TTL
trigger to actual power capture is nominally 250 ns. The
user is expected to externally synchronize the trigger to
read at the desired point in the pulse.
Modifier Name:
TRIG
Modifier Syntax:
TRIG
Modifier Description:
The DLYTRIG modifier puts the Peak Sensor in delayed
trigger mode. This mode is similar to the one above
except that a fixed delay is added after the trigger,
before the sensor reads the RF pulse power. This delay
is factory set (or can be adjusted by changing a potentiometer setting on the Peak Sensor circuit board). It’s
nominal value is 500 ns and can be manually adjusted
from 500 ns to 3 m.
Modifier Name:
DLYTRIG
Modifier Syntax:
DLYTRIG
Description: This verb ascribes attributes to a sensor. Such features as AC or DC detection and offsets
are attributed to a given sensor by a command string beginning with this verb.
3-52
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3.26
Sensor Short/Open Calibration Command Structure
SHORT
Syntax:
SHORT hs Sensor Specifier us [modifier 1] EOL modifier 2 EOL
Example:
SHORT A;srq EOL OPEN EOL
Sensor Specifiers:
Modifiers:
A, B, or C
This modifier requests that a service request be sent upon completion of the Sensor short
calibration. When the short calibration is complete the OPEN CALIBRATION modifier
MUST be sent.
Modifiers name:
FB, NB
Modifier Syntax 1:
Full Band, Narrow Band
Modifier name:
SRQ
Modifier Syntax 2:
SRQ
If the SRQ modifier is received the 8003 will initiate the SHORT CALIBRATION upon the
specified Sensor. When completed, the event complete bit will be set in the external status
register and the service request and the external status bits will be set in the instrument
status byte.
Modifier Description:
This modifier initiates the second part of the
SHORT/OPEN CALIBRATION.
Modifier name:
OPEN
Modifier Syntax:
OPEN EOL
Description: This verb defines and initiate a Sensor Short/Open Calibration. This is a very special
operation. The Frequency Response Correction Using Path Calibration discussion starting
on section 2.8.2.2 of the OPERATION chapter should be consulted for a complete
description. It should be noted that after the short calibration is completed the 8003
expects an OPEN verb to be sent so that the calibration can be completed.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-53
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.3.27
Swept Measurement Command Structure
SWP, SWP?
Current Swept Measurements:
Swept power measurements are defined by a command string beginning with SWP. The
addition of the question mark affixed to the end of the SWP verb is a query flag. This is
used if the Swept data measured on the specified channel is to be captured and returned
to the host controller when the instrument is next talked addressed. The return value is
defined as follows:
data(freq 1),data(freq 2),......,data(freq n)EOL
where:
freq 1 = start frequency
freq n = stop frequency
freq 2 = freq 1 + 2 *(freq 2 - freq 1)/(items-1)
items = an integer from 1 to 512 defined by the ITEMS modifier.
where a data item, data(freq x), is returned in the fixed form of ±ddd.dd. The assumed
units for the data items is dBm if in absolute measurement mode or dB if in relative
measurement mode. The data returned represents the next full sweep (or n full sweeps if
an averaging factor of n is chosen). The Output command can capture and return data
(see the related verb OUTPUT section 3.3.19 for more information.) If the channel is
making a CW measurement and the data returned represents the measured data point,
the format is dataEOL.
Current Swept Measurement Syntax:
SWP[?] hs Channel Specifier [ds Sensor Specifier] us [modifiers]..[modifiers]
Current Swept Measurement Specifiers:
Channel specifiers:
1, 2, 3, and 4
Sensor Specifiers:
A, B, C, A/B, A/C, B/A, B/C, C/A, and C/B
Current Swept Measurement Modifiers:
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines an average factor for the measurement.
Modifier name:
AVERAGE, AVG
Modifier Syntax 1:
AVG ds numerical value or state
valid numerical values:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256
assumed units:
no units
Modifier Syntax 2:
AVG hs state
State definition:
ON, +, OFF, -, RESET, RS
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines the measurement to be made in
absolute power (dBm) units with the appropriate Cal
Factors applied.
If a non-valid numerical value is used, the valid value closest to the entered value is used.
3-54
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Modifier name:
MEAS, M, ABS
Modifier Syntax:
MEAS
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines the measurement to be made in
relative units (meas data - path cal).
Modifier name:
NORM, N, -PC
Modifier Syntax:
NORM
Modifier Description:
This modifier sets the scale factor used for the CRT
graphical swept data display.
Modifier name:
SCALE, SC
Modifier Syntax 1:
SC ds state
State definition:
+CA = continuous auto scale on
-CA = continuous auto scale off
AUTO = auto scale ONCE
Modifier Syntax 2:
SC ds numerical value
valid numerical values:
0.1, 0.2, .05, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 10, 20
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines the reference position for the
measured trace for the 8003 CRT graphic display.
Modifier name:
REF_POS, RP
Modifier Syntax:
RP ds numerical value
valid numerical value:
-4 = bottom of screen
-3 = next graticule up
-2 = next graticule up
-1 = next graticule up
0 = center graticule
+1 = next graticule up
+2 = next graticule up
+3 = next graticule up
+4 = top of screen
All other non-valid numerical values force the setting to center screen.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-55
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Modifier Description:
This modifier sets the value of the reference level
Modifier name:
REF_LEV, RL
Modifier Syntax:
RL ds numerical value
numerical value range:
-90 to +90
assumed units:
dBm or db
Modifier Description:
This modifier turns on a specified channel which is to
make the swept measurement.
Modifier name:
ON, +
Modifier Syntax:
ON
Modifier Description:
This modifier turns off a specified channel which is to
make the SWEPT measurement.
Modifier name:
OFF, -
Modifier Syntax:
OFF
Modifier Description:
This modifier is to request that a service request be sent
upon completion of the SWEPT measurement defined
for this channel.
Modifier name:
SRQ
Modifier Syntax:
SRQ
Once the SRQ modifier is received, the 8003 will make the measurement specified for this
channel. If the number of averages defined for this channel has been satisfied, the event
complete bit is set in the external status register and the service request and the external
status bits are set in the instrument status byte.
☛
3-56
NOTE: This SRQ is used with Query Flag only.
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines the number of data items to be
returned when the measured data is requested for
output to the host computer.
Modifier name:
ITEMS
Modifier Syntax:
ITEMS ds numerical value
valid numerical values:
1 to 512
assumed units:
no units
Modifier Description:
The following modifiers define and control the markers
on the trace. As from the front panel, 10 markers
(numbered 0 through 9) can be defined. A marker must
be defined (its frequency set) before it can be used.
Once a marker is defined for any channel, it will appear
on all active channels at the defined frequency.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Modifier name:
MARKER
Modifier Syntax:
MARKER hs numerical value [us state]
valid numerical values:
0 through 9, all
assumed units:
no units (these are marker numbers)
State Syntax:
ON, OFF, CLEAR
(turns marker on, off, or clears marker)
Modifier name:
DEF_MKR
Modifier Syntax:
DEF_MKR hs numerical value [us frequency f]
valid numerical values:
0 through 9
assumed units:
no units
Frequency Syntax 1:
FREQ hs frequency
(User defined marker frequency)
valid frequency values:
0 to 99999
assumed units:
MHz
Frequency Syntax 2:
CURSFREQ
(Assigns the current cursor frequency to the marker)
Modifier Examples:
SWP 1;DEF_MKR 2;FREQ 3500
Defines Marker 2 on channel 1 at frequency 3500 MHz
SWP 4;DEF_MKR 9;CURSFREQ
Defines Marker 9 on channel 4 at the current cursor
frequency
SWP 2;MARKER 3;ON
Turn on Marker 3
SWP 1;MARKER ALL;OFF
Turn off all markers
SWP 3;MARKER 8;CLEAR
Clear marker 8 (turn off and clear frequency assignment)
Modifier Description:
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
These modifiers are used to perform an OPEN/SHORT
bridge calibration with trace memories instead of path
cal memories. The operator should connect a SHORT to
the bridge before the system executes the
STORE_SHORT modifier. The operator should then
connect the OPEN to the bridge and the system should
execute only the STORE_OPEN modifier by itself. The
SRQ service request is optionally used to tell the
controller when the analyzer has finished each
operation. Do not send the verb SWP n; before the
STORE_OPEN modifier (see examples next page).
3-57
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Modifier name:
STORE_SHORT
Modifier Syntax:
STORE_SHORT hs numerical value [us SRQ]
valid numerical values:
0 through 9
assumed units:
no units (these are trace memory numbers)
Modifier name:
STORE_OPEN
Modifier Syntax:
STORE_OPEN [us SRQ]
Modifier Examples:
SWP 2;STORE_SHORT 8;SRQ
Take the current trace on channel 2 and store it in trace
memory 8. Assert SRQ when done.
STORE_OPEN;SRQ
This should be sent to the analyzer as a string just by
itself once the operator has connected the OPEN to the
bridge. The analyzer then takes the current trace,
averages it with the previously stored trace, and stores it
in trace memory 8. Asserts SRQ when done.
☛
3-58
Modifier Description:
The SMOOTH modifier activates the trace smoothing
function.
Modifier name:
SMOOTH
Modifier Syntax:
SMOOTH hs numerical value or state
valid numerical values:
0.1 to 20.0
assumed units:
percent of trace, resolution in tenths
state definition:
ON, OFF
Modifier Example:
SWP 3;SMOOTH 0.5;SMOOTH ON
Defines smoothing at 0.5% of full trace, turns smoothing
on
Modifier Description:
The LIMIT modifier allows GPIB definition of limit lines.
Limit lines are defined for each channel. Each limit line
consists of a point, a flat line segment, a sloped line
segment or multiple combinations of the three. The
LIMIT modifier has two syntaxes. The first turns entire
limit lines on or off. The second defines limit lines. See
page 2-31 of the DISPLAY key discussion in the Front
Panel Functional Description section for a more detailed
description of limit lines.
NOTE: Please see the LIMIT modifier of the OUTPUT command at the top of page 3-31 for
a description of reading PASS/FAIL indications from limit lines.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Modifier name:
LIMIT
Modifier Syntax 1:
LIMIT hs state
state definition:
ON, OFF
turns off entire limit line for the specified channel.
Modifier Syntax 2:
LIMIT hs numerical value or ALL modifier
valid numerical values:
1 to 12 corresponding to segment numbers
Limit Modifier 1:
CLEAR
clears segment n (or all) for active channel’s limit lines
Modifier Syntax:
CLEAR
Limit Modifier 2:
POINT
defines a point limit
Modifier Syntax:
POINT hs f1 ds p1 ds p2
Argument syntax:
see Limit Modifier 4, below
Limit Modifier 3:
FLAT
defines a flat line segment limit
Modifier Syntax:
FLAT hs f1 ds p ds p2 ds f2
Argument syntax:
see Limit Modifier 4, below
Limit Modifier 4:
SLOPE
defines a sloping line segment limit
Modifier Syntax:
SLOPE hs f1 ds p1 ds p2 ds f2 ds p3 ds p4
Argument syntax:
f1 starting frequency in MHz
p1 upper limit in dB (starting limit)
p2 lower limit in dB (starting limit)
f2 ending frequency in MHz
p3 ending upper limit in dB
p4 ending lower limit in dB
Modifier Examples:
SWP 1;LIMIT 1;POINT 2500,10.5,9.5
Defines a point limit line for channel 1 at 2500 MHz with
10.5 dB upper limit, and 9.5 dB lower limit
SWP 1;LIMIT ON
Turns on limit line defined above.
SWP 3;LIMIT 3;SLOPE 8000,0,-5,12000,5,-10
Defines a slope limit segment (third segment of the limit
line) for channel 3. Line is defined from 8 GHz to 12
GHz. Upper segment goes from 0 dB at 8 GHz to 5 dB
at 12 GHz. Lower segment goes from -5 to -10 dB.
SWP 3;LIMIT 3;CLEAR
Clears third segment of limit line on channel 3.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-59
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Current Swept Measurement Example:
SWP? 3;abs;avg 16;srq;items 200
Current Swept Measurement Related Commands:
OUTPUT
GRAPH
SWPF
SWPS
Swept Measurements To Be Stored:
The second trace form of the SWP command stores, displays, or clears TRACE data.
Stored Swept Measurement Syntax:
SWP hs Channel Specifier us Memory Trace Specifier ds
Stored Swept Measurement Syntax:
SWP hs Channel Specifier us Memory Trace Specifier ds
Stored Swept Measurement Specifiers:
Trace specifiers:
TRACE n, -TRACE n, STORE_TRC n, CLEAR_TRC n
valid n values:
0 through 9 (ALL is valid for CLEAR_TRC)
TRACE n:
Programs the specified channel to display memorized
Trace n.
-TRACE n:
Programs the specified channel to be ratio’ed with Trace
n.
☛
NOTE: To deactivate ratioing with a trace, use the MEAS modifier. See
MEAS modifier description on page 3-55 and the Trace Memory Programming
example on page 3-61.
STORE_TRC n:
Stores a swept measurement to memorized Trace n.
CLEAR_TRC n:
Clears a single measurement of all memorized traces.
Stored Swept Measurement Examples:
SWP 1;TRACE 4:
(makes channel 1 display memorized trace 4)
SWP 3;-TRACE 7:
(makes channel 3’s measurement a ratio of sensor A to trace 7)
SWP 4;STORE_TRC 8:
(stores the swept measurement being made by channel 4 into trace memory number 8)
SWP 2; CLEAR_TRC ALL:
(clears all stored traces)
Stored Swept Measurement Related Commands
INPUT
OUTPUT
3-60
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Trace Memory Programming Example
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
470
480
490
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
600
610
620
630
! *************************************************************
! PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE FOR TRACE MEMORY MANIPULATION
! *************************************************************
!
OPTION BASE 1! All arrays start with index of 1
DIM Trace data(512)
!
! First configure 8003 Analyzer
CLEAR 704 ! Device clear presets 8003
OUTPUT 704;SWP 1,A;on! Channel one displays sensor A power
OUTPUT 704;CHAN 2;off;CHAN 3;off;CHAN 4;off! turn off unused channels
!
! Next configure the sweeper
OUTPUT 704;SWPF;start 8000;stop 12000;swpt 1000;level 0;level on
! sweep from 8 GHz to 12 GHz, with 1 second sweep time, at 0 dBm
WAIT 5! Wait for sweeper to execute commands
!
! Now scale analyzer for easy display
OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;scale .5;ref lev 0
!
! =================================================================
! Trace memory examples
!
! First store channel 1 trace into trace memory 1
OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;store trc 1
!
! Next subtract trace 1 from currently displayed trace (normalize)
OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;-trace 1
!
! Display stored trace on channel 2
OUTPUT 704;SWP 2,A;on;trace 1
! and scale channel 2
OUTPUT 704;SWP 2;scale .5;ref lev 0
WAIT 1! wait for analyzer to finish processing display
!
! Now read trace into controller
OUTPUT 704;OUTPUT;trace 1
ENTER 704;Start freq,Stop freq,Trace data(*)
! Note: output format is always start freq (MHz), stop freq (MHz), then
! 512 data points of trace data in dB
!
! Invert trace data as an example of user-manipulated trace data
MAT Trace data= (0)-Trace data
!
! Now read trace back to different trace memory in analyzer
OUTPUT 704;INPUT;trace 2,Start freq,Stop freq,Trace data(*)
! Note: input format follows above output format
!
! And display user-manipulated trace on channel 3
OUTPUT 704;SWP 3,A;on;trace 2
! and scale display
OUTPUT 704;SWP 3;scale .5;ref lev 0
!
! To return channel 1 to measurement mode without trace memory
OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;meas
!
! DEMONSTRATION OF OPEN/SHORT BRIDGE CALIBRATION USING TRACE MEMORIES
!
! We will use SRQ interrupt to tell controller when calibration step
! is done
Srq flag=0! Clear flag to indicate no SRQ received yet
ON INTR 7 GOSUB Trace srq
ENABLE INTR 7;2! Enable interrupts
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-61
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
640
650
660
670
680
690
700
710
720
730
740
750
760
770
780
790
800
810
820
830
840
850
860
870
880
890
3-62
!
OUTPUT 704;SWP 4,A;on! Use channel 4 for open/short demo
WAIT 4! Wait until channel 4 trace is updated
!
BEEP
INPUT Connect SHORT to bridge, press RETURN ... ,Key$
OUTPUT 704;SWP 4;store short 3;SRQ
WHILE Srq flag=0! infinite loop waits for srq from analyzer
END WHILE
!
Srq flag=0
BEEP
INPUT Connect OPEN to bridge, press RETURN ... ,Key$
OUTPUT 704;store open;SRQ
WHILE Srq flag=0
END WHILE
!
STOP
!
! SRQ interrupt service routine
Trace srq:!
Srq flag=1! Set srq flag to indicate srq received
Status1=SPOLL(704)! Serial poll clears srq
ENABLE INTR 7;2! Re-enable interrupts
RETURN
END
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Limit Line Programming Example
10
!*************************************************************
20
! DEMONSTRATION OF LIMIT LINE PROGRAMMING
30
!*************************************************************
40
CLEAR 704 ! Device clear presets analyzer
50
!
60
! First configure analyzer and sweeper
70
OUTPUT 704;SWP 1,A;on;CH 2;off;CH 3;off;CH 4;off
80
! channel 1 on, all other channels off
90
OUTPUT 704;SWPF;start 2000;stop 4000;level 0;level on
100 ! Sweep from 2 to 4 GHz at 0 dBm
110 OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;scale 1;rp 0;rl 0! Manually scale channel 1
120 WAIT 4! Wait for sweeper to settle and make full trace update
130 !
140 !================================================================
150 ! Limit line demonstration
160 OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;limit all;clear! clear previous limit lines
170 !
180 ! Set 3 segments, a slope segment, point segment, and flat segment
190 OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;limit 1;slope 2000,4,-4,3000,2,-2
200 OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;limit 2;point 3200,1,-1
210 OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;limit 3;flat 3400,2,-2,4000
220 !
230 ! Now, turn limit line on
240 OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;limit on
250 !
260 ! Read pass or fail status of limit line test
270 ! Analyzer returns string PASS or FAIL as result of test
280 OUTPUT 704;OUTPUT 1;limit
290 ENTER 704;Pass fail$
300 PRINT Limit line status = ;Pass fail$
310 END
CH1: SW A
1.0
dB /
REF
0.00
PAINT
PRINT
dBm
INK
PRINT
CH1: PASS
>
LASER
PRINT
>
1
ABORT
PRINT
RETURN
STRT
2.000 GHz
STOP
4.00 GHz
DISP
Figure 3-5: Limit Line Display Example
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-63
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.3.28
Start/Stop Swept Frequency Source Mode Def. Cmd.
Structure
SWPF
3-64
Syntax:
SWPF us [us modifier]..[us modifier]
Modifiers:
This modifier defines a start frequency for the start/stop swept frequency mode of signal
source. The query flag (‘?’) affixed to the start frequency modifier queries the value of the
start frequency. If set, the next time the 8003 is talk-addressed it will output the value of
the start frequency in MHZ. The format of the returned data is D.dddddd, where D is zero
to 6 digits and the assumed units are MHZ
Modifier name:
START, START?, FA, FA?
Modifier Syntax:
FA[?] [ds numerical value]
numerical value range:
Dependent upon the signal source if the source is
supported on the 8003’s private bus. If not supported
then the range is 1 MHZ to 99 GHZ
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines a stop frequency for the start/stop
swept frequency mode of signal source. The query flag
(‘?’) affixed to the stop frequency modifier queries the
value of the stop frequency. If set, the next time the 8003
is talk-addressed it will output the value of the stop
frequency in MHz. The format of the returned data is
D.dddddd, where D is zero to 6 digits and the assumed
units are MHZ
Modifier name:
STOP, STOP?, FB, FB?
Modifier Syntax:
FB[?] [hs numerical value]
numerical value range:
Dependent upon the signal source if the source is
supported upon the 8003 private bus. If not supported
then the range is 1 MHZ to 99 GHZ
Description:
This modifier defines a POWER LEVEL for the start/stop
swept frequency mode of signal source. The query flag
(‘?’) affixed to the power level modifier queries the value
of the power level. If set, the next time the 8003 is talkaddressed it will output the value of the power level in
dBm. The resolution is 0.01 dBm. The format of the
returned data is ±D.dd, where D is zero to three digits
and the assumed units are dBm
Modifier name:
LEVEL, LEVEL?, PL, PL?
Modifier Syntax 1:
PL[?] [hs numerical value]
numerical value range:
Dependent upon the signal source if the source is
supported on the 8003’s private bus. If not supported
then the range is -99 to +99 dBm.
Modifier Syntax 2:
PL hs on
State definition:
OFF, ON
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines a SWEEP TIME for the start/stop
swept frequency mode of signal source. The query flag
(‘?’) affixed to the sweep time modifier queries the value
of the sweep time. If set, the next time the 8003 is talkaddressed it will output the value of the sweep time in
ms. The resolution is 1 ms. The format of the returned
data is D, where D is two to five digits.
Modifier name:
SWPT, SWPT?, ST, ST?
Modifier Syntax:
PL[?] [ds numerical value]
numerical value range:
Dependent upon the signal source if the source is
supported on the 8003’s private bus. If not supported
then the range is 99000 to 40 ms.
Modifier Description:
The update modifier decouples analyzer frequency
updates from sweeper frequency updates. This is most
commonly used when the analyzer and sweeper are set
to different frequencies, as in mixer or frequency
multiplier measurements. The analyzer normally uses
frequency information to change the operating frequencies of the sweeper, annotate x-axis of the swept
display, apply correct Cal Factors to the reading, take
the correct portions of trace memories and path cal
memories, and fix cursors and markers. The update
modifier allows independent control of the sweeper
frequencies and all other frequency related analyzer
functions. If the modifier UPD ON is included once with
the SWPF, SWPS, or FIXED verbs, then all subsequent
uses of those verbs will update the sweeper frequency
along with the analyzer frequency. If the modifier UPD
OFF is included once with the above verbs, then all
subsequent uses of those verbs will change only
analyzer frequency parameters.
Modifier name:
UPD
Modifier syntax:
UPD hs state
State definition:
ON, OFF
Modifier Examples:
Send the following commands to modify both sweeper
and analyzer frequencies to 2000 to 4000 MHz.
SWPF;fa 2000;fb 10000;pl -10;st 500
SWPF;UPD ON
SWPF;START 2000;STOP 4000
Send the following commands to modify only the
analyzer frequency to 6000 to 8000 MHz
SWPF;UPD OFF
SWPF;START 6000;STOP 8000
Related Command:
SWP
Description: This verb places the signal source mode to start/stop swept frequency. This is an instrument wide command and, as such, has no channel or sensor specifiers. However there
are many parameters associated with the source mode. These are defined by the modifiers which follow the verb.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-65
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Update Command Programming Example
10
20
110
120
130
140
150
151
160
170
200
840
850
880
890
891
892
900
910
940
941
942
950
960
961
970
980
990
1000
1360
3-66
!******************************************************************
! DEMONSTRATION OF UPDate COMMAND:
!*****************************************************************
!
CLEAR 704 ! device clear presets analyzer
WAIT 4
!
! First, configure analyzer to display channel 1 only
OUTPUT 704;SWP 1, A;on;SWP 2,A;off;CHAN 3;off;CHAN 4;off
OUTPUT 704;SWP 1;scale .2;ref lev 10! manually scale display
WAIT 1
!..............................................................
! Demonstration of UPDATE command
! First send new setup to both analyzer and sweeper
OUTPUT 704;SWPF;UPD ON! Tells analyzer to update both sweeper
! settings and analyzer displays
! Set sweeper and analyzer to 2 to 4 GHz frequency sweep at +10 dBm
OUTPUT 704;SWPF;start 2000;stop 4000;level 10;level on
WAIT 2! wait for sweeper to update sweep
!
BEEP
INPUT Press RETURN to set analyzer at different frequency ... ,Key$
! Now send analyzer to different start and stop frequency
OUTPUT 704;SWPF;UPD OFF! Do not update sweeper, update analyzer
! frequency display only
OUTPUT 704;SWPF;start 6000;stop 8000
!
! NOTE that the display changes slightly to reflect the new Cal Factors
! applied at the second set of frequencies
END
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3.29
Span Swept Frequency Source Mode Def. Cmd. Structure
SWPS
Syntax:
SWPS [us modifier]...[us modifier]
Examples:
(See page 3-66 in the SWPF command description for a complete programming example
of the UPD modifier.)
Send the following commands to modify both sweeper and analyzer frequencies to 2000
to 4000 MHz.
SWPS;cf 15000;st 1000;span 500;pl 15.5
SWP;UPD ON
SWPF;START 2000;STOP 4000
Send the following commands to modify only the analyzer frequency to 6000 to 8000 MHz
SWPF;UPD OFF
SWPF;START 6000;STOP 8000
Related Command:
SWP
Modifiers:
This modifier defines a center frequency for the center/span swept frequency mode of
signal source. The query flag (‘?’) affixed to the center frequency modifier queries the
value of the center frequency. If set, the next time the 8003 is talk-addressed it will output
the value of the center frequency in MHZ. The format of the returned data is D.dddddd,
where D is zero to 6 digits and the assumed units are MHz.
Modifier name:
CF, CF?
Modifier Syntax:
CF[?] [hs numerical value]
numerical value range:
Dependent upon the signal source if the source is
supported on the 8003’s private bus. If not supported
then the range is 1 MHZ to 99 GHZ
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines a span frequency for the center/
span swept frequency mode of signal source. The query
flag (‘?’) affixed to the span frequency modifier queries
the value of the span frequency. If set, the next time the
8003 is talk-addressed it will output the value of the
span frequency in MHZ. The format of the returned data
is D.dddddd, where D is zero to 6 digits and the
assumed units are MHZ.
Modifier name:
SPAN, SPAN?
Modifier Syntax:
SPAN[?] [hs numerical value]
numerical value range:
Dependent upon the signal source if the source is
supported on the 8003’s private bus. If not supported
then the range is 1 MHZ to 99 GHZ.
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines a POWER LEVEL for the start/stop
swept frequency mode of signal source. The query flag
(‘?’) affixed to the power level modifier queries the value
of the power level. If set, the next time the 8003 is talkaddressed it will output the value of the power level in
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-67
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
dBm. The resolution is 0.01 dBm. The format of the
returned data is ±D.dd, where D is zero to three digits
and the assumed units are dBm.
Modifier name:
LEVEL, LEVEL?, PL, PL?
Modifier Syntax 1:
PL[?] [hs numerical value]
numerical value range:
Dependent upon the signal source if the source is
supported on the 8003’s private bus. If not supported
then the range is -99 to +99 dBm.
Modifier Syntax 2:
PL hs on
State definition:
OFF, ON
Modifier Description:
This modifier defines a SWEEP TIME for the start/stop
swept frequency mode of signal source. The query flag
(‘?’) affixed to the sweep time modifier queries the value
of the sweep time. If set, the next time the 8003 is talkaddressed it will output the value of the sweep time in
ms. The resolution is 1 ms. The resolution is 1 ms. The
format of the returned data is:
D where D is two to five digits
Modifier name:
SWPT, SWPT?, ST, ST?
Modifier Syntax:
PL[?] [hs numerical value]
numerical value range:
Dependent upon the signal source if the source is
supported on the 8003’s private bus. If not supported
then the range is 940 to 9000 ms.
Modifier Description:
The update modifier decouples analyzer frequency
updates from sweeper frequency updates. This is most
commonly used when the analyzer and sweeper are set
to different frequencies, as in mixer or frequency
multiplier measurements. The analyzer normally uses
frequency information to change the operating frequencies of the sweeper, annotate the x-axis of the swept
display, apply correct Cal Factors to the reading, take
the correct portions of trace memories and path cal
memories, and fix cursors and markers. The update
modifier allows independent control of the sweeper
frequencies and all other frequency related analyzer
functions. If the modifier UPD ON is included once with
the SWPF, SWPS, or FIXED verbs, then all subsequent
uses of those verbs will update the sweeper frequency
along with the analyzer frequency. If the modifier UPD
OFF is included once with the above verbs, then all
subsequent uses of those verbs will change only
analyzer frequency parameters.
Modifier name:
UPD
Modifier syntax:
UPD hs state
State definition:
ON, OFF
Description: This verb places the signal source mode to center/span swept frequency. This is an instrument wide command and, as such, has no channel or sensor specifiers. However there
are many parameters associated with the source mode. These are defined by the modifiers which follow the verb.
3-68
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3.30
Sensor Path Calibration Command Structure
THRU, PATH
Syntax:
THRU hs Sensor Specifier [us modifier] EOL
Example:
PATH A;srq EOL
Specifiers:
Modifiers:
A, B, or C
This modifier is to request that a service request be sent upon completion of the Sensor
Path Calibration.
Modifiers name:
Full Band, Narrow Band
Modifier Syntax 1:
FB, NB
Modifier name:
SRQ
Modifier Syntax 2:
SRQ
If the SRQ modifier is received, the 8003 will path calibrate the specified sensor. When the
calibration is complete, the event complete bit will be set in the external status register and
the service request and the external status bits will be set in the instrument status byte.
Description: This verb defines and initiates a Sensor Path Calibration.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-69
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.3.31
Sensor Zeroing Command Structure
ZERO
Syntax:
CAL hs Sensor Specifier [us modifier] EOL
Example:
ZERO B EOL
Specifiers:
Modifiers:
A, B, or C
This modifier is to request that a service request be sent upon completion of the Sensor
Zeroing.
Modifier name:
SRQ
Modifier Syntax:
SRQ
If the SRQ modifier is received the 8003 will zero the specified sensor. When the zeroing
is complete, the event complete bit will be set in the external status register and the
service request and the external status bits will be set in the instrument status byte.
Description: This verb defines and initiates Sensor Zeroing.
3.3.32
STATUS MESSAGES
3.3.32.1
488.2 Status Byte
The 8003 supports the IEEE 488.2 1988 definition of the STATUS BYTE. This status message is
returned in response to a serial poll. The status message is coded as follows:
most significant bit(7):
not used
bit(6):
request service
bit(5):
External status register has message
bit(4):
not used
bit(3):
not used
bit(2):
not used
bit(1):
not used
bit(0):
not used
Whenever the value of bit 6 is true, the 8003 is requesting service. This will generate a service request
message (SRQ TRUE) on the bus. The reason for the service request is always coded into the external
status message. Therefore, the value of bit 5 will also be true. To discover the meaning of the service
request the host computer must read the external status register. Reading the status byte via a serial poll
will clear the status byte.
3-70
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Remote Operation
3.3.32.2
488.2 External Status
The 8003 supports the IEEE 488.2 1988 definition of the External Status Register. This status message is
returned in response to an external status register query. The command for this is *ESR? and is defined
as a command verb. Please see the Common Structure in Section 3.3.1 for a more detailed description of
VERB. The status message is coded as follows:
most significant bit(15):
not used
bit(14):
not used
bit(13):
not used
bit(12):
not used
bit(11):
not used
bit(10):
not used
bit(9):
not used
bit(8):
not used
bit(7):
Power on flag
bit(6):
not used
bit(5):
Command error (Syntax error)
bit(4):
Execution error (operation error)
bit(3):
not used
bit(2):
Sampling Sensor Temperature Flag. This bit indicates that the Peak Power Sensor
(when used with the instrument) has changed temperature by more than ±5 °C
since its last calibration, and should be recalibrated for maximum accuracy. The
indication will be returned as 0 if the temperature is within range, or as 1 if out of
range.
bit(1):
not used
bit(0):
Operation complete (Data ready flag/calibration complete)
To read the external status register, the host computer first sends the *ESR? VERB and then talk
addresses the 8003. After the register has been read, it is cleared.
3.3.33
GPIB/PRIVATE Interface
Programming commands, controller command bytes, various data, and SRQs can be passed through the
8003 from the controller to instruments connected to the 8003’s GPIB/PRIVATE interface port,
located on the rear panel. This is accomplished by first sending the pass through command PT d, where
d is the decimal address of the GPIB/SYSTEM interface. Subsequent addressing of the GPIB/SYSTEM
interface will pass through commands to the selected device. The PT d command can be sent at any
time. The default addresses for pass through commands are as follows:
8003 GPIB/SYSTEM Interface:
4 decimal
Source:
20 decimal
Plotter:
05 decimal
Printer:
01 decimal
The next section explains how to pass through commands to instruments connected to the 8003 GPIB/
PRIVATE interface.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
3-71
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.3.34
Pass Through Feature
The GPIB/PRIVATE rear panel connector is physically similar to the GPIB/SYSTEM interface port,
but it is used specifically to control all compatible sources, plotters, and printers that are being used in
the setup.
The transfer of commands and data is performed by first sending a Pass Through command PT d to the
8003, where d is the decimal address of the desired device. Subsequent addressing of the GPIB/
PRIVATE interface will pass through commands to the selected instrument.
The address of the GPIB/PRIVATE interface is determined by complementing the least significant bit
of the current 8003 address. For example, since the 8003 default address is 4 decimal = 0100 binary, the
default GPIB/PRIVATE address is 5 decimal = 0101 binary. As another example, if the 8003 address
were set to 7 decimal = 111 binary, the GPIB/PRIVATE address would become 6 decimal = 110 binary.
An example of how to pass through commands to the source with address 20 using the 8003 default
address (4 decimal) is:
1.
Address device 4 (the GPIB/SYSTEM interface on the 8003) and send the command PT 20.
2.
Address device 5 (the GPIB/PRIVATE interface) and send commands to the source.
3.
Address device 4. This returns the 8003 to its normal GPIB/SYSTEM operation.
An example of how to pass through commands to the plotter with address 05 decimal using the 8003
default address (4 decimal) is:
3-72
1.
Address device 4 (the GPIB/SYSTEM interface) and send the command PT 05.
2.
Address device 5 (the GPIB/PRIVATE interface) and send commands to the plotter.
3.
Address device 4. This returns the 8003 to its normal GPIB/SYSTEM operation.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
4
Performance Test & Calibration
4.1
General
Information is this section is useful for periodic evaluation of the 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer and its
power sensors. These tests can also be used for incoming inspection testing when the instrument is first
received, if required.
If the 8003 has not previously been used, this manual should be reviewed to ensure that the instructions
covering power requirements (Chapter 1) and GPIB address selection (Chapter 2), for example, have
been complied with before the instrument is turned on. Prior to starting the following procedures, the
instrument should be allowed to warm up for at least 30 minutes to assure maximum stability during
testing.
The Specification Test for the Calibrator Output Power Reference Level given in this section is valid
for an ambient temperature range between +15°C and +35°C (+59°F to +95°F).
The instrument plus power sensor linearity test is valid when the sensor has been calibrated using the
front panel calibrator at a temperature between 0°C and +50°C (+32°F to +122°F), and if operating
within ±5°C (±9°F) of that calibration temperature.
It is recommended that the verification be done in the order described since some of the steps use the
configuration from a previous step.
As an aid to executing the steps presented, keystroke sequences used on the 8003 are shown in the outer
column of the page. Also, as in the preceding chapters, a distinction is made between the front panel
“hardkeys” and the CRT adjacent “softkeys”. The “hardkeys” are shown in BOLD, for example,
[CONFIG], and the softkeys are shown in ITALICS, for example, [SENSORSAC/DC].
For information on how to calibrate the 8003 refer to Chapter M2, Maintenance, in the 8003
Maintenance Manual (P/N 20791-001).
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
4-1
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Table 4-1: Test Equipment Required
Description
Representative Key
Key Characteristics
Microwave Sweeper
Giga-tronics 12720A
8003 Supported
Oscilloscope
Tektronix 2235
BW = > 100 kHz; Sens = > 2V/DIV
CW Thermistor Power Meter
HP 432A
VRF and VCOMP available externally
Thermistor Mount
HP 478A-H75
<1.07 VSWR @ 50 MHz (30 dB return
loss) Accuracy ±0.5% @ 50 MHz
Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
Fluke 8842A
±0.05% accuracy & 1 mV resolution
Directional Coupler, 10 dB
Mini Circuits ZFDC-10-1 10 dB
<1.15 SWR @ 50 MHz
Step Attenuator, 0 to 90 dB
Weinshel Model AC 118A-90-33
<1.15 SWR @ 50 MHz±0.1 dB
attenuation
RF Source (Signal Generator)
(High Power)
Wavetek Model 2405 Option XP
+22 dBm @ 50 MHz
Low Pass Filter
Integrated Microwave Model 904 881
> 30 dB attenuation @ 100 MHz
GPIB Controller
IBM PC
National GPIB Card or equivalent
Printer
HP LaserJet Series II
RS-232 Interface & Command Set
High Resolution Color Display
Monitor (Required 60 Hz Field
Rate for 8003 Option 02 only)
NEC Multisync
31 kHz Line Rate
60 Hz Field Rate
RGB Input
☛
4-2
NOTE: Performance Verification Test Data Recording sheets are located starting on page
4-14. These sheets can be copied, and the copies used for recording test results each time
that specification and performance verification testing is performed on this instrument.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Performance Test & Calibration
4.2
Calibrator Verification Procedure
If any of the instrument performance characteristics are not within specifications, refer the problem to
Giga-tronics Customer Service.
4.2.1
Calibrator Output Power Reference Level
This test determines if the Calibrator Output Power Reference Level given in this section is valid for an
ambient temperature range between +5°C and +35°C (+41°F to +95°F).
The Calibrator Output power reference is factory adjusted to 1 mW ±0.7%. To achieve this accuracy,
Giga-tronics uses a precision measurement system with accuracy to ±0.5% (traceable to the NIST formerly the NBS), and allows for a transfer error of ±0.2% for a total of ±0.7%. If an equivalent
measurement system is used for verification, the power reference oscillator output can be verified to
1 mW ±1.9% (±1.2% accuracy, ±0.5% verification system error, ±0.2% transfer error, for a maximum
error of ±1.9%). To ensure maximum accuracy in verifying the Calibrator Output power reference, the
following procedure provides step-by-step instructions for using specified test instruments of known
capability. If equivalent test instruments are substituted, refer to the Key Characteristics section in
Table 4-1.
Figure 4-1: Calibrator Output Test Setup
4.2.1.1
Procedure
In the following steps, thermistor power measurements will be made using the 432A Power Meter. For
detailed information on using the 432A, please refer to the operating section on the 432A manual.
1.
Connect the 432A to the Calibrator Output on the 8003 as shown in Figure 4-1.
2.
Turn on all equipment and then wait 30 minutes for the thermistor mount to stabilize before
proceeding to the next step.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
4-3
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
3.
Set the 432A RANGE switch to COARSE ZERO, and adjust the front panel COARSE ZERO
control to obtain a zero (±2% F.S.) meter indication.
☛
NOTE: Ensure that the DVM input leads are isolated from chassis ground
when performing the next step.
4.
Set the DVM to a range that results in a resolution of 1 µV and connect the positive and
negative input, respectively, to the VCOMP and VRF connectors on the rear panel of the 432A.
5.
Fine zero the 432A on the most sensitive range, then set the 432A range switch to 1 mW.
6.
Record the DVM indication as V0.
7.
Turn ON the 8003 Calibrator RF power as follows:
Press [CONFIG] [SERVICE] [SET CAL]
In the “System” section of the front panel of the 8003 is a key [SET CAL] labeled CONFIG.
Press this key and a menu will appear with a softkey labeled SERVICE. Press this key and
another menu will appear with a softkey labeled SET CAL. Press [SET CAL]. Record the
reading shown on the DVM as V1.
☛
NOTE: The V1 reading must be taken within 15 seconds after pressing [SET
CAL]. Otherwise, press the ABORT softkey and repeat Steps 6 and 7.
8.
Disconnect the DVM negative lead from the VRF connector on the 432A, and reconnect it to
the 432A chassis ground. Record the new indication observed on the DVM as VCOMP.
9.
Press the ABORT softkey on the 8003.
10. Calculate the Calibrator Output level (PCAL) using the following formula:
where:
PCAL = calibrator output power reference level
VCOMP= previously recorded value in Step 8
V1= previously recorded value in Step 7
V0= previously recorded value in Step 6
R= 200Ω (assuming HP478A-H75 mount)
Calibration factor = value for the thermistor mount at 50 MHz (traceable to the NIST)
11. Verify that the PCAL is within the following limits:
1 mW ±0.019 mW (0.981 to 1.019 mW)
For record purposes, the measured value of PCAL can be entered on the Performance Verification Test Data Recording Sheet starting on page 4-14.
4-4
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Performance Test & Calibration
4.2.2
Calibrator Frequency Check
To measure the frequency of the calibrator:
1.
Connect the frequency counter to the calibrator output connector.
2.
Turn ON the calibrator according to the procedure given in Procedure Step 8 on the previous
page.
3.
Measure 49 to 51 MHz.
4.
Set the calibrator frequency to 1.000 GHz (with Option 12 only).
5.
Measure 999.5 MHz to 1.0005 GHz (with Option 12 only).
6.
Turn the calibrator OFF.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
4-5
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
4.3
Performance Verification Tests
Information in this section is useful for periodic evaluation of the 8003 and its power sensors. These tests
can also be used for incoming inspection testing when the instrument is first received, if required.
If the 8003 has not previously been used, review the precautions in Section 1.2.1 of the manual before
the instrument is turned on. Prior to starting the following procedures, the instrument should be allowed
to warm up for at least 24 hours to assure maximum stability during testing.
The instrument plus power sensor linearity test is valid when the sensor has been calibrated using the
front panel calibrator at a temperature between 0°C and +50°C (+32°F to +122°F), and if operating
within ±5°C (±9°F) of that calibration temperature.
It is recommended that the verification be done in the order described since some of the steps use the
configuration from a previous step.
4.3.1
Equipment Required
See Table 4-1 for a list of the equipment required for performance testing of the 8003 Precision Scalar
Analyzer.
Performance Verification Test Data Recording sheets are located on pages 4-14 thru 4-17. These sheets
can be copied used for recording test results each time specifications and performance verification
testing is performed on the specific instrument described by this manual.
4-6
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Performance Test & Calibration
4.3.2
Instrument Plus Power Sensor Linearity
4.3.2.1
Test Description
Connect the test setup as shown in Figure 4-2. The linearity will be tested over the range +20 dBm to
-60 dBm (CW Mode) and +20 dBm to -50 dBm (Swept Mode). At low power levels, the linearity
measurement will include the uncertainty due to the zero set specification. The procedure should be
repeated for each sensor used with the 8003.
Figure 4-2: Power Linearity Test Setup
When measuring the linearity of a low VSWR (8031XA Series) or a high power sensor (8032XA
Series) sensor, the power output of the source as well as the directional coupler coupling factor, must be
increased from 10 dB to either 16 or 20 dB respectively (see Figure 4-2). The power coefficient of the
step attenuator will also have to be considered. The specification of power coefficient for the Weinschel
attenuator cited in the Equipment List is: <0.005 dB/(dB/W). The latter will affect the linearity of each
10 dB segment, and make it necessary to expand the overall linearity specification by this quantity.
In assembling the test setup shown in Figure 4-2, keep in mind that if testing is to be conducted with
Low VSWR or High Power sensors, the optional RF Amplifier must have frequency and bandwidth
parameters to match the sensor’s characteristics (see the Sensor Selection Guide in Appendix A, if
unsure of characteristics), and the Directional Coupler must be increased as stated above for the
particular series of sensors. All Standard (8030XA Series) and True RMS (8033XA Series) sensors are
tested with a 10 dB Directional Coupler and without the optional RF amplifier, and with a 10 dB
Directional Coupler.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
4-7
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Refer to the CW Linearity Data and the Swept Linearity Data sections of the 8003 Performance
Verification Test Data Sheets located on pages 4-14 through 4-17. These sections facilitate the
collection of data for the CW and Swept power linearity tests. The tolerance is already entered for the
various steps, and includes an allowance for specified zero set errors at low power levels.
☛
4.3.2.2
NOTE: To ensure accurate and repeatable measurements, the 432A power meter should be
zeroed just before taking each reading that will be used to calculate P1 in the Power Meter
column of the Performance Verification Test Data Sheets on pages 4-14 through 4-17.
Setup Parameters
The following setup parameters should be accomplished prior to performing the Power Linearity test:
1.
The 8003 and sensor should be calibrated.
2.
The 8003 is placed in the CW mode by pressing the DEFINE key and toggling the
CW/SWEPT softkey if necessary.
[DEFINE] [CW]
3.
A “Readout” display is obtained by pressing the DISPLAY key and toggling the
GRAPH/READOUT softkey as required.
[DISPLAY] [READOUT1]
4.
Set the 8003 to display linear units of power (mW) by pressing the DISPLAY key and
selecting the appropriate UNITS soft-key labels.
[DISPLAY] [UNITS]
[LINEAR]
5.
The CW Averaging is set to 4 by entering the key sequence shown to the left.
[DISPLAY] [AVG] [4]
[ENTER][AVG ON]
4.3.2.3
Test Procedure
[CAL] [ZERO SENSOR]
[ SENSOR A/B/C ZERO]
Extreme care is required in the following procedure since the accuracy requirements are critical to ensure the
most accurate test results.
Power readings are determined using the thermistor power meter in the same general way as given in the Power
Reference Level test. That is, P1 and P2 north Power Meter reading column of the Performance verification
Test Data Sheet tables are calculated each time for the respective values of VCOMP, V0, and V1 read on the
DVM.
1.
Set the step attenuator to 70 dB. Turn the source power output off, and then zero the 8003.
(The 8003 is zeroed by pressing CAL key located in the “Function” section on the front panel,
and then following the softkey label instructions).
4-8
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Performance Test & Calibration
2.
Set the step attenuator to 0 dB after the 8003 chimes to signal the completion of the zeroing
process.
3.
Set the power output of the RF source so that the thermistor power meter indicates 1.00 mW
±0.025 mW.
4.
Record the calculated power meter reading and the displayed 8003 reading in the correct
columns of the Linearity Data Recording sheet on page 4-14.
5.
Set the power output of the RF source so that the thermistor power meter indicates 3.98 mW
±0.10 mW.
6.
Record the new calculated power meter reading and the new displayed 8003 reading as in
Step 4, above.
7.
Set the power output of the RF Source so that the thermistor power meter indicates 5.01 mW
±0.10 mW.
8.
Record the new calculated power meter reading and the new displayed 8003 reading as in
Step 4, above.
9.
Repeat using the power meter indications in the data sheet on page 4-15. Note that the Step
Attenuator is used to generate the remaining 70 dB range of 10 dB steps for a total range of
80 dB. Repeat Step 1, above, between each 10 dB step shown on the Linearity Data Recording
sheet.
10. Make the calculations indicated on the Linearity Data sheet, and enter the values in the
appropriate blank spaces.
11. Repeat Steps 1 through 10 using the Swept Mode (1 second sweep), and record the results on
the Swept Linearity Data sheet (page 4-16).
[DEFINE] [SWEPT]
☛
NOTE: In the Swept mode it is necessary to calculate the linear power from
the dBm reading on the 8003. Also, be sure that the Start and End
frequencies are set to 50 MHz.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
4-9
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
4.3.3
Serial Port Check
The following steps are used to confirm that the RS-232 port on the 8003 is functional. The following
are the factory default settings for the communications parameters on the serial port of the 8003:
Baud Rate:
Parity:
Data Bits:
Stop Bits:
9600
N
8
1
If required, the 8003 can support baud rates of 1200, 2400 and 4800 by moving W8 on the Processor PC
Board (A12).
1.
Configure the 8003 to be in Graph Mode.
[DISPLAY] [GRAPH]
2.
Connect the RS-232 cable between the Serial Port on the rear of the 8003 and the Serial Port
on the LaserJet printer.
[DISPLAY] [PLOT & PRINT]
3.
Print a graph.
[PRINT] [LASER PRINT]
☛
4.3.4
NOTE: Paint Print and Ink Print can only be executed over the GPIB.
GPIB/System Port Check
The following steps confirm that the GPIB port is functional:
1.
Set the 8003 to the desired address (the default is 4).
[CONFIG] [GPIB DEVICES]
[nn] [ENTER]
2.
Connect the GPIB controller to the GPIB Port on the rear of the 8003.
3.
Send the command (if emulating an HP 438):
*IDN? or ?ID
The verb is the standardized COMMON identify query command as defined by IEEE 488.2
1988. When talk addressed after receiving the command, the 8003 will output a string that
identifies itself as the 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer.
(*IDN? is the IEEE 488.2 Common ID query. When addressed to talk after receiving the command, the 8003 will output a string that identifies itself as 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer).
4.
4-10
Display the response on the controller. For further information on using the 8003 through the
GPIB, refer to Chapter 3.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Performance Test & Calibration
4.3.5
GPIB/Private Port Check
1.
Connect the 12720A GPIB port to the GPIB/Private Port on the rear of the 8003 (or one of the
other supported sweepers listed in section B.3.3).
2.
Determine the GPIB address of the 12720A. Press the CONFIG button located on the front panel.
Press the GPIB softkey next to the GPIB display. Read the GPIB address on the GPIB Parameters
Menu.
3.
Enter the address obtained in Step 2 as the Source Address on the 8003.
[CONFIG] [GPIB DEVICES]
[SOURCE ADDRESS] [nn]
[ENTER]
4.
Check that the 8003 recognizes the sweeper by verifying that sweeper dependent softkey selections
on the 8003 (such as “Power”) are NOT dark blue.
[POWER] [Softkey labels are green or blue]
4.3.6
Sweep in Connector Check
1.
Connect the Sweep Out connection from the sweeper to the Sweep In on the 8003.
2.
Configure the 8003 to be in the Graph/Swept Mode.
[DISPLAY] [GRAPH]
[DEFINE] [SWEPT]
3.
Select a swept time of 1 second.
[SWEEP TIME] [1] [S]
4.
Calibrate the Sweep Ramp.
[CONFIG] [CAL SWP RAMP]
5.
Display Channel and Autoscale.
[CH 1] [SCALE] [Autoscale]
6.
Disconnect, and then connect the BNC cable to the Sweep In connector on the 8003.
7.
Observe that the trace is being swept only when the BNC cable is connected.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
4-11
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
4.3.7
AC Mode Output Connector Check
The 8003 AC Modulation Output voltage default values are +5V (AC Modulation off), and a square
wave switching between +5V and 0V (AC Modulation on), at a nominal 1kHz frequency. The 8003
can generate different voltages using values stored in an internal lookup table depending on the sweeper
to which it is connected via the GPIB/Private port.
1.
Connect the AC Mod Output to the Vertical input on the oscilloscope. Set the oscilloscope as
follows:
Coupling:
Volts/Div:
Time/Div:
Triggering:
DC
2V /Div
200 µ s/Div
AC/Auto/Int
2.
Ground the oscilloscope input and center the trace.
3.
Set the 8003 to the DC Mode of operation.
[CONFIG] [SENSORS AC/DC]
[ALL DC]
4.
Select DC coupling on the oscilloscope, and check that it indicates a positive voltage of 5V.
5.
Set the 8003 to the AC Mode of operation.
[CONFIG] [SENSORS AC/DC]
[ALL DC]
6.
4.3.8
Check that the oscilloscope displays a square wave, repetition frequency between 500 Hz and
1.5 kHz, voltage between 0V and+5V.
Bias Output Connector Check
The following steps are used to confirm that the Bias Output Voltage connector is functional. These
steps can be bypassed if it not intended to use this capability for applications such as supplying power to
PIN diode attenuators.
☛
NOTE: The Bias Voltage Output is channel dependent, and only on during the sweep time
for each channel which has been configured by the user to output a bias voltage.
In the following procedure it is recommended that the 8003 be set to display channel only, and that a
sweep time of 1 second be set on the sweeper.
[CH 1] [CH 2] [OFF] [CH 3]
[OFF] [CH 4] [OFF] [SWEEP TIME] [1] [S]
1.
Set the 8003 to be in the Graph/Swept Mode.
[DISPLAY] [GRAPH] [DEFINE] [SWEPT]
4-12
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Performance Test & Calibration
2.
Connect the Bias Output Voltage connector on the rear of the 8003 to the vertical input of the
oscilloscope. Set the oscilloscope as follows:
Volts/Div:
Time/Div:
Triggering:
5V /Div
200 µ s/Div
AC/Auto/Int
3.
Ground the oscilloscope input and center the trace.
4.
Select DC coupling on the oscilloscope.
5.
Set the Bias Output Voltage on the 8003 to + 10V.
[DEFINE] [BIAS VOLTAGE] [1] [0] [S]
6.
Check that the trace on the oscilloscope moves up 2 divisions (+10V) from center screen during
the sweep, and back to center (0V) on retrace.
7.
Set the Bias Voltage Output on the 8003 to -10V.
[DEFINE] [BIAS VOLTAGE] [-] [1] [0] [S]
8.
4.3.9
Check that the trace on the oscilloscope moves down 2 divisions (-10V) from center screen during
the sweep, and back to center (0V) on retrace.
DAC Output Connector Check
Not Presently Used.
4.3.10
RGB Video Output Connector Check
Connect the 8003 Op 02 RGB Video Output to the High Resolution Color Display Monitor and display
a stable color picture that duplicates the display on the 8003.
4.3.11
SUMMARY
This completes the performance test and calibration tests for the 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer and its
sensors. If the instrument has performed as described in this chapter, it is correctly calibrated and within
specifications.
If the instrument fails to meet any of the criteria defined in the tests, refer to the calibration and/or
maintenance sections of the 8003 Maintenance Manual (P/N 20791-001).
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
4-13
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
GIGA-TRONICS
8003 Performance Verification Test Data Recording Sheet
Date:
Operator:
Test Number:
(If required)
8003 S/N:
Power Sensor S/N:
Calibrator Output Power Reference
Minimum
Actual Reading
Maximum
0.981 mW
1.019 mW
Linearity Data (+16 dBm to +20 dBm)
Step
Attenuator
Value
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
Power Set
Point
Power
Meter
Reading
(P)
8540
(DUT)
Reading
(R)
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
3.98 mW
±0.10 mW
P2 =
R2 =
3.98 mW
±0.10 mW
P1 =
R1 =
5.01 mW
±0.13 mW
P2 =
R2 =
5.01 mW
±0.13 mW
P1 =
R1 =
6.31 mW
±0.16 mW
P2 =
R2 =
6.31 mW
±0.16 mW
P1 =
R1 =
7.94 mW
±0.2 mW
P2 =
R2 =
7.94 mW
±0.2 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
Reference
Power Ratio
P1/P2 =
P1/P2 =
8540
(DUT)
Reading
Ratio
Linearity Error (%)1
Linearity
Specification
Accumulated
Linearity
Error2
±1%
Same as Lin.
error above
R1/R2 =
R1/R2 =
+1%
-1.6%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
+1%
-2.7%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
+1%
-3.8%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
+1%
-4.9%
(continued)
+16 dBm to -60 dBm Linearity Data is on the next page.
NOTES:
1.
2.
Linearity Error (%) = [(R1/R2) / (P1/P2) - 1] x 100
Accumulated error is the sum of the current dB segment linearity error plus the previous accumulated error.
4-14
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Performance Test & Calibration
CW Linearity Data - (+16 dBm to -60 dBm)
Step
Attenuator
Value
Power
Set Point
Power
Meter
Reading
(P)
8540
(DUT)
Reading
(R)
Reference
Power
Ratio
8540
(DUT)
Reading
Ratio
Linearity Error (%)1
Linearity
Specification
0 dB
Accumulated
Linearity
Error2
See Note 3
±1%
10 dB
20 dB
30 dB
40 dB
50 dB
60 dB
(Increase avg.
to 8)
70 dB
(Increase avg.
to 16)
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10.00 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10.00 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10.00 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10.00 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10.00 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10.00 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10.00 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
P1/P2 =
Same as Lin.
error above
R1/R2 =
±1%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
±1%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
±1%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
±1%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
±1%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
±1.5%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
±6%
NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
Linearity Error (%) = [(R1/R2) / (P1/P2) - 1] x 100
Accumulated error is the sum of the current dB segment linearity error plus the previous accumulated error.
Use the first CW Linearity error value entered in the +16 dBm to +20 dBm Linearity Data on page 4-14.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
4-15
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Swept Linearity Data (+16 dBm to +20 dBm)
Step
Attenuator
Value
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
Power Set
Point
Power
Meter
Reading
(P)
8003
(DUT)
Reading
(R)
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
3.98 mW
±0.10 mW
P2 =
R2 =
3.98 mW
±0.10 mW
P1 =
R1 =
5.01 mW
±0.13 mW
P2 =
R2 =
5.01 mW
±0.13 mW
P1 =
R1 =
6.31 mW
±0.16 mW
P2 =
R2 =
6.31 mW
±0.16 mW
P1 =
R1 =
7.94 mW
±0.2 mW
P2 =
R2 =
7.94 mW
±0.2 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
Reference
Power Ratio
P1/P2 =
P1/P2 =
8003
(DUT)
Reading
Ratio
Linearity Error (%)1
Linearity
Specification
Accumulated
Linearity
Error2
±1%
Same as Lin.
error above
R1/R2 =
R1/R2 =
+1%
-1.6%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
+1%
-2.7%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
+1%
-3.8%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
+1%
-4.9%
(continued)
+16 dBm to -50 dBm Swept Linearity Data is on the next page.
NOTES:
1.
2.
Linearity Error (%) = [(R1/R2) / (P1/P2) - 1] x 100
Accumulated error is the sum of the current dB segment linearity error plus the previous accumulated error.
4-16
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Performance Test & Calibration
Swept Linearity Data - (+16 dBm to -50 dBm)
Step
Attenuator
Value
Power
Set Point
Power
Meter
Reading
(P)
8540
(DUT)
Reading
(R)
Reference
Power
Ratio
8540
(DUT)
Reading
Ratio
0 dB
Linearity Error (%)1
Linearity
Specification
Accumulated
Linearity
Error2
See Note 3
±1.4%
10 dB
20 dB
30 dB
40 dB
50 dB
60 dB
(Increase avg.
to 8)
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10.00 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10.00 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10.00 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10.00 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10.00 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
1.00 mW
±0.025 mW
P1 =
R1 =
10.00 mW
±0.25 mW
P2 =
R2 =
P1/P2 =
Same as Lin.
error above
R1/R2 =
±1.4%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
±1.4%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
±1.4%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
±1.5%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
±2.4%
P1/P2 =
R1/R2 =
±11.4%
NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
Linearity Error (%) = [(R1/R2) / (P1/P2) - 1] x 100
Accumulated error is the sum of the current dB segment linearity error plus the previous accumulated error.
Use the first CW Linearity error value entered in the +16 dBm to +20 dBm Linearity Data on page 4-16.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
4-17
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
4-18
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
A
Power Sensors
A.1
Introduction
This appendix contains the selection and specifications data for the Giga-tronics power sensors used
with the 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer.
Giga-tronics power sensors contain balanced zero-biased Schottky diodes for power sensing.
CAUTION
Input power in excess of +23 dBm (200 mW, which is the 100%
average for standard and pulse sensors) can degrade or destroy
these diodes. Diodes degraded or destroyed in this manner will
not be replaced under warranty. Destructive signal levels are
higher for high power, true rms, and low VSWR sensors. When
connecting power sensors to other devices, do not turn the body
of the sensor in order to tighten the RF connection. This can damage the connector mating surfaces.
A.2
Power Sensor Selection
Standard sensors include the 803XXA Series for CW signals, the 80500 Series CW Return Loss Bridges,
and the 8033XA Series True RMS sensors.
Giga-tronics True RMS sensors are recommended for applications such as measuring quadrature
modulated signals, multi-tone receiver intermodulation distortion power, noise power, or the
compression power of an amplifier. These sensors include a pad to attenuate the signal to the RMS
region of the diode’s response. This corresponds to the -70 dBm to -20 dBm linear operating region of
Standard CW Sensors. The pad improves the input VSWR to <1.15 at 18 GHz.
High Power (1, 5, 25 & 50 Watt) and Low VSWR sensors are also available for use with the 8003. Table
A-1 lists the Giga-tronics power sensors used with the 8003. Refer to applicable notes on page A-3.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
A-1
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
A.2.1
Power Sensor Selection Charts
Table A-1: Power Sensor Selection Guide
Model
Freq. Range/
Power Range
Max.
Power
Power Linearity4
(Freq >8 GHz)
RF
Conn
Lgth.
Dia.
Wgt
VSWR
CW Power Sensors
200 mW Peak Power
80301A
10 MHz to 18 GHz
-70 to +20 dBm
Type N(m)
50Ω
1.12:0.01 - 2 GHz
1.22:2 - 12.4 GHz
1.29:12.4 - 18 GHz
-70 to -20 dBm ±0.00 dB
-20 to +20 dBm ±0.05 dB/10 dB
80302A
10 MHz to 18 GHz
-70 to +20 dBm
APC-7
50Ω
+23 dBm
(200 mW)
80303A
80304A
10 MHz to 26.5 GHz
-70 to +20 dBm
-70 to +20 dBm ±0.00 dB
-20 to +20 dBm ±0.1 dB/10dB
10 MHz to 40 GHz
-70 to 0 dBm
-70 to -20 dBm ±0.00 dB
-20 to 0 dBm ±0.2 dB/10 dB
114.5
mm
(4.5 in)
32 mm
(1.25 in)
0.18 kg
(0.4 lb)
1.12:0.01 - 2 GHz
1.22:2 - 12.4 GHz
1.38:12.4 - 18 GHz
1.43:18 - 26.5 GHz
1.92:26.5 - 40 GHz
Type
K(m)1
50Ω
Low VSWR CW
-64 to -14 dBm ±0.00 dB
-14 to + 26 dBm ±0.05 dB/10 dB
80310A
10 MHz to 18 GHz
-64 to +26 dBm
80313A
10 MHz to 26.5 GHz
-64 to +26 dBm
80314A
10 MHz to 40 GHz
-64 to +6 dBm
-64 to -14 dBm ±0.00 dB
-14 to + 6 dBm ±0.2 dB/10 dB
80320A
10 MHz to 18 GHz
-60 to +30 dBm
-60 to -10 dBm ±0.00 dB
-10 to +30 dBm ±0.05 dB/10 dB
80323A
10 MHz to 26.5 GHz
-60 to +30 dBm
80324A
10 MHz to 40 GHz
-60 to +10 dBm
+29 dBm
(800 mW)
-64 to -14 dBm ±0.00 dB
-14 to + 26 dBm ±0.1 dB/10 dB
Type
K(m)1
50Ω
127mm
(5.0 in)
32 mm
(1.25 in)
0.23 kg
(0.5lb)
1.13:0.01 - 2 GHz
1.15:2 - 12 GHz
1.23:12 - 18 GHz
1.29:18 - 26.5 GHz
1.50:26.5 - 40 GHz
Type
K(m)1
50Ω
127 mm
(5.0 in)
32 mm
(1.25 in)
0.23 kg
(0.5 lb)
1.11:0.01 - 2 GHz
1.12:2 - 12 GHz
1.18:12 - 18 GHz
1.22:18 - 26.5 GHz
1.36:26.5 - 40 GHz
Type
K(m)1
50Ω
152.5
mm
(6.0 in)
32 mm
1.25 in)
0.27 kg
(0.6 lb)
1.12:0.01 - 12 GHz
1.15:12 - 18 GHz
1.18:18 - 26.5 GHz
1.29:26.5 - 40 GHz
1W CW
+30 dBm
(1 W)
-60 to -10 dBm ±0.00 dB
-10 to +30 dBm ±0.1 dB/10 dB
-60 to -10 dBm ±0.00 dB
-10 to +10 dBm ±0.2 dB/10 dB
True RMS Sensors (fm > 1.5 MHz) (-30 to +20 dBm)
80330A
80333A
80334A
10 MHz to 18 GHz
10 MHZ to 26.5 GHz
10 MHz to 40 GHz
+33 dBm
(2 W)
-30 to +20 dBm ±0.00 dB
Triggerable Pulse Peak Power Sensors (fm > 1.5 MHz) (-30 to +20 dBm)
80340A
80343A
80344A
50 MHz to 18 GHz
-20 to +20 dBm (Trig.)
-30 to +20 dBm (Free Run)
50MHz to 26.5 GHz
50 MHz to 40 GHz
-20 to 0 dBm (Trig.)
-30 to 0 dBm (Free Run)
±0.13 dB, 0 dBm to -30 dBm
±0.13 dBm, ±0.01 dB/dB
from 0 dBm to +20 dBm
Type
N(m)1
50Ω
+23 dBm
(200 mW)
1.12:0.01 - 2 GHz
1.22:2 - 12.4 GHz
1.37:12.4 - 18 GHz
146 mm
(5.75 in)
±0.13 dB, 0 dBm to -30 dBm
Type
K(m)1
50Ω
37 mm
(1.44 in)
0.3 kg
(0.6lb)
1.50:18 - 26.5 GHz
1.92:26.5 - 40 GHz
See NOTES next page
A-2
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Power Sensors
Table A-2: Power Sensor Cal Uncertainties
Freq. (GHz)
Root Sum of Squares (RSS) Uncertainties (%)3
Lower
Upper
80301A
80302A
80303A
80304A
80310A
80313A
80314A
80320A
80323A
80324A
80321A4
80330A
80333A
80334A
Min
1
1.04
1.64
1.58
1.58
4.54
1.58
1
2
1.20
1.73
1.73
1.73
4.67
1.73
2
4
1.33
1.93
1.91
1.91
4.89
1.90
3
6
1.41
2.03
2.02
2.01
5.01
2.01
6
8
1.52
2.08
2.07
2.06
5.12
2.06
8
12.4
1.92
2.55
2.54
2.53
5.56
2.53
12.4
18
2.11
2.83
2.80
2.79
5.89
2.78
18
26.5
——
3.63
3.68
3.62
——
3.59
26.5
40
——
6.05
5.54
5.39
——
5.30
See NOTES below
NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The K connector is electrically and mechanically compatible with the APC-3.5 and SMA connectors. Use a Type N(m) to
SMA(f) adapter (P/N 29835) for calibration of power sensors with Type K(m) connectors.
For frequencies above 8 GHz, add power linearity to system linearity.
Square root of sum of the individual uncertainties squared (RSS).
Cal Factor numbers allow for 3% repeatability when connecting attenuator to sensor, and 3% for attenuator measurement
uncertainty and mismatch of sensor/pad combination.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
A-3
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
A.2.2
Directional Bridges
The 80500 CW Directional Bridges are designed specifically for use with Giga-tronics power meters to
measure the Return Loss/SWR of a test device. Each bridge includes an EEPROM which has been
programmed with Identification Data for that bridge.
Table A-3: Directional Bridge Selection Guide
Bridge Selection Guide
Model
Freq. Range/
Power
Range
Max.
Power
Power Linearity4
(Frequency >8 GHz)
Input
Test
Port
Directtivity
Wgt
VSWR
Precision CW Return Loss Bridges
80501
80502
10 MHz to 18
GHz
-35 to +20 dBm
80503
10 MHz to 26.5
GHz
-35 to +20 dBm
80504
10 MHz to 40
GHz
-35 to +20 dBm
Type N(f)
50 Ω
38 dB
APC-7(f)
50 Ω
40 dB
SMA(f)
50 Ω
SMA(f)
50 Ω
35 dB
Type K(f)
50 Ω
Type K(f)
50 Ω
30 dB
Type N(f)
50 Ω
+27 dBm
(0.5W)
-35 to +10 dBm ±0.1 dB
+10 to +20 dBm ±0.1 dB
±0.005 dB/dB
<1.17:0.01 - 8 GHz
<1.27:8 - 18 GHz
0.340 kg
<1.13:0.01 - 8 GHz
<1.22:8 - 18 GHz
<1.22:0.01 - 18 GHz
<1.27:8 - 26.5 GHz
0.198 kg
<1.35:0.01 - 26.5 GHz
<1.44:26.5 - 40 GHz
The Selection Guide in Table A-3 shows primary specifications. Additional specifications are:
Bridge Frequency Response:
Insertion Loss:
Directional Bridge Linearity Plus
Zero Set & Noise vs. Input Power:
(50 MHz, 25°C ±5°C, 0 dBm Ref.)
Return loss measurements using the 8003 can be frequency
compensated using the standard Open/Short supplied with the
bridge.
6.5 dB, nominal, from input port to test port
+27 dBm (0.5 W)
.30
Measurement Error (dB)
DIRECTIONAL BRIDGE MEASUREMENT ERROR
.25
.20
.15
.10
.05
0.00
20
15
10
5
-5
-10
-15 -20 -25
-30 -35 -40
Power (dBm)
Weight:
Directional Bridge Accessories:
Dimensions:
A-4
80501: 340 g (12 oz)
80502: 340 g (12 oz)
80503: 198 g (7 oz)
80504: 198 g (7 oz)
An Open/Short is included for establishing the 0 dB return loss
reference during path calibration.
80501: 76 x 50 x 28 mm (3 x 2 x 1 1/8 in)
80502: 76 x 50 x 28 mm (3 x 2 x 1 1/8 in)
80503: 19 x 38 x 29 mm (3/4 x 1 1/2 x 2 1/8 in)
80504: 19 x 38 x 29 mm (3/4 x 1 1/2 x 2 1/8 in)
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
B
System Configuration
B.1
Introduction
This appendix contains the default function settings for the 8003, it also contains instructions for the
proper connection of the most common test equipment and the initial printer installation directions for
the 8003’s ability to generate hardcopies of displayed data and/or plots. It is assumed that the user has
read all manuals for other test equipment in the system, and has set up the test equipment properly.
B.2
8003 Default Parameters
Factory programmed settings of various user definable functions have the following defaults whenever
there have been no changes made to the settings by the operator during any test routines. The default
settings are given for the CURSOR, SENSOR, DISPLAY, CHANNEL and SOURCE component
parameters.
Table B-1: 8003 Default Settings
CURSOR
SENSOR
Function
Default Setting
Cross Cursor
OFF, frequency at 10000 MHz
Delta Cursor
OFF
Markers
OFF
Active Channel
1
Sensor Mode
DC
Sensor Specific for Source of Frequency
Back Panel SWP Input
Sensor Frequency
0.05 GHz
Sensor Cal Factor
0
Sensor Offset
0
Sensor Full Band
DISPLAY
Path Cal Option
NO
Setup
Swept Mode
Color Intensity
RED, GREEN, BLUE are bright
Graticule Color
GREEN
Frequency Label
ON
Title
OFF
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
B-1
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
Table B-1: 8003 Default Settings (Continued)
CHANNEL
SOURCE
B-2
Function
Default Setting
Mode
Swept Frequency
Parameter
A, B, C A/B for Channels 1 through 4
Color
CYAN, RED, YELLOW, MAGENTA for channels
1 through 4 respectively dB Mode.
Format
dB mode.
Memorized Trace
0
Measurement
Absolute Measurement
Average
OFF, average factor = 8
Smoothing
OFF, smooth apert = 5%
Continue Auto Scale
OFF
Scale per Division
20 dB
Reference Position
Center
Reference Level
0 dB
Bandwidth Search Value
-3.00 dB
Channel Search Level
-3.00 dB
CW Mode Setup
REL OFF
Max Hold
OFF
Min Hold
OFF
Channel Title
OFF
Limit Line
OFF
Modulate Bias Voltage
0 Volt
Signal Source Mode
Start/Stop Swept Freq
Start Frequency
Sweeper Start Frequency or 1 MHz if not controlled
by the 8003
Stop Frequency
Sweeper Stop Frequency
Sweep Time
200 ms
RF Power Level
OFF, minimum RF level of the signal source or
0 dBm if not controlled by the 8003.
Source Modulation
OFF
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
System Configuration
B.3
8003 System
The 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer is always used with other test equipment and accessories to make a
complete component measurement system. See Section B.3.3.1 which outlines the proper connection of
the most common test equipment.
B.3.1
Sensor Installation
The 8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer should be connected only to the Giga-tronics Series 803XXA
Power Sensors. A special sensor cable is shipped with the 8003 to connect the power sensor to any of the
three analyzer sensor inputs marked A, B, and C. The sensor cable is made specifically for the 8003
Analyzer and should not be used with other products. See Section A.2.1 for the technical specifications
and data for the Series 803XXA Power Sensors used with the 8003 Scalar Analyzer.
To make swept component measurements, a scalar analyzer is always used with a swept microwave
source (sweeper), one or more power sensors, and a microwave signal splitting device (usually a return
loss bridge, directional coupler, or power splitter).
B.3.2
Bridge Installation
Only Giga-tronics Series 80500 Return Loss Bridges can be used with the 8003 Analyzer. If you are
using a bridge, it should be connected to any of the three analyzer sensor inputs marked A, B, or C via
the sensor cable shipped with the analyzer.
☛
NOTE: The bridge uses the same sensor cable as the power sensors.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
B-3
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
B.3.3
Sweeper Installation
The 8003 supports the following sweepers:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Giga-tronics 12720A
Giga-tronics 7200 Series or 910 Series Synthesized Sweep Generators
Giga-tronics 610 Series Sweep Oscillator
HP8350A/B with an RF plug-in (HP86200 series with the HP11869A adapter)
HP8340A/B, HP8341A/B or HP8360 Synthesized Sweepers
Marconi 6300 Series Sweepers
Wiltron 6600B Sweep Generators
Wiltron 6700B Synthesized Sweep Generators
The 8003 supports a variety of sweepers. Because the analyzer requires several connections to the
microwave sweepers, please refer to the installation interconnection instructions on the this page and
the next.
B.3.3.1
8003 to Sweeper BNC Connections
Connections shown in capital letters are the actual function names printed on the instrument housing
(on the rear panels).
FOR: (Desired Function)
Sweep Ramp
Signal
Prevention of Band-Switching
Glitches
AC Detection
SWEEP IN
BLANKING INPUT
AC MOD OUTPUT
Giga-tronics (12720A)
RAMP OUT
BLANK/MARKER OUT
Pulse in
Giga-tronics (7200 Series)
RAMP OUT
Neg. blank out
Pm in
Giga-tronics (910 Series)
Sweep out
Unblank/markers
Pulse in
Giga-tronics (610 Series)
Sweep out
Unblank
Pulse in
HP 8350
Sweep out
POS Z BLANK
Pulse in
HP 8340 Series and HP 8360
SWEEP OUTPUT
POS BLANK
PULSE INPUT
Marconi (6300 Series)
SWEEP o/p
SYNC o/p
PULSE i/p
Wiltron (6600B Series)
HORIZ OUTPUT
SEQ SYNC OUTPUT
EX AM INPUT
Wiltron (6700B Series)
HORIZ OUTPUT
RETRACE BLANKING o/p
(SHIFT → Trigger 109)
PULSE GATE TRIG o/p
CONNECT FROM:
8003 Analyzer
CONNECT TO:
B-4
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
System Configuration
B.3.3.2
GPIB Interconnect Cable Connections
GPIB Connector
Label Out
To Set Sweeper Address
8003 Analyzer
GPIB PRIVATE
Press: CONFIG → GPIB DEVICES
(softkey) → SOURCE ADRS
(softkey) → 20 → GHz/dB
Giga-tronics (12720A)
GPIB
Press: CONFIG → GPIB
(softkey) → 20 → GHz
Giga-tronics (7200 Series)
REMOTE
Press: SPECIAL FUNCTION → A →
S_ADDR (softkey) → 20 →
GHz/dB
Giga-tronics (910 & 610)
REMOTE
Rear Panel DIP Switches set to:
Position:
1 2 4 8 16
Setting:
0 0 1 0 1
HP 8350 Series or HP 8360 Series
HP INTERFACE BUS
Press: SHIFT → LCL → 20 → dBm/dB
HP 8340 Series
HP INTERFACE BUS
Press: SHIFT → LOCAL → 20 → kHz/msec
Marconi 6300 Series
SYSTEM
Press: SHIFT → STATUS 2 → S_ADDR
(softkey) → 20 → kHz/int
Wiltron 6600B Series
IEEE 488 INTERFACE
Rear Panel DIP Switches set to:
Position:
1 2 4 8 16
Setting:
0 0 1 0 1
NOTE: If GPIB communication with the Model 8003 is not automatically established when the 8003 and the 6600B
are interconnected and turned on, press the RESET key on the front of the Wiltron 6600B Series instrument.)
Wiltron 6700B Series
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
IEEE 488 INTERFACE
Press: SHIFT → ADRS → 20 → ENTER
B-5
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
B.4
Printer Installation
The 8003 supports the following printers for generating hardcopies of displayed data and/or plots:
•
•
•
HP PaintJet Printer
HP ThinkJet Printer
HP LaserJet Family of Printers
The installation instructions on the next 3 pages will define the necessary interconnections and address
settings for each of these printers, and will also describe the RS-232 cable required when using the HP
LaserJet family of printers.
B-6
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
System Configuration
B.4.1
PaintJet Color GPIB Cable Interconnections
Instrument Connector Label
To Set Printer Address
GPIB/PRIVATE
Press: CONFIG → GPIB DEVICES → (softkey) →
PRINTER ADDRESS (softkey) → 1 → GHz/dB
HP-IB Connector (rear panel
of printer)
Set rear panel DIP switches as shown below:
CONNECT FROM:
8003 Analyzer
CONNECT TO:
HP PaintJet Color Graphics
Printer
I
O
Õ
Õ
A1
A2
Õ
A3
SCS
Õ
NORM
ROM 8
Õ
PC 8
MET
Õ
ENG
NOTE: After setting the address, the printer must be turned OFF and then ON again.
B.4.2
ThinkJet GPIB Cable Interconnections
Instrument Connector Label
To Set Printer Address
GPIB/PRIVATE
Press: CONFIG → GPIB DEVICES → (softkey) →
PRINTER ADDRESS (softkey) → 1 → GHz/dB
GP-IB Connector (rear panel
of printer)
Set rear panel DIP switches as shown below:
CONNECT FROM:
8003 Analyzer
CONNECT TO:
HP PaintJet Color Graphics
Printer
SRQ EN
LISTEN ALWAYS
I
A1
6 7
A2
A3
4 5
A5
A4
O
1 2 3
ADDRESS
NOTE: After setting the address, the printer must be turned OFF and then ON again.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
B-7
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
B.4.3
LaserJet Family RS-232 Cable Interconnections
Instrument Connector Label
To Set Printer Address
RS-232 Port (rear panel
female connection)
N/A – Direct Connection
RS-232
N/A – Direct Connection
CONNECT FROM:
8003 Analyzer
CONNECT TO:
HP LaserJet Family
B.4.3.1
RS-232 Electrical Description
M -M Cable
Printer Connection:
8003 Connection:
Pin Number
Function
1
FG – Frame Ground
2
TD – Transmit data to the 8003
3
RD – Received data from the 8003
7
SG – Signal Ground
20
DTR – Data Terminal Ready
1
FG – Frame Ground
2
TD – Received Data from the printer
3
RD – Transmit Data to the printer
7
SG – Signal Ground
20
DTR – Data Terminal Ready
Since the HP LaserJet printer is designed to operate through either RS-232 or RS-422 cable
interconnections, there is a switch (SW 1- Switch 1) and a jumper (JP 2- Jumper 2) on the printer's rear
panel that must be properly set. The diagrams on the next page will show the location and proper
positioning of these components.
B-8
☛
NOTE: The 8003 Analyzer operates only at a Baud rate of 9600.
☛
NOTE: After setting the address, the printer must be turned OFF and then ON again.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
System Configuration
B.4.4
LaserJet Printer Switch & Jumper Location and
Settings
SW 1 Location and Setting
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
JP 2 Location and Setting:
B-9
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
B.5
Plotter GPIB Installation Interconnections & Pen
Colors
The 8003 Analyzer can plot data on most compatible GPIB plotters. The instructions given on the next
5 pages cover the plotters that are generally the most commonly used in the industry.
•
•
•
HP 7550A
HP 7440A
HP 7475A
•
•
HP 7470A
HP 7090A
When you wish to connect a plotter to the analyzer, please refer to the installation instructions given for
your particular plotter. Initial pen colors to correspond with the 8003’s default color format are also
defined.
B.5.1
HP 7550A
Instrument Connector Label
To Set Printer Address
GPIB/PRIVATE
Press: CONFIG → GPIB DEVICES → (softkey) →
PLOTTER (softkey) → 5 → GHz/dB
HP-IB Connector
The HP 7550A should be set to its default address
of 5. This can be checked by following the
instructions given in the HP operating manual
pertaining to HP-IB operation.
CONNECT FROM:
8003 Analyzer
CONNECT TO:
HP 7550A Plotter
B.5.1.1
HP 7550A Pen Color Format (8 Pens)
(When pens are formatted as follows, the colors will correspond to the 8003's default display.)
B-10
Pen Number
Color
Displayed Function
1
Black
Giga-tronics Logo
2
Red
Channel 2
3
Yellow
Channel 3
4
Green
Grid, Title, Channel Title, and Frequency
5
Cyan
Channel 1
6
Blue
Not Used
7
Magenta
Channel 4
8
Not Used
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
System Configuration
B.5.2
HP 7440A
Instrument Connector Label
To Set Printer Address
GPIB/PRIVATE
Press: CONFIG → GPIB DEVICES → (softkey) →
PLOTTER (softkey) → 5 → GHz/dB
HP-IB Connector
Set rear panel DIP switches as shown below:
CONNECT FROM:
8003 Analyzer
CONNECT TO:
HP 7440A Plotter
I
4
8
ADDRESS
1
2
O
16
US
B.5.2.1
A4
HP 7440A Pen Color Format (8 Pens)
(When pens are formatted as follows, the colors will correspond to the 8003's default display.)
Pen Number
Color
Displayed Function
1
Black
Giga-tronics Logo
2
Red
Channel 2
3
Yellow
Channel 3
4
Green
Grid, Title, Channel Title, and Frequency
5
Cyan
Channel 1
6
Blue
Not Used
7
Magenta
Channel 4
8
Not Used
☛
NOTE: After setting the address, the plotter must be turned OFF and then ON again.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
B-11
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
B.5.3
HP 7475A
Instrument Connector Label
To Set Printer Address
GPIB/PRIVATE
Press: CONFIG → GPIB DEVICES → (softkey) →
PLOTTER (softkey) → 5 → GHz/dB
HP-IB Connector
Set rear panel DIP switches as shown below:
CONNECT FROM:
8003 Analyzer
B.5.3.1
MET
US
16
4
8
1
2
I
O
ADDRESS
A4
HP 7475A Plotter
A3
CONNECT TO:
HP 7475A Pen Color Format (6 Pens)
(When pens are formatted as follows, the colors will correspond to the 8003's default display.)
Pen Number
Color
Displayed Function
1
Black
Giga-tronics Logo
2
Red
Channel 2
3
Yellow
Channel 3
4
Green
Grid, Title, Channel Title, and Frequency
5
Cyan
Channel 1
6
Blue
Not Used
☛
B-12
NOTE: After setting the address, the plotter must be turned OFF and then ON again.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
System Configuration
B.5.4
HP 7470A
Instrument Connector Label
To Set Printer Address
GPIB/PRIVATE
Press: CONFIG → GPIB DEVICES → (softkey) →
PLOTTER (softkey) → 5 → GHz/dB
HP-IB Connector
Set rear panel DIP switches as shown below:
CONNECT FROM:
8003 Analyzer
CONNECT TO:
HP 7475A Plotter
B.5.4.1
US
16
4
8
1
2
I
O
A4
ADDRESS
HP 7470A Pen Color Format (2 Pens)
(When pens are formatted as follows, the colors will correspond to the 8003's default display.)
Pen Number
Color
Displayed Function
1
Black
Giga-tronics Logo, Channel 1, Channel 3,
Channel 4
2
Red
Channel 2, Grid, Title, Channel Title and
Frequency
☛
NOTE: After setting the address, the plot must be turned OFF and then ON again.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
B-13
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
B.5.5
HP 7090A
Instrument Connector Label
To Set Printer Address
GPIB/PRIVATE
Press: CONFIG → GPIB DEVICES → (softkey) →
PLOTTER (softkey) → 5 → GHz/dB
HP-IB Connector
Set rear panel DIP switches as shown below:
CONNECT FROM:
8003 Analyzer
CONNECT TO:
ADDRESS
{
Õ
Õ
Õ
Õ
Õ
Õ
NORMAL
I
HP 7090A Plotter
O
LISTEN ONLY
B.5.5.1
16 8
4
2
1
}
FACTORY SET
ADDRESS OF 5
HP 7090A Pen Color Format (6 Pens)
(When pens are formatted as follows, the colors will correspond to the 8003's default display.)
Pen Number
Color
Displayed Function
1
Black
Giga-tronics Logo, Channel
2
Red
Channel 2
3
Yellow
Channel 3
4
Green
Grid, Title, Channel Title and Frequency
5
Cyan
Channel 1
6
Blue
Not Used
☛
B-14
NOTE: After setting the address, the plotter must be turned OFF and then ON again.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
System Configuration
B.6
Connecting Analyzer to an Instrument Controller
The 8003 Analyzer can be remotely controlled via the GPIB (IEEE 488) bus. To connect the 8003
Analyzer to an IEEE 488 compatible Instrument Controller, use the GPIB connection marked “GPIB/
SYSTEM” on the rear panel of the analyzer.
☛
NOTE: This is a different GPIB connector than the “GPIB/PRIVATE” connection used for
sweeper, plotter and printer control.
Be sure that the remote controller is connected only to the GPIB/SYSTEM connection as it will not
function if connected to the “PRIVATE” interface.
For further information see the installation and address setting instructions given on page 3-1 of
Chapter 3, REMOTE OPERATION.
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
B-15
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer
B-16
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Index
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzer Index
Symbols
*ESR? 3-20
*IDN? 3-23
Numerics
8003 Default Settings B-1
8003 Features 1-1
8003 GPIB Commands 3-8
8003 Introduction
8003 Features 1-1
Description 1-1
8003 Power Sweep Measurements
8003 System B-3
Sweeper Installation B-4
2-104
A
About This Manual ix
Absolute Power & Swept Capabilities 2-13
AC Mode Output Connector Check 4-12
Accuracy 1-9
Absolute Power Measurement Accuracy 1-11
Cal Factor Correction 1-12
Instrument plus Power Sensor Linearity 1-11
Noise Uncertainty 1-12
Reflection Accuracy = Scalar Accuracy+ Reflection Bridge
Accuracy 1-10
Transmission Accuracy = Instrument Accuracy +
Mismatch Uncertainty 1-9
Transmission Loss or Gain Measurements 1-9
Zeroing Accuracy 1-12
Accurate Range Measurements 2-102
ALL SWEPT and ALL CW Softkeys 2-21
AVG Softkey
AVG N 2-24
AVG ON/OFF 2-24
SMOOTH APERT 2-25
SMOOTH ON/OFF 2-25
SMOOTHING 2-24
B
Bandwidth Searches 2-91
Bias Output Connector Check
BIAS, BV 3-12
4-12
CAL SWP RAMP Softkey
STANDARD 2-61
VPROPF 2-61
Calibrating for Power Measurement 2-67
Calibrator Frequency Check 4-5
Calibrator Output Power Reference Level 4-3
Calibrator Verification Procedure 4-3
Case Insensitivity
Command Execution 3-10
CHAN, CH 3-13
Channel & Function Selection 2-12
CHANNEL Controls 2-15
DEFINE Key 2-15
OFF Key 2-15
Channel Titles 2-8
Cleaning 1-6
CLEAR N Softkey
CLEAR ALL MEM 2-49
CLEAR ALL N 2-49
CLEAR N 2-49
Command Execution
ds Definition 3-10
EOL Definition 3-10
hs Defintion 3-10
us Definition 3-10
Common Structure 3-7
CONFIG Key
CAL SWP RAMP Softkey 2-61
CORRCTN OFF Softkey 2-60
CW CAL FACTOR Softkey 2-60
CW FREQ Softkey 2-59
FROM SOURCE Softkey 2-60
GPIB DEVICES Softkey 2-60
PULSE SENSORS Softkey 2-60
SENSOR OFFSET Softkey 2-60
SENSORS AC/DC Softkey 2-57
SENSORS CW FREQ Softkey 2-57
SERVICE Softkey 2-61
Connecting Analyzer to an Instrument Controller B-15
Conventions xi
Cooling 1-6
Cursor Delta (∆) Functions 2-92
Cursor Frequency 2-8
CURSOR Key 2-40
CURSOR ∆ ON/OFF Softkey 2-41
CURSOR FREQ Softkey 2-40
CURSOR ON/OFF Softkey 2-40
CURSR → MRKR N Softkey 2-44
DEFINE MRKR N Softkey 2-45
SEARCH Softkey 2-43
CURSOR, CUR 3-14
Cursors & Markers 1-8, 2-87
Cursors on Multiple Channels 2-93
Custom Modifiers
3-34
CW Power Measurement Command Structure 3-36
CW Power Measurements 2-98
C
D
CAL 3-12
Cal Factor Corrections CW Mode 2-99
CAL Key 2-36
CAL SENSOR Softkey 2-38
CLR PTH CAL Softkey 2-37
SHORT/OPEN Softkey 2-36
THRU Softkey 2-37
ZERO SENSOR Softkey 2-39
CAL SENSOR Softkey
CAL ALL 2-38
SENSOR A, B, or C CAL 2-38
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
DAC Output Connector Check 4-13
DEFINE Key
A-, B-, C- 2-16
A, B, or C 2-15
A/, B/, C/ 2-15
BIAS VOLTAGE Softkey 2-16
CW/SWEPT Softkey 2-16
DIFF Softkey 2-16
RATIO Softkey 2-15
SINGLE SENSOR Softkey 2-15
Index-1
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzers
DEFINE MRKR N Softkey
CLEAR ALL MRKRS 2-46
CLEAR MRKR N 2-46
CURSOR FREQ 2-45
DEFINE MRKR N 2-45
MRKR N ON and MRKR N OFF 2-45
Definition of ASCII Codes 3-26
Description 1-1
Device Clear
Channel, Cursor, Sensor, Display, Channel, Source 3-18
Directional Bridges A-4
DISABLE 3-19
Display 3-18
Display Description 2-8
Channel Titles 2-8
Cursor Frequency 2-8
Front Panel Function Key/Remote Light 2-8
Softkey Labels 2-8
Start, Center, CW Frequency 2-9
Stop, Span 2-8
DISPLAY Key 2-24
AVG Softkey 2-24
DISPLAY SETUP Softkey 2-33
GRAPH/READOUT Softkey 2-32
HOLD ON/OFF Softkey 2-26
LIMIT LINES Softkey 2-31
PLOT & PRINT Softkey 2-27
UNITS Softkey 2-32
DISPLAY SETUP Softkey
ALPHA/CURS POS 2-34
CH TTL ON/OFF 2-34
CHANNEL COLOR 2-33
COLOR 2-33
FREQ LBL ON/OFF 2-34
GRAT COLOR 2-33
LABELS 2-33
TITLE 2-34
TITLE ON/OFF 2-34
UNDO/ERR TTL 2-34
DISPLAY STATUS Softkey
DISPLAY CURRENT and DISPLAY PREV 2-48
DISPLAY N 2-48
ds Definition 3-10
E
ENABLE 3-19
Environmental Requirements
EOL Definition 3-10
Equipment Required 4-6
1-5
F
FIXED 3-21
Front & Rear Panel Descriptions 2-1
Front Panel Function Key/Remote Light 2-8
Front Panel Operation (Instructions) 2-66
THRU Softkey
2-37
FUNCTION Controls 2-18
MEAS Key 2-18
SCALE Key 2-22
G
General 4-1
GPIB Interconnect Cable Connections B-5
GPIB Interface 1-13
GPIB Port Check 4-10
GPIB Private Port Check 4-11
GPIB/PRIVATE Interface
Pass Through Feature 3-72
GPIB/Private Port Check 4-11
GPIB/System Port Check 4-10
Graph & Readout Display Modes 2-13
Index-2
H
Hints on Simplified Scaling 2-86
HP 7090A
HP 7090A Pen Color Format (6 Pens) B-14
HP 7440A
HP 7440A Pen Color Format (8 Pens) B-11
HP 7470A
HP 7470A Pen Color Format (2 Pens) B-13
HP 7475A B-12
HP 7475A Pen Color Format (6 Pens) B-12
HP 7550A
HP 7550A Pen Color Format (8 Pens) B-10
HP Printer Installation
LaserJet Family RS-232 Cable Interconnections B-8
PaintJet Color GPIB Cable Interconnections B-7
ThinkJet GPIB Cable Interconnections B-7
hs Definition 3-10
I
IEEE Bus Interface
Connect the System Controller 3-1
Set the GPIB Address 3-1
INPUT 3-24
Insertion & Return Loss Measurements 2-75
Installation 1-2
Cleaning 1-6
Cooling 1-6
Environmental Requirements 1-5
Items Furnished 1-5
Items Required 1-6
Power Input, Fuse & Voltage Selector 1-3
Power Requirements 1-4
Power Sensor Precautions 1-3
Receiving Inspection 1-6
Safety 1-2
Tools & Test Equipment 1-6
Instrument Plus Power Sensor Linearity 4-7
Setup Parameters 4-8
Test Description 4-7
Test Procedure 4-10, 4-11
Introduction
Operation 2-1
Remote Operation 3-1
System Configuration B-1
Items Furnished 1-5
Items Required 1-6
K
Key Operation
START Key 2-52
STOP Key 2-53
KEYEM, KE 3-25
L
LaserJet Family RS-232 Cable Interconnections B-8
RS-232 Electrical Description B-8
LaserJet Printer Swtc. & Jmpr. Loc. and Sts. B-9
LIMIT LINES Softkey 2-31
ABORT PLOT 2-31
CLEAR ALL SEGMENTS 2-31
DEFINE SEGMENT 2-31
LMT LNS ON/OFF 2-31
PLOT ENTRIES 2-31
SEGMENT N CLEAR 2-31
Line Voltage & Fuse Selection 1-3
Power Sensors 1-3
Power Sensors Accessories 1-3
Line Voltage and Fuse Selection 1-3
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Index
M
Making a Device Measurement 2-73
Markers 2-94
MAXHOLD and MINHOLD ON/OFF Softkey 2-21
FUNCTION Controls
2-18
MEAS Key
ABS PWR PATHCAL Softkey 2-19
CW OPTION Softkey 2-21
TRACE MEMORY Softkey 2-19
Measurement Modes 2-102
CW Mode 2-102
Swept Mode with AC Detection 2-103
Swept Mode with DC Detection 2-103
Measurement Query Command Structure 3-30
MEMORY Key 2-47
CLEAR N Softkey 2-49
DISPLAY STATUS Softkey 2-48
PREV STATE Softkey 2-47
RECALL N Softkey 2-47
STORE N Softkey 2-47
Min & Max Search 2-87
Mixed Mode Measurements 2-98
Mods. Spec. to 8034XA Series Peak Sensors Only
3-51
O
OFF 2-15
Operation 2-1
Other CW Functions 2-100
Output Power Reference Level
OUTPUT, OP 3-30
4-3
P
PaintJet Color GPIB Cable Interconnections B-7
Path Calibration Correction for Component Variations 2-69
Frequency Response Correction 2-70
Set Up Sweep Parameters 2-69
Path Calibration Memory 2-13
Performance Verification
Calibrator Procedure 4-3
Frequency Check 4-5
GPIB/Private Port Check 4-11
GPIB/System Port Check 4-10
Instrument Plus Power Sensor Linearity 4-7
Output Power Reference Level 4-3
Performance Verification Tests 4-6
Performance Verification Tests 4-6
PLOT 3-33
PLOT & PRINT Softkey 2-27
ABORT PLOT 2-30
ABORT PRINT 2-28
DEFINE CUSTOM 2-29
DEFINE TRACE 2-29
ED LOGO 2-30
INK PRINT 2-28
LASER PRINT 2-28
PAINT PRINT 2-28
PLOT 4 2-28
PLOT ALL 2-27
PLOT CUSTOM 2-29
PRINT 2-28
SC P1P2 2-29
SPECIAL PLOT 2-29
Plotter GPIB Install. Interconnections & Pen Colors B-10
Plotter GPIB Installation Interconnections & Pen Colors
HP 7090A B-14
HP 7440A B-11
HP 7470A B-13
HP 7550A B-10
POWER 3-36
Power Input, Fuse & Voltage Selector 1-3
POWER Key 2-54
POWER Function Key 2-54
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
POWER Softkey 2-54
Power Measurements 2-95
Power On 2-14
Power Requirements 1-4
Standard Voltage Selector & Fuse Holder 1-5
VDE Type Voltage Selector & Fuse Holder 1-5
Power Sensor Precautions 1-3
Power Sensor Selection A-1
Power Sensors 1-3
Directional Bridges A-4
Introduction A-1
Power Sensor Selection A-1
Selection Charts A-2
Power Sensors Accessories 1-3
POWER Softkey
ANALOG/DIGITAL 2-55
FREQ 2-55
POWER SWEEP 2-55
PWR SWP ON/OFF 2-55
RF POWER ON/OFF 2-54
START POWER 2-55
STEP SIZE 2-55
STOP POWER 2-55
SWEEP TIME 2-55
Sweep Time 2-55
Preparation for Reshipment 1-6
Printer Installation B-6
LaserJet Printer Swtc. & Jumper Loc. and Sts. B-9
Programming the 8003
Typical HP-Basic Prg. - Stepped CW Measurements 3-6
Typical HP-Basic Prg. - Swept Measurements 3-5
Typical TBASIC Prg. - Stepped CW Measurements 3-4
Typical TBASIC Prg. - Swept Measurements 3-3
R
Rear Panel Inputs & Outputs 1-14
Rear Panel Operation
GPIB Address Selection 2-7
Receiving Inspection 1-6
Record of Manual Changes xiii
CURSOR Key
2-46
REF LEVEL Softkey 2-23
REF → CURSOR 2-23
REF → MAX 2-23
REF LEVEL - F2-1 2-23
Reflection Measurements 1-10
REL ON/OFF Softkey 2-21
RGB Video Output Connector Check
RS-232 Electrical Description B-8
4-13
S
Safety Precautions 1-2
SCALE Key 2-22
AUTOSCALE Softkey 2-22
CONT AUTOSCL Softkey 2-22
REF LEVEL Softkey 2-23
REF POS Softkey 2-22
SCALE FACTOR Softkey 2-22
Scaling the Display 2-84
Search Functions Using the Cursor 2-87
SEARCH Softkey
BANDWIDTH (BW) 2-43
FLATNESS 2-44
MAX and MIN 2-44
SEARCH LEFT and SEARCH RIGHT 2-43
SEARCH VALUE 2-43
Searches on Frequency Selective Devices 2-89
Sensor Definition Command Structure 3-51
Sensor Offsets 2-100
Sensors & Sensor Calibration 2-12
Serial Port Check 4-10
Index-3
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzers
SERVICE Softkey 2-61
ABORT 2-62, 2-65
CAL LOC 2-64
CHANGE COLOR 2-63
CIRCLES and 1 COLOR 2-63
CLEAR PASSWORD 2-62, 2-65
COLOR BARS 2-63
DEFINE PASSWORD 2-62, 2-64
DONE 2-62, 2-63
ENABLE INPUT 2-64, 2-65
FIRST PAGE and LAST PAGE 2-64
GRID L/S and DOTS L/S 2-63
PAGE UP 2-64
PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN 2-64
PASSWORD 2-64
PROGRAM EEPROM 2-65
SENSOR EEPROM 2-63
SET CAL 2-61
SET CAL OUTPUT 2-61
SET CAL S/N 2-61
SET TIME 2-62, 2-64
TEST PATTERN 2-63
Set the GPIB Address
Programming the 8003 3-2
SHORT/OPEN Softkey
FULL BAND A, B, or C Y/N 2-37
STORE SHORT A, B, or C 2-36
Signal Sources 1-15
SINGLE SENSOR Softkey 2-15
Single-Sensor Insertion Loss Measurement 2-75
Single-Sensor Return Loss Measurements 2-79
Single-Sensor vs Two-Sensor Measurements 2-78
Softkey 2-46
Softkey Functional Description 2-12
Absolute Power & Swept Capabilities 2-13
Channel & Function Selection 2-12
Graph & Readout Display Modes 2-13
Path Calibration Memory 2-13
Power On 2-14
Sensors & Sensor Calibration 2-12
Softkey Labels & Color Indications 2-12
Trace Memory 2-14
Softkey Labels 2-8
Softkey Labels & Color Indications 2-12
SOURCE Controls 2-51
8003 Source Compatibility 2-51
ATE Operation 2-51
General Description 2-51
Key Operation 2-52
UPD SWP ON/OFF 2-52
Span Swept Freq. Source Mode Def. Cmd. Structure 3-67
Special Configurations xv
Specifications 1-7
Accuracy 1-9
Cursors & Markers 1-8
START Key
START, CENTER, and CW 2-52
Start, Center, CW Frequency 2-9
STOP Key
STOP, DF and CW 2-53
Stop, Span 2-8
Structured GPIB Language 3-7
Channel Bias Voltage Definition Command Structure
BIAS 3-12
Channel Definition Command Structure
CHAN, CH 3-13
Command Execution 3-10
Common Structure 3-7
Cursor Definition Command Structure
CURSOR, CUR 3-14
CW Power Measurement Command Structure
POWER 3-36
Fast Step CW Meas. Mode Prg. Example 3-48
Fast-CW Mode Programming Example 3-43
TTL-Triggered Fast-CW Mode Prg. Expl. 3-47
Disable Private Bus Command Structure
DISABLE 3-19
External Status Register Query Command Structure
*ESR? 3-20
Fixed Frequency Source Mode Definition Command
Structure
FIXED 3-21
Index-4
GPIB/PRIVATE Interface 3-71
Graph Display Definition Command Structure
GRAPH, GPH 3-23
IEEE GPIB Interface Characteristics 3-11
Input Command Structure
INPUT 3-24
Instrument Identifier Command Structure
*IDN? 3-23
Instrument Preset Command Structure
3-18
Key Stroke Emulation Enable/Disable Command
Structure
KEYEM, KE 3-25
Definition of ASCII Codes 3-26
Memory Command Structure
MEMORY 3-29
Plot Command Structure
PLOT 3-33
Plotter Command Programming Example 3-35
Print Definition Command Structure
PRINT 3-49
Readout Display Definition Command Structure
READOUT, TEXT, TXT 3-50
Sensor Calibration Command Structure
CAL 3-12
Sensor Definition Command Structure
SENSOR, SEN 3-51
Sensor Path Calibration Command Structure
THRU, PATH 3-69
Sensor Short/Open Calibration Command Structure
SHORT 3-53
Sensor Zeroing Command Structure
ZERO 3-70
Span Swept Frequency Source Mode Definition
Command Structure
SWPS 3-67
Start/Stop Swept Frequency Source Mode Definition
Command Structure
SWPF 3-64
Update Command Programming Example 3-66
STATUS MESSAGES
488.2 External Status 3-71
488.2 Status Byte 3-70
Swept Measurement Command Structure 3-54
SWP, SWP?
Limit Line Programming Example 3-63
Trace Memory Programming Example 3-61
Temperature & Low Level Offset Update Structure
RDTEMP 3-49
Structured GPIB Language Enable Private Bus Command
Structure
ENABLE 3-19
Sweep in Connector Check 4-11
SWEEP TIME Key 2-56
SWEEP TIME Softkey 2-56
SWEEP TIME Softkey
INT SWP TRIGGER 2-56
Sweeper Installation B-4
GPIB Interconnect Cable Connections B-5
Swept Measurement Command Structure 3-54
SWP, SWP? 3-54
SWPF 3-64
SWPS 3-67
System Configuration
8003 Default Settings B-1
8003 System B-3
Connecting Analyzer to an Instrument Controller B-15
Plotter GPIB Install. Interconnection & Pen Colors B-10
Printer Installation B-6
SYSTEM Controls 2-57
CONFIG Key 2-57
PRESET Key 2-57
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Index
T
U
Temperature & Low Level Offset Update Structure 3-49
Temperature Stability 2-102
ThinkJet GPIB Cable Interconnections B-7
Three-Sensor Configurations 2-82
THRU, PATH 3-69
Tools and Test Equipment 1-6
Trace Memory 2-14, 2-82
Two-Sensor Insertion Loss Measurements 2-77
Single-Sensor vs Two-Sensor Measurements 2-78
Two-Sensor Return Loss Measurements 2-81
UNITS Softkey 2-32
us Definition 3-10
Using Channels 2-76
Using the Cursor to Set the Reference Level
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
2-86
Z
ZERO 3-70
ZERO SENSOR Softkey 2-39
ZERO ALL and SENSOR (A, B, and C)
2-39
Index-5
8003 Precision Scalar Analyzers
Index-6
Manual 20791, Rev. C, June 2001
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement